CMPTR

PINARD / ROMER

W H A T ' S INSIDE: A Student-Tested, Faculty-Approved Approach to Teaching and Learning

Computer Applications and Concepts Innovative, Combined Coverage of Microsoft® Office 2010 Applications and Computer Concepts Course Mate: Interactive eBook, Flashcards, Quizzing, Interactive Games, Videos, and Interactive Infographics!

* PLUS * A FULL SUITE OF INSTRUCTOR SUPPLEMENTS

T U D E N T

T E S T E D ,

F A C U L T Y

A P P R O V E D

STATS

"I like how it is presented and I like the concept. Just looking at it makes me want

to read it.

- Chas Smith,

Student James Madison University

150

Number of faculty and students who have helped We worked with students and instructors to create the right mix of study tools. Find out more at w w w . c e n g a g e . c o m / 4 l t r p r e s s .

65% Average percent CMPTR

provides students with essential concepts and application information in easy-to-read chapters, 30 pages in length on average.

On the C M P T R CourseMate site at c e n g a g e . c o m / 4 l t r p r e s s , students will find multiple study tools including printable flash cards, interactive quizzes, graphing tutorials, podcasts, and audio/visual downloads.

>

+ 5

S T U D E N T

T E S T E D ,

F A C U L T Y

A P P R O V E D

THE© PROCESS MEET

SHOW

ARE WE

LISTENING?

Reach out to students to understand their learning preferences and motivations for taking a course. Talk with 50 students from 5 campuses about how they use their textbook and what they expect to get from it.

D I D W E DO IT? Develop learning solutions based on today's students and validate through iterative process to ensure the ideal product mix. C M P T R includes hundreds of photos and screenshots, providing visual examples of the concepts and steps shown in the text.

DO Y O U L I K E

IT?

Gain faculty approval to finalize the product and content mix specific to each discipline. C M P T R combines a visually interesting approach with the traditional presentation of computer concepts and applications to create a unique and accessible product.

WORK

ARE YOU

IN?

Publish the student-tested, faculty-approved teaching and learning solution.

ARE YOU

KIDDINC

Our research never ends! Continual feedback from students ensures that we keep up with their changing needs.

IN THE BOOK

Y

CMPTR Are you in? ^

A

TEACHING AND LEARNING SOLUTION*

AN INNOVATIVE CONCE

DESIGNED TO BEST REACH TODAY'S STUDENTS

IX)4-I

tijiMoluiKfWortu*

Imiw h«toliH-fli«ii««(«««w»tKmnii

1 O4.4

iKftwotc o .juiiui i,(_iil«iiinutWi

(ktetthttepnctoa^BpRpw teles. K»t lonwv Bwteyfcfwfailmdl Iwdte, piwtitlfd

1X34-5 H^fnt^md . . . I • '• |.(> .A [ ^ n V n ^ * * , ! ^ 4

i^n^n^tn^eCkdmiUtmorfKq^r-r^ 1MMt:«MdiHgirliS«RIotlutdjliontjUa«yolMwr4puibl


I

I

Chapter Review Cards at the back of the Student Edition provide students with a portable study tool containing all of the pertinent information for class preparation

%

m

CourseMate

Engaging. Trackable.

CourseMate brings course concepts to life with interactive learning, study, and exam preparation tools that support CMPTR. INCLUDES: Integrated eBook interactive teaching and learning tools, a n d Engagement Tracker, a first-of-its-kind t o o l t h a t m o n i t o r s s t u d e n t e n g a g e m e n t in t h e c o u r s e .

ON THE n WEB

'CMPTR ] [Are jouin'H

ONLINE RESOURCES NCLUDED! FOR INSTRUCTORS: • First D a y C l a s s I n s t r u c t i o n s • C u s t o m O p t i o n s through 4LTR+ P r o g r a m • A n n o t a t e d S o l u t i o n Files • Instructor's Manual • Test B a n k • PowerPoint® Slides • Instructor P r e p C a r d s • E n g a g e m e n t Tracker • E a s y A c c e s s to S A M C e n t r a l

FOR STUDENTS: • Interactive e B o o k • Auto-Graded Quizzes • Printable and Audio Flashcards • G a m e s : Memory & Beat the Clock • Additional Assignments • Videos • Interactive Infographics

Students sign in at login.cengagebrain.com

CMPTR

*

C O U R S E

t %

CENGAGE

T E C H N O L O G Y Learnings

CMPTR

© 2012 Course Technology, Cengage Learning

Vice President, Publisher: Nicole Jones Pinard

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. No part of this work covered by the copyright herein

Executive Editor: Marie L. Lee Acquisitions Editor: Brandi Shailer Senior Product Manager: Kathy Finnegan Product Manager: Leigh Hefferon

may be reproduced, transmitted, stored or used in any form or by any means graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including but not limited to photocopying, recording, scanning, digitizing, taping, Web distribution, information networks, or information storage and retrieval systems, except as permitted under Section 107 or 108 of the 1976 United States Copyright Act, without the prior written permission of the publisher.

Associate Product Manager: Julia Leroux-Lindsey

For product information and technology assistance, contact us at

Editorial Assistant: Jacqueline Lacaire

Cengage Learning Customer & Sales Support, 1-800-354-9706.

Vice President, Marketing: Cheryl Costantini

For permission to use material from this text or product, submit all requests online at www.cengage.com/permissions.

Senior Marketing Manager: Ryan DeGrote

Further permissions questions can be e-mailed to

Marketing Coordinator: Kristen Panciocco Developmental Editors: KatherineT. Pinard and Robin M. Romer Senior Content Project Manager: Jennifer Goguen McGrail

[email protected] Some of the product names and company names used in this book have been used for identification purposes only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturers and sellers. Microsoft and the Office logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks

Composition: MPS Content Services

of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Course

Art Director: Marissa Falco

Technology, Cengage Learning is an independent entity from the Microsoft

Cover Designer: Studio Montage

Corporation, and not affiliated with Microsoft in any manner. Disclaimer: Any fictional data related to persons or companies or URLs used

Cover Art: © Image Source/Getty Images

throughout this book is intended for instructional purposes only. At the time

Proofreader: Suzanne Huizenga

this book was printed, any such data was fictional and not belonging to any real

Indexer: Rich Carlson

persons or companies. Library of Congress Control Number: 2011920507 ISBN-13: 978-1-111-52799-0 ISBN-10:1-111-52799-7 Course Technology 20 Channel Center Street Boston, MA 02210 USA Cengage Learning is a leading provider of customized learning solutions with office locations around the globe, including Singapore, the United Kingdom, Australia, Mexico, Brazil, and Japan. Locate your local office at: international.cengage.com/global Cengage Learning products are represented in Canada by Nelson Education, Ltd. To learn more about Course Technology, visit www.cengage.com/coursetechnology To learn more about Cengage Learning, visit www.cengage.com Purchase any of our products at your local college store or at our preferred online store www.cengagebrain.com

Printed in the U n i t e d States o f A m e r i c a 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 15 14 13 12 11

Brief Contents Concepts Introduction to Computers and the Internet 2 Computer Hardware 30 Computer Software 76 absolute-india/shutterstock.com

N e t w o r k s

a n d t h e

W "

I n t e r n e t

4

Computer Networks 108

5

Introducing the Internet and Email 140

6

Network and Internet Security and Privacy 188

• -

Windows 7 7

Exploring Microsoft Windows 7 226

8

Managing Your Files 250

Leigh Prather/shutterstock.com

O e e i c e

9

2 0 1 0

m

Introducing Microsoft Office 2010 268

Harper/shutterstock.com

W o r d

N

2 0 1 0

1 0 Creating a Document 298 11

Formatting a Long Document 344

12

Enhancing a Document 382 Carlos Caetano/shutterstock.com

Brief

Contents

jjj

Excel 2010 13

Creating a Workbook 424

14

Formatting a Workbook 458

15

Working with Formulas and Functions 498

16

Inserting and Formatting Charts 530

JIHHIM"!!!

Jill newyear2008/shutterstock.com I

A c c e s s 2010 17

Creating a Database 566

18

Maintaining and Querying a Database 602

19

Creating Forms and Reports 634

PowerPoint 2010 20

Creating a Presentation 662

21

Enhancing a Presentation 700

New Image/shutterstock.co

22 Integrating Word, Excel, Access, and PowerPoint 738

Sychugina/shutterstock.co

Index

IV

Brief

Contents

772

Table of Contents

Concepts

How the CPU Works

Introduction to Computers and the Internet 2 ^ | ^ Introduction

41

Typical CPU Components The System Clock and the Machine Cycle Storage Systems

Network Storage and Online/Cloud Storage Systems Smart Cards Storage Systems for Large Computer Systems

2

W h a t Is a C o m p u t e r ?

Input Devices

2

Data vs. Information StockLite/shutterstock.com Hardware and Software Computer Users and Professionals Types of C o m p u t e r s

43

Hard Drives Optical Discs Flash Memory

6

Output Devices

Embedded Computers Mobile Devices Personal Computers (PCs) Midrange Servers Mainframe Computers Supercomputers

65

Display Devices Data and Multimedia Projectors Printers Audio Output

Computer Networks and the Internet

14

The Internet and the World Wide W e b Accessing a Network or the Internet Surfing the W e b Email Computers a n d Society

55

Keyboards Pointing Devices Touch Devices Scanners and Readers Audio Input

21

Benefits and Risks of a Computer-Oriented Society Understanding Intellectual Property Rights Computers and Health Environmental Concerns

Computer Software 7 6 Introduction

76

Introduction to System Software a n d Operating Systems

76

Functions of an Operating System Processing Techniques for Increased Efficiency Differences Among Operating Systems O p e r a t i n g S y s t e m s for D e s k t o p P C s

Computer Hardware 3 0 Introduction

30

Digital Data Representation Inside t h e System Unit

30

32

The Motherboard The Power Supply The CPU Memory Expansion Slots, Expansion Cards, and ExpressCard Modules Buses Ports and Connectors

84

DOS Windows

Windows Server and Windows Home Server Mac OS and Mac OS X Server UNIX Linux

O p e r a t i n g S y s t e m s for H a n d h e l d P C s a n d Larger Computers

88

Mobile and Embedded Versions of Windows Mobile Phone Operating Systems Operating Systems for Larger Computers Introduction to Application Software

—

\

91

Software Categories Desktop vs. Mobile Software Installed vs. Web-Based Software

Table

of

Contents

v

Application S o f t w a r e for Business

Switches, Routers, and Other Hardware for Connecting Devices and Networks Other Networking Hardware

96

Word Processing Concepts S p r e a d s h e e t Concepts Database Concepts Presentation Graphics Concepts

5 Introducing the Internet and Email 1 4 0 1

Application S o f t w a r e for W o r k i n g w i t h Multimedia

99

(

Graphics Software Audio Capture and Editing Software Video Editing and DVD Authoring Software Media Players Graphics, Multimedia, and the Web O t h e r T y p e s of A p p l i c a t i o n S o f t w a r e

Introduction

140

Evolution of t h e Internet

140

From ARPANET to Internet2 The World Wide W e b Internet2 The Internet Community Today

102

Desktop and Personal Publishing Software Educational, Entertainment, and Reference Software Note Taking Software and Web Notebooks CAD and Other Types of Design Software Accounting and Personal Finance Software Project Management, Collaboration, and Remote Access Software

Beyond Browsing and Email

145

Other Types of Online Communications Blogs, Wikis, and Other Types of Online Writing Cookies Getting Set U p to Use t h e Internet

N

e

t

w

o

r

k

s

a

n

d

t

h

e

I n t e r n e t

Using Microsoft Internet Explorer

4 Computer Networks 1 0 8 Introduction

108

W h a t Is a N e t w o r k ?

108

Network Characteristics Wired vs. Wireless N e t w o r k Network Topologies ^ K J Network Architectures' ^ Network Size and Coverage Data Transmission

A

116

119

Communications Protocols and N e t w o r k i n g Standards

\24S|

her Communications Protocols TCP/IP and Ethernet e, G.hn, and Broadband over Phoneline, Powerli Wi-Fi (802.11) WiMAX and Mo Cellular Standards Bluetooth, Ultra and Other Short-Range Wirele^ Networking Hardware

111^"iijjjr_?T

Network Adapters and Modems ^ . S ^ ^ f e

Table

of

Contents

Using W i n d o w s Mail 172 | I P

Wired Networking Media ' Jetworking Media

Email Works Under!a%din(&fc)wj E Downloadinflgtf^tows Live Mail Sending and Receiving Email Using Windows Live Mail "Replying to a n l S H H ^ i i n g Email Messages Deleting Email Messages Adding Contacts to the Contacts Folder Working with Attachments

Network and id IIi n t e r n e t Security and Privacy 1 8 8 Introduction

188

Understanding Security Concerns

188

Unauthorized Access a f Unauthorized Use Hacking W War Driving and Wi-Fi r : Interception of Cojprnunications Online Threats

192

Botnets Comj^^PPiruses and Other Types of Malware Denial ^ Service (DoS) Attacks r

1

159

Starting Internet Explorer Entering a URL in the Address Bar and Using Links Visiting Previously Viewed Web Pages Using Tabs Using Search Sites Using Favorites Using the History List Imprinting a Web Page Exi^ngInternet Explorer ^ j * ^ ^ q ^ l r n e m e t Exploi \

Bandwidth J K Analog vs. Digital Signals^ Transmissioifiype andTiming Delivery M e B o d Networking Media

153

Selecting the Type of Device Choosing the Type of Connection and Internet Access Selecting an ISP Setting Up Your Computer

Data, Program, or Web Site Alteration Online Theft, Online Fraud, and Other Dot Cons Theft of Data, Information, and Other Resources Identity Theft, Phishing,and Pharming Protecting Against Identity Theft Online Auction Fraud and Other Internet Scams

8 Managing Your Files 2 5 0 Introduction

O r g a n i z i n g Files a n d F o l d e r s

201

Cyberbullying and Cyberstalking Online Pornography Protecting Against Personal Safety Concerns Personal Computer Security

M a n a g i n g F o l d e r s a n d Files

203

Hardware Loss and Damage System Failure and Other Disasters Protecting Against Hardware Loss, Hardware Damage, and System Failure Firewalls, Encryption, and Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) U n d e r s t a n d i n g Privacy Concerns

N e t w o r k a n d Internet Security Legislation

W o r k i n g w i t h C o m p r e s s e d Files

Office 2010 221

225

MS NDOWS 7 7 Exploring Microsoft Windows 7 2 2 6 226

Exploring the Windows 7 Desktop

226

Starting Windows and Examining the Desktop Using the Mouse Exploring the Start Menu Using C o m m o n Windows Elements Resizing and Moving Windows Switching Between Open Windows Navigating Windows

238

Using Windows Explorer Windows Changing the View of Windows Using the Navigation Pane

9 Introducing Microsoft Office 2 0 1 0 2 6 8

Getting Help

Starting Office Programs a n d Exploring C o m m o n Elements

271

Starting Office Programs Examining Common Elements Switching Between Open Programs and Files Zooming Scrolling Using the Ribbon

277

Switching Tabs Using Buttons Using Galleries and Live Preview Using Dialog Boxes Using Task Panes Displaying Contextual Tabs Using the Mini Toolbar W o r k i n g w i t h Files 2 8 6 Saving a File Closing a File Opening a File

Getting Help

290

291

Viewing ScreenTips Using the Help Window Exiting Office Programs

243

Capstone

244

293

" W i n d o w s 7" a n d " O f f i c e 2 0 1 0 " 2 9 5

W e b Applications: S a v i n g a File t o W i n d o w s Live

Using the Contents List Using the Search Help Box Shutting Down Windows

233

•

•

268

Using the Clipboard

Working with the Recycle Bin

262

Creating a Compressed Folder Extracting a Compressed Folder

Introduction

Introduction

256

Creating a Folder or Subfolder Moving or Copying Files and Folders Naming and Renaming Files Deleting Files and Folders

212

Databases, Electronic Profiling, Spam, and Other Marketing Activities Protecting the Privacy of Personal Information Electronic Surveillance and Monitoring Protecting Personal and Workplace Privacy

Capstone-Computer Concepts

250

The Windows 7 File System Developing an Organizational Strategy Navigating to Files

Cyberstalking and Other Personal Safety Concerns

250

SkyDrive

296

247

Table

of

Contents

vii

W o r d 2010

Working with Themes

10 Creating a Document 298 Introduction

298

Entering Text

Changing the Style Set

298

Undoing and Redoing Actions

Working with t h e D o c u m e n t Outline

Changing the Margins

307

C r e a t i n g C i t a t i o n s a n d a List of W o r k s C i t e d Creating a New Source and Inserting a Citation Inserting a Citation to an Existing Source Editing a Citation or a Source Modifying an Existing Source Generating a List of Works Cited Using the Source Manager Updating the List of Works Cited

309

311

Replacing Selected Text Using Drag and Drop

Creating Footnotes a n d Endnotes

313

Changing the Font and Font Size Changing Font Styles Changing Text Color Formatting Paragraphs

317

Adjusting Paragraph Spacing Adjusting Line Spacing Aligning Paragraphs Using Tabs Creating Bulleted and Numbered Lists Adding a Paragraph Border Adding Paragraph Shading Indenting a Paragraph Copying Formats

Introduction

332

Checking Spelling a n d G r a m m a r

334

Previewing and Printing Documei^s

1 1 Formatting tihctyg Document 344 344

Working with Styles

344

Applying a Quick Style Modifying a Quick Style Creating a New Quick Style

382

Creating a Table Entering Data in a Table Selecting Parts of a Table Inserting a Row or Column Deleting a Row, Column, or Table Changing Column Widths Formatting Tables with Table Styles Aligning Tables and Text in Tables Changing the Page Orientation

Checking Flagged Words Individually Checking the Spelling in the Entire Docu

Introduction

382

O r g a n i z i n g I n f o r m a t i o n in T a b l e s

329

Finding Text Replacing Specific Text

377

1 2 Enhancing a Document 382

Using the Format Painter Using Paste Options F i n d i n g a n d R e p l a c i n g Text

365

Inserting Page Numbers Adding a Header and Footer

Using the New from Existing Command

F o r m a t t i n g Text

364

Adding Page Numbers, Headers, and Footers

306

Using the Save As Command

Editing Text

356

362

Inserting a M a n u a l P a g e Break

Creating D o c u m e n t s B a s e d o n Existing

S e l e c t i n g Text

355

Using the Navigation Pane Using Outline View

Entering Text Inserting a Date with AutoComplete Correcting Errors as You Type Inserting Symbols

Documents

351

Applying a New Theme Modifying a Theme

392

W o r k i n g w i t h D o c u m e n t S e c t i o n s 392 ^ W S e t t f n g a Section Break ^ [ F o r m a t t i n g a Sggten Differently from the Rest of X the Document^ s

Adding Qifferent Headers and Footers in Sections Inserting a q d Modifying Graphics L

398

Inserting Clip A r r ^ ^ p f Examining . .ected Object esizing a G p f f t i c opping a Pnoto/' fmatting a Picture /

A d d i n g WorcUVrt 4 0 3

\

Inserting M ) r d Art # Formatting Word Art/ W r a p p i n g Text A r o u n d G r a p h i c s •Changing Texf Wrap Properties Moving Graphics

406

369

Working with Columns

409

1 4 Formatting a Workbook 458

Creating Columns Balancing Columns W o r k i n g w i t h Building Blocks

413

Creating Quick Parts Inserting Quick Parts Managing Building Blocks

Introduction

F o r m a t t i n g D a t a in

C a p s t o n e - W o r d : Create a Flyer

421

Cells

W e b Applications: Using t h e W o r d W e b A p p

Formatting Text Formatting Numbers Formatting Dates and Times Ranges

424

U n d e r s t a n d i n g S p r e a d s h e e t s a n d Excel

424

Parts of the Excel Window Moving the Active Cell Switching Between Sheets Inserting and Deleting a Sheet Renaming a Sheet Moving and Copying a Sheet

C r e a t i n g a n Excel Table

476

Using Banded Rows Selecting Table Style Options Adding Formulas to an Excel Table H i g h l i g h t i n g Cells w i t h C o n d i t i o n a l Formatting

483

Highlighting a Cell Based on Its Value Clearing a Conditional Formatting Rule

E n t e r i n g D a t a in Cells 4 3 0 Entering Text Entering Dates and Times Entering Numbers

Hiding W o r k s h e e t Data

486

F o r m a t t i n g a W o r k s h e e t for P r i n t i n g

434

Working with Columns and Rows

434

Selecting Columns and Rows Changing Column Widths and Row Heights Inserting a Column or Row Clearing and Deleting a Row or Column W o r k i n g w i t h Cells a n d R a n g e s

467

Applying Cell Styles Aligning Cell Content Indenting Cell Content Merging Cells Adding Cell Borders Changing Cell Background Color Using the Format Cells Dialog Box

1 3 Creating a Workbook 424

E d i t i n g Cell C o n t e n t

422

458

F o r m a t t i n g Cells a n d

E x c e l 2010

Introduction

458

1 5 Working with Formulas and Functions 498

438

Selecting a Range Moving and Copying a Range Inserting and Deleting a Range Wrapping Text Within a Cell Entering Formulas and Functions

Introduction

442

Changing Worksheet Views Changing the Orientation Previewing and Printing a Workbook Viewing Worksheet Formulas Scaling a Printout

498

U s i n g Relative, A b s o l u t e , a n d M i x e d Cell

Entering a Formula Viewing Formula Results and Formulas Copying and Pasting Formulas Entering a Function Using AutoSum Previewing a n d Printing a W o r k b o o k

487

Setting the Print Area Inserting and Removing Page Breaks Adding Print Titles Creating Headers and Footers Setting the Page Margins Centering Content on a Page

R e f e r e n c e s in F o r m u l a s

498

Using Relative References Using Absolute References Using Mixed References 448

Entering Functions

505

Inserting a Function Using the Insert Function Dialog Box Typing a Function in a Cell Using AutoFill

512

Using the Fill Handle Creating a Series

W o r k i n g w i t h t h e IF L o g i c a l F u n c t i o n Working with Date Functions

517

Creating a Line Chart 548

520

Working w i t h t h e P M T Financial Function

521

Editing the Axis Scale and Labels in a Line Chart Adding an Axis Title Adding Gridlines Editing Chart Data

552

Changing a Data Value or Label Adding a Data Series to an Existing Chart Modifying Lines and Data Markers

1 6 Inserting and Formatting Charts 530

Inserting and Formatting Sparklines

Introduction

Inserting a n d M o d i f y i n g Data Bars

530

Creating a Chart

Capstone - Excel: Create a B u d g e t

530

Selecting a Data Source Selecting a Chart Type

563

t h e Excel W e b A p p

564

534

Selecting Chart Elements Moving a Chart to a Different Sheet Repositioning and Resizing a Chart

A c c e s s 2010

537

Changing the Chart Style Changing a Chart Layout Positioning and Formatting a Chart Title Positioning the Chart Legend Working with Data Labels Changing the Color of a Data Series Creating an Exploded Pie Chart Creating a C o l u m n Chart

557

W e b Applications: Working with

Working with Chart Elements

Modifying a Chart

555

542

543

Formatting a Column Chart Changing the Axis Scale for a Column Chart

1 7 Creating a Database 566 Introduction

566

Understanding Database Concepts Creating a Database

566

570

W o r k i n g in D a t a s h e e t V i e w

572

Creating a Table in Datasheet View Saving a Table Entering Records W o r k i n g w i t h F i e l d s a n d P r o p e r t i e s in D e s i g n View

577

Changing Field Properties in Design View Creating a Table and Setting Properties in Design View Specifying the Primary Key Saving the Table Design and Entering Records M o d i f y i n g a Table's S t r u c t u r e

586

Moving a Field Adding a Field Deleting a Field Closing a n d O p e n i n g Objects and Databases Closing a Table Closing a Database Opening a Database Opening a Table Moving Around a Datasheet Creating Simple Queries, Forms, and Reports

591

Creating a Simple Query Creating and Using a Simple Form Creating a Simple Report Compacting and Repairing a Database

X

Table

of

Contents

598

588

1 8 Maintaining and Querying a Database 602 Introduction

642

Searching for a Partial Value Searching with Wildcards Maintaining Table Data Using a Form Creating a Form Based on Related Tables

602

Maintaining Database Records

644

Creating a Form with a Main Form and a Subform Modifying a Main Form and Subform in Layout View Displaying Records in a Main Form and a Subform

602

Editing Field Values Finding and Replacing Data Deleting a Record

Previewing a n d Printing Selected F o r m Records

W o r k i n g w i t h Q u e r i e s in D e s i g n V i e w

605

Designing a Select Query Modifying a Query S o r t i n g a n d Filtering Data

Finding Data Using a Form

609

M o d i f y i n g a R e p o r t ' s D e s i g n in L a y o u t V i e w

613

617

A d d i n g a Condition to a Q u e r y

A d d i n g Multiple Conditions to Queries

622

Using the And Logical Operator Using the Or Logical Operator 624

U s i n g F u n c t i o n s in a Q u e r y

626

652

C a p s t o n e - Access: Create a D a t a b a s e

661

P o w e r P o i n t 2010

619

Specifying an Exact Match Using a Comparison Operator to Match a Range of Values

Creating a Calculated Field

648

Changing a Report's Appearance Resizing Fields and Field Values in a Report Using Conditional Formatting in a Report Printing a Report

Defining a One-to-Many Relationship Between Tables Working with Related Data in a Subdatasheet Creating a Multitable Query

Creating a Report Using t h e Report W i z a r d Creating a Report Previewing a Report

Sorting Data Using AutoFilter to Sort Data Sorting Multiple Fields in Design View Filtering Data Defining Table Relationships

647

Using the Total Row Creating Queries That Use Functions Creating Calculations for Groups of Records

19 Creating Forms and Reports 634

20 Creating a Presentation 662 Introduction

662

Creating a Presentation

662

Creating a Title Slide Adding a New Slide and Choosing a Layout Moving Between Slides in Normal View Working with Bulleted Lists Using AutoFit Changing Themes Modifying Text and Changing Bullet Levels in the Outline Tab R e a r r a n g i n g Text a n d S l i d e s , a n d Deleting Slides

675

Moving Bulleted Items Rearranging Slides Deleting Slides Running a Slide S h o w

Bpising Slide Show View

678

Using Mini Slide Show View Using Reading View

Adding Animations

680

Animating Slide Titles Using the Animation Painter Animating Bulleted Lists Removing an Animation Modifying the Start Timing of an Animation Modifying the Order of Animations

Table

of

Contents

XI

Inserting Graphics

709

Inserting a Picture from a File Drawing a Shape Adding Text to a Shape Formatting Graphics Creating SmartArt Diagrams

713

Creating a SmartArt Diagram Modifying a SmartArt Diagram Formatting a SmartArt Diagram Changing Animation Options

717

Changing the Effect Options Changing the Speed of Animations Adding Video A d d i n g Transitions

687

Adding Speaker Notes

688

Adding Footers a n d Headers

689

Inserting Footers, Slide Numbers, and the Date on Slides Inserting Headers and Footers on Notes Pages and Handouts Reviewing, Previewing, a n d Printing a Presentation

691

Checking and Reviewing a Presentation Opening the Print Tab Printing Full Page Slides Printing Handouts Printing Notes Pages Printing the Presentation as an Outline

700

k h

of

±

700

Contents

Broadcasting a Presentation

726

Starting a Broadcast Inviting People to a Broadcast Broadcasting a Slide Show 735

736

Integration

22 Integrating Word, Excel, Access, and PowerPoint 738 Introduction

738

Object Linking a n d E m b e d d i n g

738

Creating an Embedded Excel Chart in Word or PowerPoint Embedding a Chart Created in an Excel Worksheet in Word or PowerPoint Editing an Embedded Excel Chart in Word or PowerPoint Linking an Excel Chart to a Word or PowerPoint Presentation Linking Excel Worksheet Data to Word or PowerPoint Updating Linked Objects W h e n the Destination File Is Open Updating Linked Objects W h e n the Destination File Is Closed

Elisanth/Shutterstock.com

Table

Changing Playback Options for a Sound

W e b Applications: Working with the PowerPoint

Working in Slide Master View Modifying Elements in the Slide Master Modifying Text Placeholders in the Slide Master Deleting a Graphic from the Slide Master Inserting Clip Art in the Slide Master Closing Slide Master View Modifying the Slide Background

xii

724

Inserting a Sound Clip

Web App

Working with Slide Masters

Adding Sound

Capstone - PowerPoint: Prepare a Presentation

2 1 Enhancing a Presentation 700 Introduction

720

Inserting a Video on a Slide Formatting a Video Changing Video Playback Options Trimming a Video Setting a Poster Frame

i

Importing a n d Exporting Data

753

Importing an Excel List into an Access Table Exporting Access Data to a Word File U s i n g t h e O b j e c t C o m m a n d in W o r d , E x c e l , a n d PowerPoint

756

C o p y i n g a n d Pasting A m o n g Office Programs

757

Creating PowerPoint Slides from a W o r d Outline

759

C r e a t i n g F o r m Letters w i t h M a i l M e r g e

760

Selecting a Main Document and Data Source Inserting the Merge Fields Previewing the Mail Merge and Checking for Errors Finishing the Mail Merge

Index 772

Table

of

Contents

Concepts

Introduction t o C o m p u t e r s and the Internet I .earni ng Objecti ves Introduction

After studying the material in this chapter, you will be able to:

C o m p u t e r s a n d o t h e r f o r m s o f t e c h n o l o g y i m p a c t y o u r daily life in m a n y w a y s . Y o u e n c o u n t e r c o m p u t e r s in s t o r e s , r e s t a u r a n t s , a n d o t h e r retail e s t a b l i s h m e n t s . Y o u p r o b a b l y use c o m p u t e r s a n d the I n t e r n e t r e g u l a r l y t o o b t a i n i n f o r m a t i o n , find e n t e r t a i n m e n t , b u y p r o d u c t s a n d s e r v i c e s , a n d c o m m u n i c a t e with o t h e r s . Y o u m i g h t c a r r y a m o b i l e p h o n e o r o t h e r m o b i l e device at all times so y o u c a n r e m a i n in t o u c h w i t h o t h e r s a n d a c c e s s I n t e r n e t i n f o r m a t i o n as y o u need i t . Y o u m i g h t even use these p o r t a b l e devices t o p a y f o r pur-

.1

Explain w h a t computers do

L O 1 . 2

Identify types of computers

LOi

Describe computer networks and the Internet Understand h o w computers impact society

c h a s e s , play o n l i n e g a m e s w i t h o t h e r s , w a t c h T V a n d m o v i e s , a n d m u c h , much m o r e . Businesses a l s o use c o m p u t e r s extensively, such as t o m a i n t a i n e m p l o y e e a n d c u s t o m e r r e c o r d s , m a n a g e i n v e n t o r i e s , m a i n t a i n online stores a n d o t h e r W e b sites, p r o c e s s sales, c o n t r o l r o b o t s a n d o t h e r m a c h i n e s in f a c t o r i e s , a n d provide e x e c u t i v e s with t h e u p - t o - d a t e i n f o r m a t i o n t h e y need t o m a k e decisions. T h e g o v e r n m e n t uses c o m p u t e r s t o s u p p o r t the n a t i o n ' s defense s y s t e m s , f o r space e x p l o r a t i o n , f o r storing a n d o r g a n i z i n g vital i n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t c i t i z e n s , f o r l a w e n f o r c e m e n t a n d military p u r p o s e s , a n d o t h e r i m p o r t a n t t a s k s . In s h o r t , c o m p u t e r s a n d c o m p u t i n g t e c h n o l o g y a r e used in an endless number of ways.

l o i . i

A

What Is a Computer? c o m p u t e r is a p r o g r a m m a b l e , e l e c t r o n i c device t h a t a c c e p t s d a t a , p e r f o r m s o p e r a t i o n s o n t h a t d a t a , presents t h e results, a n d stores the data o r results as n e e d e d .

T h e f a c t t h a t a c o m p u t e r is p r o g r a m m a b l e m e a n s t h a t a c o m p u t e r will d o w h a t e v e r the i n s t r u c t i o n s tell it t o d o . T h e p r o g r a m s used with a

c o m p u t e r A programmable, electronic

c o m p u t e r d e t e r m i n e t h e t a s k s the c o m p u t e r is a b l e

device that accepts data input, performs

t o per f o r m.

processing operations on that data, and outputs

T h e primary four o p e r a t i o n s o f a c o m p u t e r are

and stores the results.

referred t o as input, processing, output, and storage. These operations can be defined as follows:

Chapter

I : Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

C H A P T E R

People use computers in virtually every aspect of their lives—at home, at school, on the job, and while on the go as they work, learn, and play

^

I n p u t — e n t e r i n g data into the computer

^

P r o c e s s i n g — p e r f o r m i n g o p e r a t i o n s on the data

^ ^

i n p u t The process of entering data into a computer; can also refer to the data itself. p r o c e s s i n g Performing operations on data that has been input into a computer to convert that input to output. o u t p u t The process of presenting the results of processing; can also refer

O u t p u t — p r e s e n t i n g the results

to the results themselves.

S t o r a g e — s a v i n g data, programs, or

s t o r a g e The operation of saving data, programs, or output for future use.

o u t p u t f o r future use

Chapter

1 : Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

E x h i b i t 1 - 1 Information processing cycle

•

INPUT User types in the numbers 2 and 5.

PROCESSING Computer adds 2 and 5.

OUTPUT Computer displays the results (output).

STORAGE Computer saves data (in this case, the output) for future use.

J

to

put or output operation, depending on which direction

add two n u m b e r s , as s h o w n in E x h i b i t 1 - 1 , input o c -

the information is going—is increasingly considered the

curs when data (in this e x a m p l e , the numbers 2 and

fifth primary computer o p e r a t i o n .

F o r a c o m p u t e r that has been programmed

5) is entered into the computer, processing takes place when the c o m p u t e r p r o g r a m adds those t w o numbers, and output happens when the sum of 7 is displayed on

Data vs. Information

the computer screen. T h e storage operation occurs any

A user inputs d a t a into a computer, and then the c o m -

time the data, a change to a p r o g r a m , or some output is

puter processes it. W h e n data is modified, or p r o c e s s e d ,

saved for future use.

into a meaningful form, it b e c o m e s i n f o r m a t i o n . Infor-

Another example o f a computer is a supermarket

mation is frequently generated to answer some type of

barcode reader. First, the grocery item being purchased

question, such as h o w m a n y o f a restaurant's employees

is passed over the barcode reader—input. N e x t , the de-

w o r k fewer than 2 0 hours per w e e k , h o w many seats

scription and price of the item are looked up—processing.

are available on a particular flight from Los Angeles to

T h e n , the item description and price are displayed on the

San Francisco, or w h a t is H a n k Aaron's lifetime h o m e

cash register and printed on the receipt—output. Finally,

run total. O f course, you don't need a computer system to

the inventory, ordering, and sales records are u p d a t e d —

process data into i n f o r m a t i o n . F o r example, anyone

storage. Today's computers

also typically perform

can go through time cards o r employee files and make a

com-

m u n i c a t i o n s functions, such as sending or retrieving

list o f people w h o w o r k a certain n u m b e r of hours. T h i s

data via the Internet, accessing information located in

w o r k could take a lot o f time w h e n done by hand, espe-

a shared company d a t a b a s e , or exchanging email mes-

cially for a c o m p a n y with m a n y employees. Computers,

sages. Therefore, c o m m u n i c a t i o n s — t e c h n i c a l l y an in-

however, can perform such tasks almost instantly, with

c o m m u n i c a t i o n s The transmission of data from one

The progression of input, processing, output, and storage is sometimes called the I P O S cycle or the information processing cycle.

device to another. d a t a Raw, unorganized facts. p r o c e s s To modify data. i n f o r m a t i o n Data that has been processed into a meaningful form.

Chapter

1 : Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

T h e term s o f t w a r e refers t o t h e p r o g r a m s o r instructions used t o tell the c o m p u t e r h a r d w a r e w h a t

Data

t o do and t o a l l o w people t o use a c o m p u t e r t o per-

A n y f a c t o r set o f facts c a n b e c o m e

computer

f o r m specific t a s k s , such as c r e a t i n g letters, p r e p a r i n g

d a t a , such as t h e w o r d s in a l e t t e r t o a f r i e n d , the a

numbers

monthly

get,

the

budgets, m a n a g i n g inventory a n d c u s t o m e r d a t a b a s e s ,

in

playing g a m e s , watching videos, listening t o m u s i c ,

bud-

scheduling a p p o i n t m e n t s , editing digital p h o t o g r a p h s ,

images

designing h o m e s , viewing W e b p a g e s , b u r n i n g D V D s ,

in a p h o t o g r a p h ,

and e x c h a n g i n g email. In E x h i b i t 1-2, t h e s o f t w a r e

the

being used a l l o w s you to l o o k at i n f o r m a t i o n o n the

notes

in

a

s o n g , or t h e facts

Internet.

s t o r e d in a n e m ployee record.

Computer Users and Professionals C o m p u t e r users, often called e n d u s e r s , are t h e p e o p l e w h o use c o m p u t e r s to perform t a s k s o r o b t a i n inform a t i o n . T h i s includes an a c c o u n t a n t

electronically

preparing a client's t a x e s , an office w o r k e r using a accurate results. Information processing (the conver-

w o r d processing program to c r e a t e a letter, a super-

sion o f data into information) is a vital activity today

visor using a c o m p u t e r to c h e c k a n d see w h e t h e r o r

for all c o m p u t e r users, as well as for businesses and

n o t m a n u f a c t u r i n g w o r k e r s have m e t the day's q u o t a s ,

other o r g a n i z a t i o n s .

a parent emailing his or her child's teacher, a c o l l e g e student analyzing science lab d a t a , a child p l a y i n g a c o m p u t e r g a m e , and a person bidding at an o n l i n e

Hardware and Software

a u c t i o n over the Internet.

T h e physical parts o f a computer (the parts you can

P r o g r a m m e r s , on the o t h e r h a n d , a r e c o m p u t e r

t o u c h ) are called h a r d w a r e . H a r d w a r e c o m p o n e n t s can

p r o f e s s i o n a l s w h o write the p r o g r a m s t h a t c o m p u t -

be internal (located inside the computer) or external (lo-

ers use. O t h e r c o m p u t e r p r o f e s s i o n a l s i n c l u d e systems

cated outside the computer and connected to the c o m -

a n a l y s t s , w h o design c o m p u t e r s y s t e m s t o be used

1-2

within their c o m p a n i e s , c o m p u t e r o p e r a t i o n s p e r s o n -

puter via a wired or wireless c o n n e c t i o n ) . E x h i b i t illustrates typical computer hardware.

nel, w h o are r e s p o n s i b l e f o r t h e d a y - t o - d a y c o m p u t e r o p e r a t i o n s at a c o m p a n y , such as m a i n t a i n i n g systems o r t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g user-related p r o b l e m s , a n d security specialists, w h o are r e s p o n s i b l e f o r securing t h e c o m p a n y c o m -

Exhibit 1-2 Typical computer hardware and software

puters

and

against

networks

hackers

and

other intruders.

h a r d w a r e The physical parts of a computer. s o f t w a r e Programs or instructions used to tell the computer what to do to accomplish tasks. e n d u s e r A person who uses a computer to perform tasks or obtain information. Clockwise from top left: 2009 Logitech. All rights reserved. Images/materials on page 5 used with permission from Logitech.; Courtesy of Gateway, Inc.; Courtesy, Hewlett-Packard Company; Courtesy D-Link Systems, Inc.; Courtesy Kingston Technology Company, Inc.

Chapter

I :

Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

Cloud Computing In g e n e r a l ,

cloud computing

refers t o d a t a , a p p l i c a -

tions, a n d e v e n resources s t o r e d o n c o m p u t e r s accessed

THE INTERNET

over t h e Internet—in a " c l o u d " of computers—rather t h a n o n users' c o m p u t e r s , a n d y o u access o n l y w h a t y o u n e e d w h e n y o u n e e d it. This t y p e of n e t w o r k has b e e n used f o r several y e a r s t o c r e a t e t h e supercomputer-level p o w e r n e e d e d f o r research a n d o t h e r p o w e r - h u n g r y a p plications, b u t it w a s m o r e typically r e f e r r e d t o as g r i d in this c o n t e x t . Today, cloud c o m p u t i n g t y p i -

computing

cally refers t o accessing W e b - b a s e d a p p l i c a t i o n s a n d d a t a using a p e r s o n a l c o m p u t e r , m o b i l e p h o n e , o r a n y o t h e r I n t e r n e t - e n a b l e d d e v i c e (see t h e a c c o m p a n y i n g illustrat i o n ) . A l t h o u g h m a n y o f t o d a y ' s c l o u d a p p l i c a t i o n s (such as G o o g l e A p p s , W i n d o w s Live, F a c e b o o k , a n d Y o u T u b e )

CLOUD PROVIDERS

END USERS

a r e c o n s u m e r - o r i e n t e d , business applications a r e also a v a i l a b l e a n d a r e e x p e c t e d t o g r o w in t h e n e a r f u t u r e .

t h e c l o u d t h a n t h e y w o u l d r u n if installed locally, a n d

C o n s e q u e n t l y , t h e t e r m is also used t o refer t o businesses

t h e potentially high expense related t o data transfer

purchasing c o m p u t i n g c a p a b i l i t i e s as t h e y n e e d t h e m

f o r c o m p a n i e s w i t h h i g h b a n d w i d t h a p p l i c a t i o n s . In a d -

from companies t h a t provide Web-based applications,

d i t i o n , n u m e r o u s security c o n c e r n s exist, such as h o w

c o m p u t i n g p o w e r , s t o r a g e , a n d o t h e r services.

t h e d a t a is p r o t e c t e d a g a i n s t u n a u t h o r i z e d access a n d

A d v a n t a g e s o f c l o u d c o m p u t i n g i n c l u d e easy scal-

d a t a loss.

ability, l o w e r c a p i t a l e x p e n d i t u r e , a n d access t o d a t a

D e s p i t e t h e p o t e n t i a l risks, m a n y b e l i e v e t h a t c l o u d

f r o m a n y w h e r e . It is also b e n e f i c i a l t o business t r a v e l e r s

c o m p u t i n g is t h e w a v e o f t h e f u t u r e a n d w i l l consist o f

and other individuals w h o s e computers, mobile phones,

millions o f c o m p u t e r s l o c a t e d in d a t a centers a r o u n d

or o t h e r devices m a y b e lost o r o t h e r w i s e c o m p r o m i s e d

t h e w o r l d t h a t a r e c o n n e c t e d t o g e t h e r via t h e I n t e r n e t .

w h i l e t h e individual is o n t h e g o — i f n o p e r s o n a l o r busi-

T h e y also v i e w c l o u d c o m p u t i n g as a w a y t o e n a b l e all

ness d a t a is s t o r e d o n t h e d e v i c e , n o n e c a n b e c o m p r o -

of a n individual's devices t o stay s y n c h r o n i z e d , a l l o w i n g

m i s e d . D i s a d v a n t a g e s i n c l u d e a possible r e d u c t i o n in

a n i n d i v i d u a l t o w o r k w i t h his o r h e r d a t a a n d a p p l i c a -

p e r f o r m a n c e o f a p p l i c a t i o n s if t h e y r u n m o r e slowly via

t i o n s o n a c o n t i n u a l basis.

loi.2

Types of Computers

powerful c o m p u t e r s used t o c o n t r o l the country's defense systems. C o m p u t e r s

are generally classified

by

category, based on size, capability, a n d price. he A

types

of

computers

available

today

vary

w i d e l y — f r o m the tiny c o m p u t e r s embedded in

Embedded Computers

c o n s u m e r devices and a p p l i a n c e s , t o the pocket-sized

An e m b e d d e d c o m p u t e r

c o m p u t e r s and mobile p h o n e s t h a t do a limited num-

is a tiny

computer

embed-

ded into a product designed t o p e r f o r m specific tasks

ber o f c o m p u t i n g t a s k s , t o the powerful and versatile

or functions for that product. F o r e x a m p l e , c o m p u t e r s

c o m p u t e r s f o u n d in h o m e s and businesses, to the super-

are often embedded into household appliances, such as

c l o u d c o m p u t i n g To use data, applications, and

dishwashers, m i c r o w a v e s , ovens, and coffee m a k e r s , as

resources stored on computers accessed over the Internet

well as into other everyday o b j e c t s , such as t h e r m o s t a t s ,

rather than on users'computers.

answering m a c h i n e s , treadmills, sewing m a c h i n e s , D V D

e m b e d d e d c o m p u t e r A tiny computer embedded in a product and

players, and televisions, t o help those appliances and o b -

designed to perform specific tasks or functions for that product.

jects perform their designated t a s k s . C a r s also use m a n y embedded c o m p u t e r s t o assist with diagnostics, to notify

Chapter

1 : Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Inter

the user of i m p o r t a n t conditions (such as an underin-

Exhibit 1-4 Smartphone

flated tire or an oil filter that needs changing), to facilitate the car's navigational or entertainment systems, to help the driver perform tasks, and to control the use o f the airbag and other safety devices, such as cameras that alert a driver that a vehicle is in his or her blind spot as shown in E x h i b i t 1-3. Because embedded computers are designed for specific tasks and specific products, they c a n n o t be used as general-purpose computers.

Exhibit 1-3 Embedded computer in a car

phones. H a n d h e l d gaming devices, such as the Sony PSP and the N i n t e n d o DSi, and p o r t a b l e digital media players, such as the iPod touch a n d Z u n e , that include A light indicates that a moving vehicle is in the driver's blind spot.

Internet capabilities can also be referred t o as m o b i l e

A camera located under the mirror detects moving vehicles in the driver's blind spot.

devices, though they have fewer overall

capabilities

than conventional mobile devices. T o d a y ' s m o b i l e devices tend t o h a v e s m a l l s c r e e n s a n d k e y b o a r d s . B e c a u s e o f t h i s , m o b i l e devices a r e m o r e a p p r o p r i a t e for individuals w a n t i n g c o n t i n u a l

Mobile Devices

a c c e s s t o e m a i l ; timely W e b c o n t e n t s u c h as b r e a k -

A m o b i l e d e v i c e is loosely defined as a very small c o m -

ing n e w s , w e a t h e r f o r e c a s t s , d r i v i n g d i r e c t i o n s , a n d

m u n i c a t i o n s device, such as a mobile p h o n e , that has

updates f r o m W e b sites like F a c e b o o k ; a n d

built-in c o m p u t i n g or Internet capability. M o b i l e de-

c o l l e c t i o n s t h a n f o r t h o s e i n d i v i d u a l s w a n t i n g gen-

music

vices are c o m m o n l y used to m a k e telephone calls, send

eral W e b b r o w s i n g a n d c o m p u t i n g c a p a b i l i t i e s . T h i s

text messages, view Web pages, take digital p h o t o s , play

is b e g i n n i n g t o c h a n g e , h o w e v e r , as m o b i l e devices

games, d o w n l o a d and play music, w a t c h T V s h o w s , and

c o n t i n u e t o g r o w in c a p a b i l i t i e s , as w i r e l e s s c o m m u -

access calendars and other personal productivity fea-

n i c a t i o n s c o n t i n u e t o b e c o m e faster, a n d as m o b i l e

tures. M o s t (but not all) mobile phones today include

input o p t i o n s , such as voice i n p u t , c o n t i n u e t o i m -

c o m p u t i n g and Internet capabilities; these phones, such

p r o v e . F o r i n s t a n c e , s o m e m o b i l e devices c a n

as the one in E x h i b i t 1-4, are sometimes called smart-

f o r m I n t e r n e t s e a r c h e s a n d o t h e r t a s k s via v o i c e c o m -

per-

m a n d s , s o m e c a n be used t o pay f o r p u r c h a s e s w h i l e y o u are o n the g o , a n d m a n y c a n view a n d edit d o c u m e n t s s t o r e d in a c o m m o n f o r m a t , such as M i c r o s o f t Office documents.

All older term for a smartphone is P D A (personal digital assistant), though PDAs may not include telephone capabilities.

m o b i l e d e v i c e A very small communications device with built-in computing or Internet capability.

Chapter

1 : Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

C o m p u t e r s Then and N o w T h e history of c o m p u t e r s is o f t e n r e f e r r e d t o in t e r m s o f

g r a m s a n d d a t a w e r e input o n p u n c h cards a n d m a g n e t i c

generations, w i t h each n e w generation characterized

t a p e , o u t p u t w a s o n punch cards a n d paper printouts,

by a major t e c h n o l o g i c a l d e v e l o p m e n t .

a n d m a g n e t i c t a p e w a s used f o r s t o r a g e . M a g n e t i c h a r d drives a n d p r o g r a m m i n g l a n g u a g e s , such as F O R T R A N a n d C O B O L , w e r e d e v e l o p e d a n d i m p l e m e n t e d during

P r e c o m p i l e r s and Early Computers (before approximately 1 9 4 6 ) Early c o m p u t i n g d e v i c e s i n -

this g e n e r a t i o n .

••H«N0061 ••••eeoeee! M»te««oeo' ##oe«oeooo

c l u d e t h e a b a c u s , t h e slide

Third-Generation Computers (approximately 1 9 6 4 - 1 9 7 0 )

rule, t h e m e c h a n i c a l c a l c u l a tor, a n d Dr. H e r m a n H o l l e r -

Integrated

circuits

ith's P u n c h C a r d T a b u l a t i n g

marked

beginning

Machine and Sorter (shown

(ICs) of

t h e t h i r d g e n e r a t i o n o f com-

h e r e ) . This w a s t h e first electromechanical machine t h a t

the

* C o u r t e s y l B M C o r p o r a t e

puters, such as t h e I B M Sys-

c o u l d r e a d p u n c h cards. It w a s used t o process t h e 1890

h e r e ) . I n t e g r a t e d circuits in-

U.S. Census d a t a . H o l l e r i t h ' s c o m p a n y e v e n t u a l l y

corporate

be-

c a m e I n t e r n a t i o n a l Business M a c h i n e s ( I B M ) .

first

computers

The invention of t h e micro-

First-genera-

processor the

in 1971

fourth

ushered

only one problem at a t i m e

in

because they n e e d e d t o be

of c o m p u t e r s . In essence, a

generation

microprocessor c o n t a i n s t h e

caC o u r t e s y U S

core processing capabilities

A r m y

P a p e r p u n c h cards a n d t a p e w e r e used f o r i n p u t , a n d

of a n e n t i r e c o m p u t e r

o u t p u t w a s p r i n t e d o n p a p e r . C o m p l e t e d in 1946, E N I A C

o n e single chip. T h e o r i g i n a l

( s h o w n here) w a s t h e w o r l d ' s first large-scale, g e n e r a l p u r p o s e c o m p u t e r . U N I V A C , r e l e a s e d in 1 9 5 1 , w a s i n i tially built f o r t h e U.S. Census B u r e a u a n d w a s used t o a n a l y z e votes in t h e

^

Courtesy IBM Corporate Archives

Fourth-Generation Computers (approximately 1 9 7 1 - p r e s e n t )

t i o n computers could solve

bles t o b e r e p r o g r a m m e d .

^ ^ ^ ^ , |

a n d more reliable t h a n t h e earlier computers.

were

physically r e w i r e d w i t h

!* ^^fe

single t i n y silicon chip, m a k i n g c o m p u t e r s e v e n smaller

enormous, often taking up e n t i r e rooms.

m a n y transistors

a n d e l e c t r o n i c circuits o n a

First-Generation Computers (approximately 1 9 4 6 - 1 9 5 7 ] The

W ^

tem/360 m a i n f r a m e ( s h o w n

A r c h i v e s

1952 U.S. p r e s i d e n t i a l e l e c t i o n .

U N I V A C b e c a m e t h e first c o m p u t e r t o b e mass p r o d u c e d f o r g e n e r a l c o m m e r c i a l use.

IBM

PC ( s h o w n

here)

BipIWiBBB^^Bjj

on

and

Courtesy IBM Corporate Archives

A p p l e M a c i n t o s h c o m p u t e r s , a n d m o s t of t o d a y ' s m o d e r n c o m p u t e r s , fall into this c a t e g o r y .

Fifth-Generation Computers (Now and the Future) F i f t h - g e n e r a t i o n c o m p u t e r s h a v e n o precise classifica-

Second-Generation Computers (approximately 1 9 5 8 - 1 9 6 3 )

t i o n b e c a u s e experts d i s a g r e e a b o u t its d e f i n i t i o n . O n e

The

of

w i l l b e b a s e d o n artificial i n t e l l i g e n c e , a l l o w i n g t h e m t o

c o m p u t e r s , such as t h e I B M

think, reason, a n d learn. Voice a n d touch are expected

1401

(shown

t o be a primary means of input, a n d computers may

here) w e r e physically smaller,

b e c o n s t r u c t e d in t h e f o r m of o p t i c a l c o m p u t e r s t h a t

less expensive, m o r e p o w e r -

process d a t a using light i n s t e a d o f e l e c t r o n s , t i n y c o m -

ful,

puters t h a t utilize n a n o t e c h n o l o g y , or as e n t i r e g e n e r a l -

second

generation

mainframe

more

common

energy-efficient,

a n d m o r e reliable t h a n firstg e n e r a t i o n c o m p u t e r s . Pro-

Chapter

1 : Introduction

Courtesy IBM Corporate Archives

to

Computers

and

the

opinion

is t h a t f i f t h - g e n e r a t i o n

computers

p u r p o s e c o m p u t e r s built i n t o desks, h o m e a p p l i a n c e s , a n d o t h e r e v e r y d a y devices.

Internet

Personal Computers (PCs)

The term P C usually refers to p e r s ^ ^ ^ ^ r a ^ & r s that use Microsoft Windows. Person nputers sold only b c. are referred to as hort for Macintosh)

A p e r s o n a l c o m p u t e r (PC) is a small c o m p u t e r designed to be used by one person at a time. Personal computers are widely used by individuals and businesses today. C o n v e n t i o n a l personal computers that are designed to fit on o r n e x t to a desk, as shown in E x h i b i t 1 - 5 , are often referred to as d e s k t o p c o m p u t e r s . T h e most c o m m o n style o f desktop c o m p u t e r today uses a tower case, w h i c h is a system unit designed to sit vertically, typically on the floor. Desktop computers can also have

///////////////////////

a d e s k t o p case, which is designed to be placed horizontally on a desk's surface, or an all-in-one case, which i n c o r p o r a t e s the m o n i t o r and system unit into a single

puters, such as t h o s e m a d e by D e l l , H e w l e t t - P a c k a r d ,

piece o f h a r d w a r e .

N E C , Acer, L e n o v o , Fujitsu, a n d G a t e w a y . T h e s e c o m puters typically run the M i c r o s o f t W i n d o w s o p e r a t i n g system. M a c i n t o s h c o m p u t e r s are m a d e by A p p l e ,

Exhibit 1-5 Desktop computers

use the M a c O S o p e r a t ing s y s t e m ,

and

use d i f f e r e n t

often

hardware

and software than PCcompatible

computers.

Macintosh

computers

are

traditionally

the

computer of choice for artists,

designers,

and

others w h o require advanced

graphics

capa-

bilities. Portable

TOWER CASE

computers

are c o m p u t e r s that are designed t o be

carried

a r o u n d easily, such as in D e s k t o p c o m p u t e r s usually c o n f o r m t o o n e o f

a briefcase o r p o c k e t , depending o n their size. P o r t a b l e

two standards or platforms: PC-compatible or M a -

c o m p u t e r s n o w outsell desktop c o m p u t e r s and are often

c i n t o s h . P C - c o m p a t i b l e c o m p u t e r s evolved f r o m the

the c o m p u t e r o f choice for students a n d h o m e users, as

original I B M P C — t h e first p e r s o n a l c o m p u t e r t h a t

well as for m a n y businesses. In f a c t , p o r t a b l e c o m p u t -

w a s widely a c c e p t e d for business u s e — a n d are the

ers are essential for many w o r k e r s , such as salespeople

m o s t c o m m o n type o f personal c o m p u t e r used today.

w h o m a k e presentations or take orders f r o m clients off-

In g e n e r a l , P C - c o m p a t i b l e h a r d w a r e and s o f t w a r e are

site, agents w h o collect data at r e m o t e l o c a t i o n s , and

c o m p a t i b l e w i t h all brands o f P C - c o m p a t i b l e

managers w h o need computing a n d c o m m u n i c a t i o n s

com-

p e r s o n a l c o m p u t e r (PC) A type of computer based

Extra powerful desktop computers designed for high-end graphics, music, film, architecture, science, and other powerful applications are sometimes called workstations.

on a microprocessor and designed to be used by one person at a time. d e s k t o p c o m p u t e r A personal computer designed to fit on or next to a desk. p o r t a b l e c o m p u t e r A small personal computer designed to be carried around easily.

Chapter

1 : Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

as the one shown in Exhibit 1-6) or convertible tablets, which use the same clamshell design as notebook computers but whose top half can be rotated and folded shut so it can also be used as a slate tablet. ^

N e t b o o k s — a l s o called minin o t e b o o k s , mini-laptops, and ultraportable computers; notebook computers that are smaller (a 10-inch-wide screen is c o m m o n ) , lighter (typically less than three pounds), and less expensive than conventional n o t e b o o k s , so they are especially appropriate for students and business travelers. They typically don't include a C D or DVD drive and they have a smaller keyboard than a n o t e b o o k computer. The market for n e t b o o k s is growing rapidly and it is expected to reach 5 0 million by 2 0 1 2 , according to the research firm Gartner.

^

resources as they travel. P o r t a b l e computers (see E x hibit 1-6) are available in the following configurations: ^

enough to fit in one h a n d . U M P C s are smaller

Notebook computers (laptop computers)—

(screen size is often seven inches or smaller) and

computers that are a b o u t the size o f a paper

lighter (usually less than t w o pounds) than net-

n o t e b o o k and open t o reveal a screen on the top

b o o k s . T h e y can support k e y b o a r d , touch, and/

half o f the c o m p u t e r and a k e y b o a r d on the bot-

or pen input, depending on the particular design

t o m . They are c o m p a r a b l e t o desktop computers

being used.

in features and capabilities. ^

U l t r a - m o b i l e P C s ( U M P C s ) — s o m e t i m e s called handheld c o m p u t e r s ; c o m p u t e r s that are small

M o s t personal c o m p u t e r s t o d a y are sold as stand-

T a b l e t c o m p u t e r — n o t e b o o k - s i z e d computers that

alone, self-sufficient units t h a t are equipped with all

are designed to be used with a digital pen or stylus.

the hardware and software needed t o operate indepen-

They can be either slate tablets (one-piece comput-

dently. In other w o r d s , they can perform input, process-

ers with a screen on top and no keyboard, such

ing, output, and storage w i t h o u t being connected to a n e t w o r k , although they can be n e t w o r k e d if desired. In

notebook computer (laptop computer) A

c o n t r a s t , a device that must be c o n n e c t e d to a network

small personal computer designed to be carried around easily.

to perform processing or storage tasks is referred to as

t a b l e t c o m p u t e r A portable computer about the size of a notebook

a d u m b t e r m i n a l . T w o types o f personal computers that may be able to perform a limited a m o u n t of indepen-

that is designed to be used with an electronic pen. netbook

dent processing (like a desktop or n o t e b o o k computer)

A very small notebook computer.

but are designed to be used with a n e t w o r k (like a d u m b

ultra-mobile P C ( U M P C ) A portable personal computer that is

terminal) are thin clients and Internet appliances.

small enough to fit in one hand.

A thin client—also

d u m b t e r m i n a l A computer that must be connected to a network to

called

a network

computer

( N C ) — i s a device that is designed t o be used in c o n -

perform processing or storage tasks.

junction with a c o m p a n y n e t w o r k . Instead o f using lo-

t h i n c l i e n t A personal computer designed to access a network for

cal hard drives for storage, p r o g r a m s are accessed from

processing and data storage instead of performing those tasks locally.

and data is stored on a n e t w o r k server. T h e main advantage o f thin clients over desktop c o m p u t e r s is lower

Chapter

1:

Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

\\\\\\\\\\

Thin clients are a good choice for companies that manipulate highly secure data that needs to be prevented from leaving the facility.

Exhibit 1-8 Nintendo Wii gaming console

cost (such as f o r overall hardware and software, c o m puter m a i n t e n a n c e , and power a n d cooling c o s t s ) , increased security because data is n o t stored locally, and easier m a i n t e n a n c e because all software is located on a central server. Disadvantages include having limited or n o local storage and not being able t o function as a stand-alone c o m p u t e r when the n e t w o r k is n o t w o r k ing. T h i n clients are used by businesses t o provide e m ployees with access t o network applications; they are also sometimes used t o provide Internet access t o the public. F o r instance, a thin client might be installed in a hotel l o b b y t o provide guests with Internet access, hotel

news, sports scores, weather, a n d o t h e r personalized

and c o n f e r e n c e information, r o o m - t o - r o o m calling, and

W e b - b a s e d information. G a m i n g c o n s o l e s , such as the

free p h o n e calls via the Internet.

N i n t e n d o W i i shown in E x h i b i t 1-8 a n d the S o n y Play-

Network

computers

or other

devices

designed

Station 3 , that c a n be used t o view Internet c o n t e n t , in

primarily f o r accessing W e b pages and/or exchanging

addition t o their gaming abilities, c a n be classified as

email are called I n t e r n e t a p p l i a n c e s (sometimes referred

Internet appliances when they are used t o access the

to as Internet devices). Internet appliances are designed

Internet. Internet capabilities are also beginning t o be

to be located in the home and c a n be built into another

built into television sets, which m a k e t h e m Internet a p -

product, such as a refrigerator or telephone c o n s o l e , o r

pliances, as well.

can be stand-alone Internet devices, such as the c h u m b y device s h o w n in E x h i b i t 1-7, that is designed t o deliver

Midrange Servers A m i d r a n g e s e r v e r (sometimes called a m i n i c o m p u t e r )

is a medium-sized computer used t o host p r o g r a m s a n d

Exhibit 1-7 The chumby stand-alone Internet device

data for a small n e t w o r k . Typically larger, m o r e powerful, a n d m o r e expensive than a d e s k t o p c o m p u t e r , a midrange server is usually located in a closet o r other out-of-the-way place and c a n serve m a n y users at o n e time. Users c o n n e c t t o the server t h r o u g h a n e t w o r k , using their desktop computer, p o r t a b l e c o m p u t e r , thin client, o r a d u m b terminal consisting o f just a m o n i t o r and k e y b o a r d (see E x h i b i t 1 - 9 ) . M i d r a n g e servers are often used in small- t o medium-sized businesses such as medical o r dental offices, as well as in school c o m p u t e r l a b s . T h e r e are also special h o m e servers designed f o r h o m e

I n t e r n e t a p p l i a n c e A specialized network computer designed primarily for Internet access and/or email exchange. m i d r a n g e s e r v e r ( m i n i c o m p u t e r ) A medium-sized computer used to host programs and data for a small network.

Chapter

I : Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

irtualtzation concepts are ginning to be applied to other computing areas, su as networking and storage

Exhibit 1-9 Midrange server , Users connect to the server using computers, thin clients, or dumb terminals.

The server is typically stored in a nearby closet or other out-of-the-way place.

Mainframe Computers A m a i n f r a m e c o m p u t e r is a powerful computer used in m a n y

large

organizations

that

need

to manage large a m o u n t s o f centralized data. Larger, m o r e

expensive,

and more

powerful

than midrange servers, m a i n f r a m e s can serve thousands o f users c o n n e c t e d t o the mainframe via personal c o m p u t e r s , thin clients, or dumb terminals in a m a n n e r similar t o the way users c o n n e c t t o midrange servers. M a i n f r a m e c o m puters, such as the o n e s h o w n in Exhibit 1 - 1 0 , are typically located in climate-controlled data use, which are often used t o b a c k up (make duplicate

centers and c o n n e c t t o the rest o f the company c o m -

copies of) the c o n t e n t located o n all the computers in

puters via a c o m p u t e r n e t w o r k . D u r i n g regular business

the h o m e a n d t o host m u s i c , p h o t o s , movies, and other

hours, a m a i n f r a m e typically runs the programs needed

media t o be shared via a h o m e n e t w o r k .

to meet the different needs o f its wide variety o f users. At night, it c o m m o n l y p e r f o r m s large processing tasks,

O n e trend involving midrange servers as well as creation

such as payroll and billing. Today's mainframes are

of virtual (rather than a c t u a l ) versions o f a c o m p u t -

sometimes referred t o as high-end servers o r enterprise-

ing resource; in this c a s e , separate server environments

class servers.

mainframe c o m p u t e r s

is v i r t u a l i z a t i o n — t h e

that are physically located o n the same computer, but function as separate servers a n d do n o t interact with

Exhibit 1-10 Mainframe computer

each other. F o r i n s t a n c e , all applications for an organization can be installed in virtual environments on a single physical server instead o f using a separate server for each application. Using a separate server f o r each application wastes resources because the servers are often n o t used t o full c a p a c i t y — o n e estimate is that a b o u t only 1 0 percent o f server capability is frequently utilized. W i t h virtualization, c o m p a n i e s c a n fulfill their computing needs with fewer servers, which translates into reduced costs f o r h a r d w a r e and server management, as well as lower p o w e r a n d cooling costs. C o n sequently, one o f the m o s t significant appeals o f server virtualization

today is increased efficiency.

v i r t u a l i z a t i o n The creation of virtual versions of a computing resource. m a i n f r a m e c o m p u t e r A computer used in large organizations that manage large amounts of centralized data and run multiple programs simultaneously.

Chapter

I : Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

mi1

Exhibit 1-11 Supercomputer

Business Concerns about Energy Efficiency O n e issue f a c i n g businesses t o d a y is t h e h i g h cost of e l e c t r i c i t y t o p o w e r a n d c o o l t h e m a i n f r a m e s , servers, a n d p e r s o n a l c o m p u t e r s used in a n o r g a -

m1

C'

nization. Consequently, making t h e computers loc a t e d in a b u s i n e s s — p a r t i c u l a r l y m a i n f r a m e s a n d

• •

1 ':

* "

s e r v e r s — m o r e e n e r g y e f f i c i e n t is a h i g h priority today. For example, I B M recently consolidated a p p r o x i m a t e l y 4,000 servers l o c a t e d in its d a t a c e n ters i n t o just 30 m a i n f r a m e s (like t h e o n e s h o w n

:

in E x h i b i t 1-10). This n e w e n v i r o n m e n t is e x p e c t e d t o c o n sume

approximately

80%

less e n e r g y a n d result in s i g n i f i c a n t savings in e n -

Converging Technologies

ergy, s o f t w a r e , a n d system s u p p o r t costs.

In p r a c t i c e , classifying a c o m p u t e r i n t o o n e o f t h e six c a t e g o r i e s described in t h i s s e c t i o n is n o t a l w a y s easy o r s t r a i g h t f o r w a r d . F o r e x a m p l e , s o m e h i g h - e n d p e r s o n a l c o m p u t e r s a r e as p o w e r f u l as

Supercomputers S o m e a p p l i c a t i o n s require e x t r a o r d i n a r y speed,

m i d r a n g e servers, a n d s o m e p e r s o n a l c o m p u t e r s

accu-

a r e n e a r l y as small as a m o b i l e p h o n e . In a d d i t i o n ,

racy, and processing c a p a b i l i t i e s — f o r e x a m p l e , sending

t e c h n o l o g y c h a n g e s t o o fast t o h a v e precisely d e -

a s t r o n a u t s i n t o space, controlling missile guidance sys-

fined categories. The computer of t h e f u t u r e may

tems and satellites, forecasting the weather, exploring

n o t l o o k a n y t h i n g like t o d a y ' s c o m p u t e r s . In f a c t ,

for oil, and assisting with some kinds o f scientific re-

future

search. S u p e r c o m p u t e r s — t h e m o s t powerful and m o s t

o l d e r p e r s o n , eyeglasses f o r a t e c h n i c a l w o r k e r ,

applications include hosting extremely c o m p l e x W e b

a n d a f l e x i b l e m o b i l e d e v i c e t h a t c a n physically

sites and decision support systems for c o r p o r a t e execu-

c h a n g e its s h a p e as n e e d e d f o r g e n e r a l c o n s u m e r

such

use. F u t u r e devices a r e also e x p e c t e d t o use v o i c e ,

as 3 D medical imaging, 3 D image projections, and 3 D architectural modeling. Unlike m a i n f r a m e

computers, simultane-

computers

person's lifestyle, such as a r i n g o r w a t c h f o r a n

to fill this need. S o m e relatively new supercomputing

which typically run multiple applications

personal

b u i l t i n t o a v a r i e t y of useful o b j e c t s t o best f i t a

expensive type o f c o m p u t e r a v a i l a b l e — w e r e developed

tives, as well as three-dimensional applications,

predictions envision

t o u c h , or g e s t u r e i n p u t i n s t e a d o f a k e y b o a r d a n d m o u s e , a n d t o project o u t p u t o n a n y a p p r o p r i a t e s u r f a c e i n s t e a d of using a m o n i t o r . N e v e r t h e l e s s ,

ously to serve a wide variety o f users, supercomputers

t h e s e six c a t e g o r i e s a r e c o m m o n l y u s e d t o d a y t o

generally run one p r o g r a m at a time as fast as possible.

r e f e r t o g r o u p s of c o m p u t e r s d e s i g n e d f o r similar

C o n v e n t i o n a l supercomputers can cost several mil-

purposes.

lion dollars each. T o reduce the cost, supercomputers are often built by connecting hundreds o f smaller and less expensive computers (increasingly midrange servs u p e r c o m p u t e r The fastest, most expensive, and most

ers) i n t o a s u p e r c o m p u t i n g cluster t h a t acts as a single

powerful type of computer.

supercomputer. T h e c o m p u t e r s in the cluster usually c o n t a i n multiple CPUs each and are dedicated to pro-

s u p e r c o m p u t i n g cluster A supercomputer composed of numerous

cessing cluster applications. F o r e x a m p l e , I B M ' s R o a d -

smaller computers connected together to act as a single computer.

runner supercomputer, which is shown in E x h i b i t 1 - 1 1 ,

Chapter

I : Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

c o n t a i n s approximately 1 9 , 0 0 0 C P U s and is one o f the

l o i Computer Networks and the Internet

fastest computers in the w o r l d . T h i s supercomputing

3

cluster, built for the U.S. D e p a r t m e n t o f Energy, is installed at Los Alamos N a t i o n a l L a b in California, and is used primarily to ensure the safety and reliability o f

5 , 2 0 0 square feet, is the first supercomputer to reach

A

petaflop (quadrillions o f floating point operations per

electronically. Computer networks exist in many sizes

second) speeds. T h i s supercomputer is also one o f the

and types. For instance, home networks are commonly

the nation's nuclear w e a p o n s stockpile. Roadrunner, which

cost a b o u t $ 1 0 0 million and occupies

n e t w o r k is a collection o f computers and other de-

about

vices that are connected to enable users to share

hardware, software, and data, as well as to communicate

most energy-efficient c o m p u t e r s in the T O P 5 0 0 list o f

used to allow home computers to share a single printer

the 5 0 0 fastest c o m p u t e r s in the world. A new I B M

and Internet connection, as well as to exchange

supercomputer n a m e d Sequoia that is currently under

Small office networks enable workers to access company

development for the L a w r e n c e

records stored on a network server, communicate with

Livermore

National

files.

L a b o r a t o r y is expected to use approximately 1.6 mil-

other employees, share a high-speed printer, and access

lion CPUs and perform at 2 0 petaflops.

the Internet, as shown in Exhibit 1 - 1 2 . School networks

Exhibit 1-12 Example of a computer network

BETTY'S PC

Chapter

1:

Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

allow students and teachers t o access the Internet and

(see E x h i b i t 1 - 1 3 ) . W e b pages are viewed using a W e b

school resources, and large corporate networks often

b r o w s e r , such as Internet E x p l o r e r ( I E ) , C h r o m e , Safari,

connect all o f the offices or retail stores in the c o r p o -

O p e r a , or F i r e f o x .

ration, creating a network that spans several cities or states. Public wireless networks, such as those available at some coffeehouses, restaurants, public libraries, and

Accessing a Network or the Internet

parks, provide Internet access to individuals via their

T o access a local computer n e t w o r k , you need t o use a n e t w o r k adapter, either built into y o u r c o m p u t e r o r at-

portable computers and mobile devices.

tached t o it, t o c o n n e c t your c o m p u t e r t o the n e t w o r k . W i t h s o m e c o m p u t e r n e t w o r k s you need t o

The Internet and the World Wide Web

i n f o r m a t i o n , such as a username and a p a s s w o r d , t o c o n n e c t t o the n e t w o r k . After you are c o n n e c t e d t o the

T h e I n t e r n e t is the largest and m o s t w e l l - k n o w n c o m -

n e t w o r k , you c a n access n e t w o r k r e s o u r c e s , including

puter n e t w o r k in the world. It is technically a n e t w o r k o f

the n e t w o r k ' s Internet c o n n e c t i o n . If y o u are c o n n e c t -

n e t w o r k s , because it consists o f thousands o f n e t w o r k s

ing to the Internet without going t h r o u g h a c o m p u t e r

that c a n all access each other via the main b a c k b o n e

n e t w o r k , y o u r c o m p u t e r needs t o use a m o d e m t o c o n -

infrastructure o f the Internet. Individual users c o n n e c t

nect to the c o m m u n i c a t i o n s m e d i a , such as a t e l e p h o n e

to the Internet by connecting their c o m p u t e r s t o servers b e l o n g i n g t o an I n t e r n e t s e r v i c e p r o v i d e r

supply

line o r cable c o n n e c t i o n , used by y o u r ISP.

(ISP)—a

T o request a W e b page or o t h e r r e s o u r c e l o c a t e d on

c o m p a n y t h a t provides Internet access, usually for a

the Internet, its I n t e r n e t a d d r e s s — a unique n u m e r i c o r

fee. I S P s — w h i c h include conventional and mobile tele-

t e x t - b a s e d address—is used. T h e m o s t c o m m o n types o f

phone c o m p a n i e s like A T & T , Verizon, and Sprint; cable

Internet addresses are IP addresses a n d d o m a i n n a m e s

providers like C o m c a s t and T i m e W a r n e r ; and stand-

(to identify c o m p u t e r s ) , U R L s (to identify W e b p a g e s ) ,

alone ISPs like N e t Z e r o and E a r t h L i n k — f u n c t i o n as

and email addresses (to identify p e o p l e ) .

gateways o r o n r a m p s to the Internet, providing Internet

IP a d d r e s s e s

access t o their subscribers. ISP servers are continually

and

their

corresponding

domain

n a m e s are used t o identify c o m p u t e r s a v a i l a b l e t h r o u g h

c o n n e c t e d t o a larger n e t w o r k , called a regional netw o r k , w h i c h , in turn, is connected t o one o f the m a j o r high-speed n e t w o r k s within a country, called a b a c k -

n e t w o r k Computers and other devices that are connected to

b o n e n e t w o r k . B a c k b o n e networks within a c o u n t r y are

share hardware, software, and data.

c o n n e c t e d t o each other and to b a c k b o n e n e t w o r k s in other c o u n t r i e s . Together they f o r m o n e e n o r m o u s net-

I n t e r n e t The largest and most well-known computer network, linking

w o r k o f n e t w o r k s — t h e Internet.

millions of computers all over the world.

W h i l e the term Internet refers t o the physical struc-

I n t e r n e t s e r v i c e p r o v i d e r (ISP) A business or other organization

ture o f t h a t n e t w o r k , the W o r l d W i d e W e b ( W e b or W W W )

that provides Internet access to others, typically for a fee.

refers t o o n e r e s o u r c e — a collection o f d o c u m e n t s called

W o r l d W i d e W e b ( W e b or W W W ) The collection of Web pages

W e b p a g e s — a v a i l a b l e through the Internet. A group o f

available through the Internet.

W e b pages belonging to one individual or c o m p a n y is

W e b p a g e A document located on a Web server.

called a W e b site. W e b pages are stored on c o m p u t e r s called W e b s e r v e r s that are continually c o n n e c t e d t o the

W e b site A collection of related Web pages.

Internet; they c a n be accessed at any time by anyone

W e b s e r v e r A computer continually connected to the Internet that

with a c o m p u t e r or other W e b - e n a b l e d device and an

stores Web pages accessible through the Internet.

Internet c o n n e c t i o n . A wide variety o f i n f o r m a t i o n is

W e b b r o w s e r A program used to view Web pages.

available via W e b pages, such as c o m p a n y and prod-

I n t e r n e t a d d r e s s An address that identifies a computer, person, or

uct i n f o r m a t i o n , government forms and publications,

Web page on the Internet, such as an IP address, domain name, or email

m a p s , telephone directories, news, weather, sports re-

address.

sults, airline schedules, and m u c h , much m o r e . Y o u can

I P a d d r e s s A numeric Internet address used to uniquely identify a

also use W e b pages to shop, b a n k , trade s t o c k , and perf o r m other types o f online

financial

computer on the Internet.

t r a n s a c t i o n s ; ac-

cess social n e t w o r k s like F a c e b o o k and M y S p a c e ; and

d o m a i n n a m e A text-based Internet address used to uniquely identify

listen t o m u s i c , play games, w a t c h television s h o w s ,

a computer on the Internet.

and

perform

other

entertainment-oriented

activities

Chapter

1:

Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

Exhibit 1-13 Examples of common Web activities

lZ5771»»lJ73JfMi3 • Google Se.reh - Wr. » '1 Wr.v~.9009tt.com/. U Fwofitef QB

.'| 1Z577140U733IMH • (

Wob Imaass Videos Macs News Shooanp Gmad ami *

Google

Tip S m timt by trtting I ho rotum koy nctoad of clicking 00 "»o»rch"

Track UPS oackaoe 1Z6771401273388683 No standard web pages containing al your search terms were found Your search 1Z6771401273388683 did not match any documents 9 Internet | Protected Mode: Off

ACCESSING PRODUCT INFORMATION LOOKING U P REFERENCE INFORMATION

READING N E W S

1 Los Angeles High School

" I I

W«lcom« to Los Angeles Htjh

c2LT*x»

School!

Af)

L

W

'

SHOPPING ACCESSING SOCIAL NETWORKS WATCHING TV S H O W S A N D M O V I E S

the Internet. IP (short f o r Internet Protocol) addresses

registered, the IP address o f the c o m p u t e r that will be

are numeric, such as 2 0 7 . 4 6 . 1 9 7 . 3 2 , and are c o m -

hosting the W e b site associated with that domain name

monly used by computers t o refer t o other computers.

is also registered. T h e W e b site c a n be accessed using

A computer that hosts i n f o r m a t i o n available through

either its domain n a m e o r corresponding IP address.

the Internet, such as a W e b server hosting W e b pages,

W h e n a W e b site is requested by its domain name, the

usually has a unique text-based d o m a i n n a m e , such as

corresponding IP address is l o o k e d up using one o f the

m i c r o s o f t . c o m , that c o r r e s p o n d s t o that

Internet's domain n a m e system ( D N S ) servers, and then

computer's

the appropriate W e b page is displayed.

IP address t o make it easier f o r people t o request W e b pages located on that computer. IP addresses and d o -

D o m a i n names typically reflect the n a m e of the in-

main names are unique; that is, n o t w o computers on

dividual or organization associated with that W e b site.

the Internet use the e x a c t same IP address or the e x a c t

T h e different parts o f a domain n a m e are separated by

same d o m a i n n a m e . T o ensure this, specific IP addresses

a period. T h e far right part o f the d o m a i n n a m e (begin-

are allocated t o each n e t w o r k , such as a c o m p a n y net-

ning with the rightmost period) is called the top-level

w o r k o r an ISP, t o be used with the computers on that

domain ( T L D ) and traditionally identifies the type o f

n e t w o r k . T h e r e is a w o r l d w i d e registration system for

organization or its location, such as . c o m f o r businesses,

domain n a m e registration. W h e n a domain name is

. e d u for educational institutions, . j p f o r W e b sites lo-

Chapter

1: I n t r o d u c t i o n

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

cated in J a p a n , o r . f r f o r W e b sites located in F r a n c e . T h e r e were seven original T L D s used in the United

Custom TLDs

States; additional T L D s and numerous two-letter country code T L D s have since been created. See E x h i b i t 1 - 1 4

A n e w proposal allows for t h e creation of n e w

for some e x a m p l e s .

T L D s t h a t c a n b e virtually a n y c o m b i n a t i o n o f u p t o 64 c h a r a c t e r s a n d t h a t c a n use n o n - L a t i n c h a r acters. A l t h o u g h c u s t o m TLDs a r e possible (such as

E x h i b i t 1-14

t o better represent a company n a m e or personal

Sample top-level domains (TLDs)

n a m e ) , t h e y a r e also e x p e c t e d t o b e e x p e n s i v e t o register ( o n e e s t i m a t e is a b o u t $100,000 e a c h ) .

Intended use

Original TLDs

C o n s e q u e n t l y , t h e initial i n t e r e s t in c u s t o m T L D s is b y c o u n t r i e s such as Russia w h o s e n a t i v e

.com

Commercial businesses

.edu

Educational institutions

.gov

Government organizations

.int

International treaty organizations

.mil

Military organizations

.net

Network providers and ISPs

org

Noncommercial organizations

lan-

g u a g e s use non-Latin c h a r a c t e r s , g r o u p s o f b u s i nesses a n d o r g a n i z a t i o n s t h a t a r e i n t e r e s t e d n e w a c t i v i t y - o r i e n t e d TLDs like

.sports

and

in

. s h o p ,

a n d c o m m u n i t y o r g a n i z a t i o n s i n t e r e s t e d in cityb a s e d T L D s like

.nyc

and

f o r N e w Y o r k City

.paris

a n d Paris businesses, respectively.

Intended use

N e w e r TLDs

(ftp://) is sometimes used to upload a n d d o w n l o a d files.

.aero

Aviation industry

.biz

Businesses

.html or .htm, indicates the type o f W e b page t h a t will

.fr

French businesses

be displayed. F o r example, looking at the U R L f o r the

.info

Resource sites

.jobs

Employment sites

.mobi

Sites optimized for mobile devices

the

.name

Individuals

W e b page because the standard

T h e file extension used for the W e b page file, such as

W e b page shown in Exhibit 1 - 1 5 f r o m right t o left, y o u can see that the W e b page called a folder called t w i t t e r . c o m

j o b s

i n d e x . h t m l

is stored in

on the W e b server associated with

d o m a i n , and is a regular (nonsecure) http://

p r o t o c o l is b e -

ing used.

.pro

Licensed professionals

.uk

United Kingdom businesses

T o c o n t a c t people using the Internet, y o u m o s t often use their e m a i l a d d r e s s e s . An email address c o n s i s t s

o f a u s e r n a m e (an identifying n a m e ) , f o l l o w e d by the @ s y m b o l , followed by the d o m a i n n a m e f o r the c o m p u t e r Similar t o the w a y an IP address or domain n a m e

that will be handling that person's email (called a mail

uniquely identifies a computer on the Internet, a u n i f o r m

server). F o r e x a m p l e ,

resource l o c a t o r ( U R L ) uniquely identifies a specific W e b

page by specifying the p r o t o c o l — o r

[email protected]

standard—being

used t o display the W e b page, the W e b server host-

[email protected]

ing the W e b page, the name o f any folders on the W e b

[email protected]

server in which the W e b page file is stored, and finally, the W e b page's filename if needed. i. The

most

common

Web

page p r o t o c o l s are H y p e r t e x t Transfer P r o t o c o l (http://) for

u n i f o r m r e s o u r c e l o c a t o r ( U R L ) An Internet address that uniquely identifies a Web page.

//WW'

regular W e b pages or Hyper-

e m a i l a d d r e s s An Internet address consisting of a username and

t e x t Transfer Protocol

computer domain name that uniquely identifies a person on the Internet.

Secure

(https://) for secure W e b pages

u s e r n a m e A name that uniquely identifies a user on a specific computer

that c a n safely be used t o transmit sensitive informa-

network.

tion, such as credit card numbers. File Transfer P r o t o c o l

Chapter

1 : Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

blank spaces

Pronouncing Internet Addresses

[email protected]

B e c a u s e I n t e r n e t addresses a r e f r e q u e n t l y g i v e n verbally, it is i m p o r t a n t t o k n o w h o w

ford

t o p r o n o u n c e t h e m . K e e p in m i n d t h e f o l l o w i n g tips w h e n y o u say a n I n t e r n e t address: • If a p o r t i o n o f t h e a d d r e s s f o r m s a r e c o g n i z a b l e w o r d o r n a m e , it is s p o k e n ; o t h e r w i s e , it is s p e l l e d o u t .

and a jsmith

at Stan-

University

ing the email

us-

address

[email protected], the t w o email addresses are unique. It is up to

• T h e @ sign is p r o n o u n c e d at.

each organization with

• T h e p e r i o d (.) is p r o n o u n c e d d o t • T h e f o r w a r d slash (/) is p r o n o u n c e d

a

slash.

registered

name

Type of a d d r e s s

Sample address

Pronunciation

Domain name

berkeley.edu

berkeley dot e d u

URL

microsoft.com/windows/ie/default.asp

microsoft dot com slash windows

Email address

[email protected]

to

one—and

domain

ensure only

that one—

e x a c t same username is assigned to its domain.

slash i e slash default dot a s p president at white house dot gov

Surfing the Web O n c e you have an Internet connection, you

are

the

email

addresses

assigned

jsmith (John S m i t h ) , m a r i a _ s

to

are ready to begin surfing t h e W e b — t h a t is, using a W e b

Sanchez), and

browser to view W e b pages. T h e first page that your

respectively

(Maria

sam.peterson (Sam P e t e r s o n ) , three hypothetical em-

Web browser displays when it is opened is your brows-

ployees at Cengage L e a r n i n g , the publisher o f this text-

er's starting page or h o m e page. F r o m your browser's

b o o k . T o ensure a unique email address for everyone

home page, you can move t o o t h e r W e b pages.

in the w o r l d , usernames must be unique within each domain n a m e . S o , even though there could be a

To navigate to a new Web page for which you

jsmith

k n o w the U R L , type t h a t U R L in the a p p r o p r i a t e l o -

at Cengage Learning w h o is using the email address

c a t i o n f o r y o u r W e b b r o w s e r (such as I n t e r n e t E x plorer's Address bar, as s h o w n in E x h i b i t 1 - 1 6 ) and press the E n t e r key. A f t e r t h a t p a g e is d i s p l a y e d , y o u

surf t h e W e b To use a Web browser to view

c a n use the h y p e r l i n k s — g r a p h i c s o r t e x t linked t o

Web pages.

o t h e r W e b p a g e s — o n t h a t p a g e t o display o t h e r W e b pages.

Chapter

I : Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

Exhibit 1-16 IE8 Web browser displaying a Web page

TOOLBARS Include Back, Home, and Print buttons, and the Favorites bar.

U S I N G URLS Type a URL in the Address bar and press Enter to display the corresponding Web page.

USING H Y P E R L I N K S Point to a hyperlink to see the corresponding URL on the status bar; click the hyperlink to display that page.

STATUS BAR Includes zoom options and security indicators.

T h e m o s t c o m m o n l y used W e b b r o w s e r s i n c l u d e

ing (so y o u c a n o p e n m u l t i p l e W e b p a g e s a t

I n t e r n e t E x p l o r e r ( s h o w n in E x h i b i t 1 - 1 6 ) , C h r o m e

the

same time), improved crash recovery and security,

( s h o w n in E x h i b i t 1 - 1 7 ) , a n d F i r e f o x . T h e

newest

and improved ability to search for and

versions of these browsers include tabbed

brows-

Web pages.

bookmark

All W e b browsers have a feature (usually called F a vorites or B o o k m a r k s that is accessed via a F a v o r -

Exhibit 1-17 Web page open in the Chrome Web browser

ites or B o o k m a r k s menu or b u t t o n ) t h a t you c a n use t o save W e b page URLs.

Once

a

Web

page is saved as a favorite o r a b o o k m a r k , you c a n redisplay that page its

without

typing

URL—you

simply

select its link f r o m the Favorites

or

Book-

m a r k s list. W e b b r o w s ers

also

maintain

a

H i s t o r y list, w h i c h is a record o f all W e b pages visited during a period o f time specified in the browser

settings;

you

c a n revisit a W e b page located on the H i s t o r y

KEYWORD SEARCHES Since t h e W e b option is selected, t y p e keywords here a n d press Enter to see a list of W e b pages m a t c h i n g your search criteria.

list by displaying

the

H i s t o r y list a n d selecting t h a t p a g e .

Chapter

I : Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

9

in Exhibit 1 - 1 8 , email messages travel from the sender's

Searching the Web

computer to his or her ISP's mail server, and then through

Y o u , like m a n y p e o p l e , p r o b a b l y t u r n t o t h e W e b

ISP. When the recipient logs on to the Internet and re-

t o f i n d specific i n f o r m a t i o n . S p e c i a l W e b p a g e s ,

quests his or her email, it is displayed on the computer he

the Internet to the mail server being used by the recipient's

c a l l e d search sites, a r e a v a i l a b l e t o h e l p y o u l o c a t e

or she is using. In addition to text, email messages can in-

w h a t y o u a r e l o o k i n g f o r o n t h e I n t e r n e t . O n e of

clude attached files, such as photos and other documents.

t h e m o s t p o p u l a r search s i t e s — G o o g l e — i s s h o w n

Email can be sent and received via an email pro-

in Exhibit 1-17. To c o n d u c t a s e a r c h , y o u t y p e o n e

gram, such as M i c r o s o f t O u t l o o k , installed on the c o m -

or m o r e k e y w o r d s i n t o t h e s e a r c h box o n a search

puter being used or via a W e b mail service, which is a

site, a n d a list o f links t o W e b

Web page belonging to a W e b mail provider such as

pages matching browsers

Gmail or W i n d o w s Live M a i l . Using an installed email

also p e r f o r m a n I n t e r n e t s e a r c h o n search t e r m s

program is convenient for individuals w h o use email

y o u t y p e in t h e A d d r e s s b a r i n s t e a d of a U R L . A l s o ,

often and w a n t to have copies o f sent and received mes-

n u m e r o u s r e f e r e n c e sites a r e a v a i l a b l e o n t h e W e b

sages stored on their computer. W e b - b a s e d email allows

y o u r s e a r c h criteria is d i s p l a y e d . M a n y

t o look u p addresses, p h o n e n u m b e r s , ZIP codes,

users to access their messages f r o m any computer with

m a p s , a n d o t h e r i n f o r m a t i o n . To f i n d a r e f e r e n c e

an Internet connection by just displaying the appropri-

site, t y p e t h e i n f o r m a t i o n y o u a r e l o o k i n g f o r (such

ate W e b mail page and logging o n .

as " Z I P c o d e l o o k u p " or " t o p o g r a p h i c a l m a p s " ) in

Web-based email is typically free, and virtually

a search site's s e a r c h box t o see links t o sites w i t h

all ISPs used with personal c o m p u t e r s include email

that information.

service in their monthly fee. S o m e plans from mobile phone providers that provide Internet service for m o -

Email

ibit 1-18 How email works Exhib

Email is the process o f

ex-

changing messages between computers over a n e t w o r k — SENDER'S COMPUTER

usually the Internet. Email is one of the most widely

The sender composes a message and sends it to the recipient via his or her email address.

|

used Internet a p p l i c a t i o n s — Americans alone send billions

of

email

messages

The email message is sent over the Internet through the sender's mail server to the recipient's mail server.

daily and worldwide email traffic is expected to exceed one-half

trillion

messages

per day by 2 0 1 3 , according to the Radicati G r o u p . You can send an email message from

any

Internet-enabled

device, such as a computer,

desktop

portable

com-

puter, or mobile device, to

SENDER'S MAIL SERVER

anyone who has an Internet

The recipient requests his or her messages from the mail server and the message is displayed.

emai/ address. As illustrated

email

i ft

Messages sent from one user to another over the Internet or other network.

Chapter

RECIPIENT'S COMPUTER

I : Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

RECIPIENT'S MAIL SERVER

bile phones include a limit on the number and/or size

Technology has also m a d e a huge n u m b e r o f tasks

o f email messages that can be sent o r received during

in our lives go much faster. Instead o f experiencing a

a billing period; messages after that point result in ad-

long delay for a credit check, an a p p l i c a n t c a n get a p -

ditional fees. O t h e r types o f mobile c o m m u n i c a t i o n s ,

proved for a purchase, loan, or credit card a l m o s t im-

such as t e x t messages, may also incur a fee.

mediately. D o c u m e n t s and p h o t o g r a p h s c a n be emailed or faxed in m o m e n t s , instead of taking at least a day to be mailed physically. Viewers can w a t c h favorite T V shows online and access up-to-the-minute n e w s at their

LOI 4 Computers and Society

convenience. And we can d o w n l o a d i n f o r m a t i o n , p r o g r a m s , music files, movies, and m o r e on d e m a n d w h e n

T

he vast improvements in technology over the past

we w a n t or need them, instead o f having t o o r d e r them

decade have had a distinct impact on daily life.

and then wait for delivery or go to a physical store t o

Computers have become indispensable tools at home and w o r k . Related technological advancements

purchase the items.

have

Although there are a great n u m b e r o f benefits f r o m

microwaves,

having a computer-oriented society, there are risks as

coffee pots, toys, exercise bikes, telephones, televisions,

well. A variety o f problems have emerged f r o m o u r e x -

and m o r e — l o o k and function. As computers and every-

tensive c o m p u t e r use, ranging f r o m stress a n d health

day devices become smarter, they w o r k faster, better,

c o n c e r n s , to the proliferation o f unsolicited emails a n d

changed the w a y everyday items—cars,

and m o r e reliably than before, as well as take on ad-

harmful p r o g r a m s that can be installed o n o u r c o m p u t -

ditional capabilities. Computerization and technological

ers w i t h o u t o u r knowledge, t o security a n d privacy is-

advances have also changed society as a whole. W i t h o u t

sues, to legal and ethical dilemmas. M a n y security and

computers, b a n k s would be overwhelmed by the j o b of

privacy c o n c e r n s stem from the fact that so m u c h per-

tracking all the transactions they process, m o o n explora-

sonal business takes place o n l i n e — o r at least ends up

tion and the space shuttle would still belong to science

as data in a c o m p u t e r database s o m e w h e r e — a n d the

fiction, and scientific advances such as D N A analysis and

potential for misuse of this data is e n o r m o u s .

gene mapping would be nonexistent. Everyday activities,

A n o t h e r c o n c e r n is the repercussions o f collecting

such as shopping and banking, are increasingly auto-

such vast a m o u n t s o f information electronically. S o m e

mated, and fast and easy access to information via the

people w o r r y a b o u t creating a " B i g B r o t h e r " situation,

Internet and communications via email and instant mes-

in which the government or a n o t h e r o r g a n i z a t i o n is

saging is expected. In fact, the Internet and its resources

watching everything that we d o . A n d s o m e Internet be-

have quickly become an integral part of our society.

havior, such as downloading music o r m o v i e s f r o m an

Benefits and Risks of a Computer-Oriented Society

fice computer, can get you arrested o r fired.

T h e benefits o f having such a computer-oriented soci-

more and more data about our everyday activities is col-

ety are n u m e r o u s . T h e capability to virtually design,

lected and stored on computers accessible via the Inter-

unauthorized source or viewing p o r n o g r a p h y on an ofSome people view the potential risk to personal privacy as one o f the most important societal issues. As

build, and test n e w buildings, cars, and airplanes before

net, our privacy is at risk because the potential for pri-

the actual c o n s t r u c t i o n begins helps professionals cre-

vacy violations increases. Today, data is collected a b o u t

ate safer p r o d u c t s . Technological advances in medicine

practically anything we buy online o r offline, although

allow for earlier diagnosis and m o r e effective treatment

offline purchases may not be associated with our identity

of diseases than ever before. T h e ability to s h o p , pay

unless we use a credit card or a membership or loyalty

bills, research products, participate in online courses,

card. T h e issue is not that data is collected—with virtu-

and l o o k up vast amounts o f information 2 4 hours a

ally all organizations using computers for recordkeeping,

day, 7 days a week, 3 6 5 days a year via the Internet is

that is unavoidable—but h o w the collected data is used

a huge convenience. In addition, a computer-oriented

and h o w secure it is. D a t a collected by businesses m a y be

society

generates

new

opportunities.

For

example,

used only by that company or shared with others. D a t a

technologies, such as speech recognition software and

shared with others often results in spam—unsolicited

Braille input and output devices, enable physically- or

emails. Spam is an enormous problem for individuals

visually-challenged individuals to perform

and businesses today, and it is considered by many to be

necessary

j o b tasks and to c o m m u n i c a t e with others m o r e easily.

a violation of personal privacy.

a p te r

I :

Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

works; symbols, names, and designs used in conjunction with a business; architectural drawings; and inventions.

Protecting Your Computer To h e l p protect y o u r c o m p u t e r , n e v e r o p e n

T h e three main types of intellectual property rights are copyrights, trademarks, and patents. an

email attachment f r o m someone you do not k n o w or t h a t has a n e x e c u t a b l e f i l e e x t e n s i o n ( t h e last t h r e e letters in t h e f i l e n a m e p r e c e d e d by a p e r i o d ) , such as .exe, . c o m , or . v b s , w i t h o u t c h e c k i n g w i t h t h e s e n d e r first t o m a k e s u r e t h e a t t a c h m e n t is l e g i t i m a t e . Y o u s h o u l d n e v e r click a link in a n e m a i l message.

You

should

also

be

c a r e f u l a b o u t w h a t files y o u download from the Int e r n e t . In a d d i t i o n , it y f f ^ ^ is crucial t o install security

software

on your computer and to

set

up

the

program to monitor your •lock c o m p u t e r o n a c o n t i n u a l basis, a n d d e t e c t or block any harmful programs.

Understanding Intellectual Property Rights All computer users should be aware of intellectual p r o p e r t y rights, which are the legal rights to which the creators of intellectual property—original creative w o r k s — a r e entitled. Examples o f intellectual property include music and movies; paintings, c o m p u t e r graphics, and other works of art; poetry, b o o k s , and other types of written

intellectual property rights The legal rights to which creators of original creative works are entitled. c o p y r i g h t The legal right to sell, publish, or distribute an

A copyright is a form of protection available to the creator of an original artistic, musical, or literary w o r k , such as a b o o k , movie, software program, musical composition, or painting. It gives the copyright holder the exclusive right to publish, reproduce, distribute, perform, or display the w o r k . Immediately after creating a work, the creator automatically o w n s the copyright of that w o r k . Copyrights apply to both published and unpublished works and remain in effect until 7 0 years after the creator's death. Copyrights for w o r k s registered by an organization or as anonymous w o r k s last 9 5 years from the date of publication or 1 2 0 years from the date of creation, whichever is shorter. Although works created in the United States after M a r c h 1 , 1 9 8 9 are not required to display a copyright notice to retain their copyright protection, displaying a copyright statement on a published w o r k , such as the ones shown in Exhibit 1-19, reminds others that the w o r k is protected by copyright law and that any use must comply with copyright law.

Exhibit 1-19 Copyright statements © 2012 Course Technology, Cengage Learning ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. No part of this work covered by the copyright herein maybe reproduced, transmitted, stored or used in any form or by any means graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including but not limited to photocopying, recording, scanning, digitizing, taping, Web distribution, information networks, or information storageand retrieval systems, except as permitted underSection 107 or 108 of the 1976 United States Copyright Act, withoutthe prior written permission of the publisher.

BOOK COPYRIGHT NOTICE

© R e d Lobster. All rights reserved.

original artistic or literary work; it is held by the creator of a work as soon as it exists in physical form.

W E B SITE COPYRIGHT NOTICE

f a i r u s e Permits limited duplication and use of a portion of copyrighted material for specific purposes, such as criticism, commentary, news reporting, teaching, and research. d i g i t a l

watermark A subtle alteration of digital content that

identifies the copyright holder. d i g i t a l r i g h t s m a n a g e m e n t ( D R M ) s o f t w a r e Software used to protect and manage the rights of creators of digital content.

Anyone wishing to use copyrighted materials must first obtain permission from the copyright holder and pay any required fee. O n e exception is the legal concept of fair use, which permits limited duplication and use of a portion of copyrighted material for specific purposes, such as criticism, commentary, news reporting, teaching,

t r a d e m a r k A word, phrase, symbol, or design that identifies goods or

and research. For example, a teacher may legally read a

services.

copyrighted poem for discussion in a poetry class, and a

p l a g i a r i s m Presenting someone else's work as your own.

news crew may videotape a small portion o f a song at a concert to include in a news report of that concert.

Protecting Digital Content To p r o t e c t t h e i r rights, s o m e creators o f digital c o n t e n t

Another

rights-protection t o o l

used w i t h

digital

(such as a r t , music, p h o t o g r a p h s , a n d movies) use digital

c o n t e n t is d i g i t a l r i g h t s m a n a g e m e n t ( D R M ) s o f t w a r e ,

w a t e r m a r k s — a subtle a l t e r a t i o n o f digital c o n t e n t t h a t

w h i c h is used t o c o n t r o l t h e use o f a w o r k . F o r i n s t a n c e ,

is n o t n o t i c e a b l e w h e n t h e w o r k is v i e w e d o r p l a y e d b u t

DRM

t h a t i d e n t i f i e s t h e c o p y r i g h t holder. F o r instance, t h e

(called e n t e r p r i s e rights m a n a g e m e n t )

used

in c o n j u n c t i o n

with

business

documents

can protect a

d i g i t a l w a t e r m a r k f o r a n i m a g e m i g h t consist o f slight

sensitive business d o c u m e n t b y c o n t r o l l i n g

c h a n g e s t o t h e brightness o f a specific p a t t e r n o f pixels

t h a t d o c u m e n t , such as by limiting w h o c a n v i e w , p r i n t ,

t h a t a r e i m p e r c e p t i b l e t o p e o p l e b u t a r e easily r e a d by

o r c o p y it. D R M used w i t h d i g i t a l c o n t e n t , s u c h a s m o v -

usage of

s o f t w a r e . Digital w a t e r m a r k s c a n b e a d d e d t o images,

ies a n d music, d o w n l o a d e d via t h e I n t e r n e t c a n c o n t r o l

music, v i d e o , T V shows, a n d o t h e r digital c o n t e n t . T h e

w h e t h e r t h e d o w n l o a d e d file c a n b e c o p i e d t o a n o t h e r

p u r p o s e o f digital w a t e r m a r k i n g is t o g i v e digital c o n t e n t

d e v i c e , as w e l l as m a k e a v i d e o - o n - d e m a n d m o v i e u n -

a u n i q u e i d e n t i t y t h a t remains intact e v e n if t h e w o r k is

v i e w a b l e a f t e r t h e r e n t a l p e r i o d expires.

c o p i e d , e d i t e d , compressed, o r o t h e r w i s e m a n i p u l a t e d . 7

"~

'

•

A t r a d e m a r k is a word, phrase, symbol, or design (or a c o m b i n a t i o n o f w o r d s , phrases, symbols, o r designs) that identifies o n e product o r service f r o m another. T r a d e m a r k s that arc claimed but nor registered with the

A**"*

»

^^J-nT

U. S. Patent a n d T r a d e m a r k Office ( U S P T O ) can use the m a r k ™ . T h e symbol ® is reserved

material t o ensure that the m a t e r i a l is used in b o t h a legal a n d a n ethical manner. S t u d e n t s , r e s e a r c h e r s , a u t h o r s , a n d o t h e r writers need t o b e especially

careful

w h e n using literary material as a r e s o u r c e f o r p a p e r s , articles, b o o k s , a n d so f o r t h , t o e n s u r e t h e m a t e r i a l is

al

used a p p r o p r i a t e l y a n d is properly c r e d i t e d t o t h e original author. T o present s o m e o n e else's w o r k as y o u r o w n

for registered trademarks. Trademarked words

is p l a g i a r i s m , w h i c h is a violation o f c o p y r i g h t l a w a n d

and p h r a s e s — s u c h as iPod®, Chicken M c N u g -

a n unethical a c t . It c a n also get y o u fired, as s o m e r e -

gets®, a n d W i n d o w s V i s t a ™ — a r e widely used

porters have f o u n d o u t after f a k i n g q u o t e s o r plagiariz-

today. T r a d e m a r k e d logos are also c o m m o n .

ing c o n t e n t f r o m o t h e r n e w s p a p e r s . E x a m p l e s o f a c t s

Businesses a n d individuals should be very careful

t h a t w o u l d n o r m a l l y be c o n s i d e r e d o r n o t c o n s i d e r e d

w h e n c o p y i n g , sharing, o r o t h e r w i s e using copyrighted

plagiaristic are s h o w n in E x h i b i t 1 - 2 0 .

E x h i b i t 1-20 Examples of what is and what is not plagiarism

Not plagiarism

Plagiarism A student including a few sentences or a few paragraphs

A student including a few sentences or a few paragraphs

written by another author in his term paper without crediting

written by another author in his term paper, either indenting

the original author.

the quotation or placing it inside quotation marks, and crediting the original author with a citation in the text or with a footnote or endnote.

A newspaper reporter changing a few words in a sentence or

A newspaper reporter paraphrasing a few sentences or para-

paragraph written by another author and including the revised

graphs written by another author without changing the meaning

text in an article without crediting the original author.

of the text, including the revised text in an article, and crediting the original author with a proper citation.

A student copying and pasting information from various online

A student copying and pasting information from various online

documents to create her research paper without crediting the

documents and using those quotes in her research paper either indented or enclosed in quotation marks with the proper

original authors.

P ^ is

citations for each author.

A teacher sharing a poem with a class, leading the class to

A teacher sharing a poem with a class, clearly identifying the poet.

believe the poem was his original work.

Chapter

I : Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

Ethics T h e t e r m ethics refers t o s t a n d a r d s o f m o r a l c o n d u c t .

w h e t h e r t o u p l o a d a p h o t o of y o u r f r i e n d t o Facebook

For e x a m p l e , t e l l i n g t h e t r u t h is a m a t t e r o f ethics. A n

w i t h o u t asking permission, or w h e t h e r t o post a rumor o n

u n e t h i c a l act is n o t a l w a y s i l l e g a l , b u t a n illegal a c t is

a campus gossip site. E m p l o y e e s m a y n e e d t o d e c i d e w h e t h e r t o print

usually v i e w e d as u n e t h i c a l by m o s t p e o p l e . For e x a m lying t o a f r i e n d is u n e t h i c a l b u t usually

t h e i r b i r t h d a y party invitations o n t h e o f f i c e color printer,

n o t i l l e g a l ; w h e r e a s p e r j u r i n g o n e s e l f in a c o u r t r o o m as

w h e t h e r t o correct t h e boss f o r g i v i n g t h e m credit f o r

a w i t n e s s is b o t h illegal a n d u n e t h i c a l .

a n o t h e r e m p l o y e e ' s idea, or w h e t h e r t o sneak a look a t

ple, purposely

Ethical beliefs c a n v a r y w i d e l y f r o m o n e i n d i v i d u a l

i n f o r m a t i o n t h a t t h e y c a n access b u t h a v e n o legitimate

t o a n o t h e r . E t h i c a l b e l i e f s m a y also v a r y b a s e d o n r e -

reason t o v i e w . IT e m p l o y e e s , in particular,

ligion, country, race, o r c u l t u r e . In a d d i t i o n , d i f f e r e n t

o f t e n f a c e this latter ethical d i l e m m a b e -

ethical standards can apply t o different areas of one's

cause t h e y typically h a v e b o t h access a n d

life. For e x a m p l e , p e r s o n a l ethics g u i d e a n individual's

t h e technical ability t o retrieve a w i d e

personal b e h a v i o r a n d business ethics g u i d e a n i n d i v i d -

variety o f personal a n d professional i n -

ual's w o r k p l a c e b e h a v i o r .

f o r m a t i o n a b o u t o t h e r e m p l o y e e s , such

Ethics w i t h respect t o t h e use of c o m p u t e r s a r e r e f e r r e d t o as c o m p u t e r ethics. C o m p u t e r ethics h a v e t a k e n

as t h e i r salary i n f o r m a t i o n , W e b s u r f i n g history, a n d personal e m a i l . Businesses also d e a l w i t h a v a r i e t y

o n m o r e significance in r e c e n t years because t h e prolife r a t i o n o f c o m p u t e r s in t h e h o m e a n d t h e w o r k p l a c e p r o -

of

vides m o r e o p p o r t u n i t i e s f o r unethical acts t h a n in t h e

normal

past. T h e I n t e r n e t also m a k e s it easy t o distribute infor-

determining

m a t i o n such as c o m p u t e r viruses, s p a m , a n d s p y w a r e t h a t

ers o n w h i c h a p a r t i c u l a r s o f t w a r e

m a n y p e o p l e w o u l d v i e w as u n e t h i c a l , as w e l l as t o dis-

program should be installed, t o

t r i b u t e copies of s o f t w a r e , movies, music, a n d o t h e r d i g i -

identifying

t a l c o n t e n t in a n illegal a n d , t h e r e f o r e , unethical manner.

employee

W h e t h e r a t h o m e , a t w o r k , o r a t school, ethical is-

ethical

issues in t h e c o u r s e o f

business how

activities—from many

comput-

h o w customer a n d information

be used, t o deciding

should business

sues crop up every day. For e x a m p l e , y o u m a y n e e d t o

practices. B u s i n e s s e t h i c s a r e

m a k e ethical decisions such as w h e t h e r t o accept a rela-

t h e standards of conduct that

tive's offer of a f r e e copy o f a d o w n l o a d e d song or movie,

g u i d e a business's policies, d e c i -

w h e t h e r t o h a v e a f r i e n d h e l p y o u t a k e a n online e x a m ,

sions, a n d a c t i o n s .

W i t h the widespread availability o f online articles

c a n usually tell when a p a p e r is c r e a t e d in this manner.

and fee-based online term p a p e r services, s o m e students

T h e r e are also online sources i n s t r u c t o r s can use to test

might be tempted t o create their papers by copying and

the originality o f student p a p e r s . M o s t colleges and uni-

pasting excerpts o f online c o n t e n t into their d o c u m e n t s

versities have strict c o n s e q u e n c e s f o r plagiarism, such

t o pass o f f as their original w o r k . B u t these students

as a u t o m a t i c a l l y failing the a s s i g n m e n t or course, or be-

should realize that this is p l a g i a r i s m , and

ing expelled f r o m the institution. As Internet-based pla-

instructors

giarism c o n t i n u e s t o e x p a n d t o y o u n g e r and younger students, m a n y middle s c h o o l s a n d high schools are de-

e t h i c s Overall standards of moral conduct.

veloping strict plagiarism policies as well.

c o m p u t e r e t h i c s Standards of moral conduct as they relate to computer use. b u s i n e s s e t h i c s Standards of moral conduct that guide a business's

Computers and Health

policies, decisions, and actions.

C o m m o n physical c o n d i t i o n s caused by c o m p u t e r use

r e p e t i t i v e stress i n j u r y (RSI) A type of injury, such as carpal

include eyestrain, blurred vision, fatigue,

tunnel syndrome, that is caused by performing the same physical

b a c k a c h e s , and wrist and finger pain. S o m e c o n d i t i o n s

movements over and over again.

are classified as r e p e t i t i v e stress i n j u r i e s ( R S I s ) , in which

headaches,

h a n d , wrist, shoulder, o r neck pain is c a u s e d by per-

Chapter

I : Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

Repetitive stress as well as other injuries related to the work environment are estimated to account for one-third of all serious workplace injuries.

gram. H a r d w a r e that is E N E R G Y

exceeds the m i n i m u m federal s t a n d a r d s for reduced energy c o n s u m p t i o n and can display the STAR

label. Eco-labels—environmental

The

high

cost

in

data

usage

center

has

made

puters key c o n c e r n s

mouse

businesses and

use has been associated with R S I s , although RSIs can

ENERGY STAR

• •

UNITED STATES EUROPEAN UNION

for

individu-

als. A recent EPA study

be caused by non-computer-related activities as well.

showed that servers and

movements

m a d e w h e n using a keyboard is c a r p a l t u n n e l s y n d r o m e ( C T S ) — a painful and crippling condition affecting the

data

centers

than

1.5

use

percent

more of

KOREA

BRAZIL

all

electricity generated in the U.S.,

hands and wrists. C T S occurs when the nerve in the tunnel

and

heat generation by c o m -

f o r m i n g the same physical m o v e m e n t s over and over

carpal

of

electricity and the recent

power consumption

finger

• * •

other countries as well.

increase

O n e R S I related to the repetitive

ENERGY

performance

c e r t i f i c a t i o n s — a r e used in

energy

again. F o r instance, extensive k e y b o a r d and

STAR-compliant

and that n u m b e r is expected t o

located on the underside o f the wrist is

GERMANY

double in the n e x t five years. T h e

c o m p r e s s e d . An R S I associated with typing on the tiny

average U.S. household spends

k e y b o a r d s and thumbpads c o m m o n l y found on mobile

an estimated $ 1 0 0 per year powering devices t h a t are

phones a n d m o b i l e devices is D e Q u e r v a i n ' s t e n d o n i t i s —

turned o f f o r in standby m o d e . Devices like c o m p u t -

a c o n d i t i o n in which the tendons on the t h u m b side o f

ers, h o m e electronics, and appliances t h a t d r a w p o w e r

the wrists are swollen and irritated. C o m p u t e r vision

when they are turned off are s o m e t i m e s called energy

s y n d r o m e ( C V S ) is a collection o f eye and vision p r o b -

vampires. Although computers have b e c o m e m o r e en-

lems, including eyestrain or eye fatigue, dry eyes, burn-

ergy efficient, they can still d r a w quite a bit o f p o w e r in

ing eyes, light sensitivity, and blurred vision. Extensive

standby and sleep m o d e s — p a r t i c u l a r l y w i t h

c o m p u t e r use c a n also lead to headaches and pain in the

a screen saver enabled.

shoulders, n e c k , o r b a c k . S o m e recent physical health c o n c e r n s center on heat. F o r i n s t a n c e , one study measured the peak temper-

b save on vampire power costs, unplug your devices whenenv* are not using them

ature on the underside of a typical n o t e b o o k c o m p u t e r at over 1 3 9 ° Fahrenheit. Consequently, m a n y portable c o m p u t e r m a n u f a c t u r e r s n o w w a r n against letting any part o f the c o m p u t e r touch your body, and a variety o f n o t e b o o k c o o l i n g stands are available t o place between the c o m p u t e r and your lap for those o c c a s i o n s when a better w o r k surface is not available.

c a r p a l t u n n e l s y n d r o m e (CTS) A painful and crippling

Environmental Concerns

condition affecting the hands and wrists that can be caused by computer use.

T h e increasing use o f c o m p u t e r s in our society has cre-

D e Q u e r v a i n ' s t e n d o n i t i s A condition in which the tendons on the

ated a variety o f environmental c o n c e r n s . T h e term

thumb side of the wrist are swollen and irritated.

g r e e n c o m p u t i n g refers to the use o f c o m p u t e r s in an environmentally

friendly

manner.

Minimizing

the

g r e e n c o m p u t i n g The use of computers in an environmentally friendly manner.

use o f natural resources, such as energy and paper, is o n e aspect o f green computing. T o encourage the de-

eco-label A certification, usually issued by a government agency,

velopment o f energy-saving devices, the U.S. D e p a r t ment

o f Energy

Agency

and the E n v i r o n m e n t a l

(EPA) developed the E N E R G Y

that identifies a device as meeting minimal environmental performance

Protection STAR

specifications.

pro-

Chapter

I : Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

O N THE JOB

Workspace Design E r g o n o m i c s is t h e science of f i t t i n g a w o r k e n v i r o n m e n t

chair h e i g h t has b e e n set. T h e m o n i t o r settings should b e

t o t h e p e o p l e w h o w o r k t h e r e . W i t h respect t o c o m p u t e r

a d j u s t e d t o m a k e t h e screen brightness m a t c h t h e bright-

use, it involves d e s i g n i n g a s a f e a n d e f f e c t i v e w o r k s p a c e ,

ness of t h e r o o m a n d t o h a v e a h i g h a m o u n t of contrast;

w h i c h includes p r o p e r l y a d j u s t i n g f u r n i t u r e a n d h a r d w a r e

t h e screen should also b e periodically w i p e d clean of dust.

a n d using e r g o n o m i c h a r d w a r e w h e n n e e d e d . A p r o p e r

S o m e setups a l l o w t h e user t o raise t h e w o r k s p a c e in o r -

w o r k e n v i r o n m e n t — u s e d in c o n j u n c t i o n w i t h g o o d user

der to w o r k while standing, w h e n desired.

habits a n d p r o c e d u r e s — c a n p r e v e n t m a n y physical p r o b -

A n o t e b o o k s t a n d c a n also b e u s e d t o c o n n e c t p e -

lems c a u s e d by c o m p u t e r use. P r o p e r p l a c e m e n t a n d a d -

r i p h e r a l devices t o a p o r t a b l e c o m p u t e r , b u t is d e s i g n e d

j u s t m e n t of f u r n i t u r e is a g o o d p l a c e t o start w h e n e v a l u -

p r i m a r i l y t o e l e v a t e t h e display s c r e e n o f a n o t e b o o k or

a t i n g a w o r k s p a c e f r o m a n e r g o n o m i c perspective.

tablet computer to t h e proper height.

T h e desk s h o u l d b e p l a c e d w h e r e t h e sun a n d o t h e r

In a d d i t i o n t o w o r k s p a c e d e v i c e s , a v a r i e t y of e r g o -

sources of light c a n n o t shine directly o n t o t h e screen or

n o m i c h a r d w a r e c a n b e used t o h e l p users a v o i d or a l -

into t h e user's eyes. T h e m o n i t o r s h o u l d b e placed directly

l e v i a t e physical p r o b l e m s associated w i t h c o m p u t e r use.

in f r o n t of t h e user a b o u t a n arm's l e n g t h a w a y , a n d t h e

These include:

t o p of t h e screen s h o u l d b e n o m o r e t h a n 3 inches a b o v e t h e user's eyes o n c e t h e user's chair is a d j u s t e d . T h e desk chair should b e a d j u s t e d so t h a t t h e k e y b o a r d is a t , or slightly b e l o w , t h e h e i g h t a t w h i c h t h e user's f o r e a r m s a r e

• E r g o n o m i c k e y b o a r d s d e s i g n e d t o lessen t h e strain o n t h e hands a n d wrist. • Trackballs t h a t a r e essentially u p s i d e - d o w n mice t h a t c a n b e m o r e c o m f o r t a b l e t o use t h a n a m o u s e .

horizontal t o t h e f l o o r ( t h e r e a r e also special e r g o n o m i c chairs t h a t c a n b e used). A f o o t r e s t should b e used, if n e e d e d , t o k e e p t h e user's f e e t f l a t o n t h e f l o o r a f t e r t h e

• D o c u m e n t holders t o a l l o w t h e user t o see b o t h t h e d o c u m e n t a n d t h e m o n i t o r w i t h o u t t u r n i n g his or her h e a d . • A n t i g l a r e screens t h a t c o v e r t h e m o n i t o r

TILT-AND-SWIVEL MONITOR Adjusts for a comfortable viewing angle; top of screen should be no higher than 3 inches above the Y^-—I user's eyes.

DOCUMENT HOLDER Keeps documents close to the monitor so the user does not have to turn his or her head.

PROPER USER POSITION Sit straight with shoulders back, about 24 inches away from the monitor; keep forearms, wrists, and hands straight; keep forearms and / thighs parallel to the floor.

a n d lessen g l a r e a n d r e s u l t i n g eyestrain. • Keyboard drawers that

lower the

key-

b o a r d a n d e n a b l e t h e user t o k e e p his or her f o r e a r m s p a r a l l e l t o t h e floor. • Wrist

supports t o

keep

wrists

straight

w h i l e using t h e m o u s e or k e y b o a r d a n d t o support t h e wrists a n d forearms w h e n n o t using t h o s e d e v i c e s .

ADJUSTABLE TABLE/DESK Optimal height is between 25 and 29 inches tall. Keyboard and mouse should be at or just below elbow heightuse a keyboard drawer if needed.

'

ADJUSTABLE CHAIR .Height is adjustable and has support for the lower back.

gloves

designed

to

prevent

a n d relieve RSIs by s u p p o r t i n g t h e w r i s t a n d t h u m b w h i l e a l l o w i n g t h e full use of hands. T h e s e devices c a n h e l p users t o a v o i d a n d reduce discomfort w h i l e w o r k i n g on a computer. In a d d i t i o n , c o m p u t e r users should t a k e f r e q u e n t b r e a k s in t y p i n g , use g o o d p o s t u r e , stretch f r o m t i m e t o t i m e , a n d p e riodically refocus t h e i r e y e s o n a d i s t a n t o b ject f o r a m i n u t e or so.

e r g o n o m i c s The science of fitting a work environment to the people who work there.

Chapter

• Computer

1:

Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

T h e estimated number of pages generated by computer printers worldwide is almost one-half billion a year—an amount that would stack more than 2 5 , 0 0 0 miles high, 'fflflwffi1//

In addition t o m o r e energy-efficient h a r d w a r e , alternate p o w e r sources are being developed for greener c o m p u t i n g . F o r instance, solar p o w e r is a growing alternative for powering electronic devices, including c o m p u t e r s and mobile phones. W i t h solar power, solar panels converts sunlight into electricity, which is then stored in a battery. Improvements in solar technology are m a k i n g its use increasingly m o r e feasible and economical. A n o t h e r environmental c o n c e r n is the a m o u n t o f

' / / / / / / / / / / / /

t r a s h — a n d sometimes t o x i c t r a s h — g e n e r a t e d by c o m puter use. M o s t obvious is the extensive use of paper

up in landfills and in countries such as C h i n a , India,

for printing. In addition to paper-based trash, c o m -

and Nigeria that have lower recycling c o s t s , c h e a p e r

puting refuse includes used toner cartridges, obsolete

labor, and m o r e l a x environmental s t a n d a r d s t h a n the

or b r o k e n h a r d w a r e , and discarded C D s , D V D s , and

United States. M u c h of

other storage media. M u c h o f this e-trash (also called

the e-trash exported to

e-waste) ends up in landfills. Compounding

the

problem

of

the

amount

these countries is simply

of

dumped into fields and

e-trash generated is that computers, mobile phones, and

other informal dumping

related h a r d w a r e contain a variety o f t o x i c and hazard-

areas. U n a w a r e

ous materials. F o r instance, the average C R T m o n i t o r

of

the

potential danger o f these

alone c o n t a i n s a b o u t eight pounds o f lead, and a desk-

components,

top c o m p u t e r m a y contain up to 7 0 0 different chemi-

rural

vil-

lagers often sort through

cal elements and c o m p o u n d s , m a n y o f which (such as

and dismantle discarded

arsenic, lead, mercury, and c a d m i u m ) are hazardous

electronics

and expensive t o dispose of properly.

parts

look-

ing for precious metals

A g l o b a l c o n c e r n regarding e-trash is where it all

and

eventually ends up. According to m o s t estimates, at

other

sources

of

revenue—potentially en-

least 7 0 % o f all discarded c o m p u t e r equipment ends

dangering their health as well as polluting nearby rivers, p o n d s , and other water

Going Green

sources.

pounding

the

Com-

problem,

In a d d i t i o n t o b e i n g m o r e e n e r g y e f f i c i e n t , c o m -

the remaining waste is

p u t e r s t o d a y a r e b e i n g built t o r u n q u i e t e r a n d

often burned, generating huge c l o u d s o f potentially

cooler, a n d t h e y a r e using m o r e r e c y c l a b l e h a r d -

toxic smoke.

w a r e and packaging. Many computer turers of

are

also

reducing

toxic chemicals such mercury,

and

lead,

manufac-

Recycling computer equipment is difficult because

amount

of the materials being used. However, proper disposal

as c a d m i u m ,

is essential to avoid pollution and health hazards. Some

the

being

used

in

recycling centers will accept c o m p u t e r equipment, but

United

many charge a fee for this service. M a n y c o m p u t e r m a n -

manufacturers

ufacturers have recycling programs that will accept o b -

are beginning to produce more

solete or broken computer equipment from consumers.

environmentally friendly c o m -

Expired toner cartridges and ink cartridges can some-

p o n e n t s , such as system units

times be returned to the manufacturer or exchanged

m a d e f r o m r e c y c l a b l e plastic, n o n -

when ordering new cartridges; the cartridges are then

toxic f l a m e - r e t a r d a n t c o a t i n g s , a n d lead-

refilled and resold. Cartridges that c a n n o t be refilled can

p e r s o n a l c o m p u t e r s . In t h e States,

free

solder

on

the

computer

motherboard.

Recycling

p r o g r a m s t o reuse a n d s a l v a g e c o m p o n e n t s a r e

e-trash Electronic trash or waste, such as discarded computer

becoming more available.

components.

Chapter

1 : Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

ompletely remove data stored on computing equipment before disposal so someone else cannot recover it from that devi

1 3 . Describe the three most c o m m o n types of Internet addresses. 1 4 . W h a t are the three parts o f an email address? 1 5 . W h a t are intellectual property rights? 1 6 . Define computer

ethics.

1 7 . W h y are repetitive stress injuries associated with computer use? be sent to a recycling facility. In addition to helping to re-

1 8 . H o w does ergonomics relate to c o m p u t e r use?

duce e-trash in landfills, using refilled or recycled printer cartridges saves the consumer money because they are less expensive than new cartridges. Other

computer

components—such as C D s , D V D s , U S B flash drives, and |

Practice It

hard drives—can also be recycled through some organizations, such as GreenDisk, that reuse salvageable items

Practice It 1-1

and recycle the rest.

A c o m p u t e r along with the Internet and World Wide

In lieu o f recycling, older equipment that is still functioning can be used for alternate purposes, such as

W e b are handy tools that you c a n use t o research topics

for a child's computer, a personal W e b server, or a D V R .

covered in this b o o k , complete projects, and perform

O r it can be donated to schools and nonprofit groups.

the online activities available at the book's Web site

Some organizations accept and repair donated equip-

that are designed to enhance y o u r learning and under-

ment and then distribute it to disadvantaged groups or

standing of the content covered in this b o o k . Use an

other individuals in need o f the hardware.

Internet-enabled c o m p u t e r t o access the C M P T R W e b site located at login.cengagebrain.com. 1.

W h a t types o f information and activities are available on the C M P T R W e b site?

Quiz Yourself

2.

Select an activity and use y o u r mouse to click its link, and then explore the activity. Repeat the

1.

Define

2.

W h a t are the four primary operations o f a

computer.

process to explore at least t w o m o r e activities. 3.

computer? 3.

in enhancing your learning experience.

Describe the difference between data and

4.

information. 4.

Evaluate your experience using the C M P T R Web site.

W h a t is the difference between hardware and

5.

software?

Prepare a one-page s u m m a r y that answers these questions, and then submit it to your instructor.

5.

Explain cloud

6.

List the six general types o f computers.

7.

W h a t is the difference between a desktop c o m -

computing.

Practice It 1-2 A great deal of obsolete c o m p u t e r equipment eventually ends up in a landfill, even though there may be

puter and a portable c o m p u t e r ? 8.

Describe

9.

W h a t are supercomputers?

alternative actions that could be taken instead.

virtualization.

1.

a. a 10-year-old c o m p u t e r that is n o longer functioning

1 1 . W h a t is the largest and m o s t well-known c o m puter n e t w o r k in the world?

b. a four-year-old c o m p u t e r that still w o r k s , but is t o o slow to meet your needs

1 2 . Explain the difference between the Internet and the World W i d e W e b .

1 : Introduction

Research w h a t options are available to discard the following:

1 0 . W h a t is a n e t w o r k ?

'.hapter

Evaluate the usefulness o f the available resources

c. a used-up toner cartridge for a laser printer

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

2.

3.

W h i c h local schools and charitable organizations,

right from the beginning. O t h e r s , such as using an ergo-

if any, w o u l d accept any of these items?

n o m i c k e y b o a r d or a wrist rest, m a y t a k e a little getting used t o .

C h e c k with at least one c o m p u t e r manufacturer and one recycling c o m p a n y to see if they would

4.

1.

e q u i p m e n t — s u c h as adjustable office c h a i r s , desks

dure a n d c o s t be?

with k e y b o a r d drawers, e r g o n o m i c k e y b o a r d s , o r

C h e c k with at least one vendor selling refilled toner

n o t e b o o k s t a n d s — o n display t h a t y o u c a n try o u t .

cartridges t o see if it buys old cartridges or requires

2.

a trade-in with an order. If the vendor purchases

Test each piece, adjusting it as needed, a n d evaluate h o w c o m f o r t a b l e it seems.

old cartridges, h o w much will it pay per cartridge? 5.

G o to a local store that has s o m e e r g o n o m i c

accept the computers. If so, w h a t would the proce-

3.

Evaluate your usual c o m p u t e r w o r k s p a c e . Are

Prepare a one-page summary that describes your

there any adjustments you should m a k e ? Is there

findings,

any new equipment you w o u l d need t o acquire t o

answers these questions, and presents

your r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s , and then submit it to your

m a k e your w o r k s p a c e setup m o r e c o m f o r t a b l e ?

instructor.

Create a list o f any changes you c o u l d m a k e for free, as well as a list of items you w o u l d need to purchase and the estimated c o s t . W h i c h changes and items do you think w o u l d m o s t increase your

On Your Own

comfort? Prepare a one-page s u m m a r y t h a t describes your

On Your Own 1-1

findings and answers these q u e s t i o n s , a n d then

Some aspects o f an ergonomic w o r k s p a c e , such as a

submit it to your instructor.

c o m f o r t a b l e chair and nonglaring light, may feel good

ADDITIONAL STUDYTOOLS

Chapter 7 IN THE BOOK

ONLINE

^

Complete end-of-chapter exercises

^

Complete additional end-of-chapter exercises

^

Study tear-out Chapter Review Card

^

Take practice quiz to prepare for tests

^

Review key term flash cards (online, printable, and audio)

}• Play "Beat the Clock" and "Memory" to quiz yourself ^

Watch the videos "Searching the Web on Your iPhone" and "Climate Savers Computing Initiative"

Chapter

1 : Introduction

to

Computers

and

the

Internet

Rfl

Computer Hardware

Learning Objectives

Introduction

After studying the material in this chapter, you will be able to:

W h e n most people think o f c o m p u t e r s , images o f h a r d w a r e usually

L O 2 .1 Understand how data is represented to a computer

fill their minds. H a r d w a r e includes the system unit, k e y b o a r d , m o u s e , monitor, and all the o t h e r pieces o f equipment that m a k e up a c o m puter system. T h i s c h a p t e r describes the hardware located inside the system unit, which is the m a i n b o x o f the c o m p u t e r and where m o s t o f the w o r k o f a c o m p u t e r is p e r f o r m e d . It discusses the different types o f devices t h a t c a n be used for data storage. It also covers the wide variety o f h a r d w a r e t h a t can be used for input and output. Keep in mind that h a r d w a r e needs instructions from software in order to function. H a r d w a r e w i t h o u t s o f t w a r e is like a car w i t h o u t a driver o r a canvas and p a i n t b r u s h w i t h o u t an artist. S o f t w a r e is discussed in

L O 2 . 2 Identify the parts inside the system unit LO2.3

Explain how the CPU works

L 0 2 . Z L Describe different types of storage systems Identify and describe common input devices

L O 2 . 6 Identify and describe common output devices

the n e x t chapter.

i .02., Digital Data Representation

V:

irtually all c o m p u t e r s t o d a y are digital c o m p u t e r s . M o s t digital c o m p u t e r s are binary

computers, which c a n understand only two states, represented by the digits 0 and 1 , and usually thought o f as off and on. C o n s e -

Exhibit 2-1 Ways of representing 0 and 1

quently, all data processed by a binary c o m puter must be in binary f o r m . T h e Os and I s used t o represent data can be represented

Open = 0 (off)

in a variety of ways, such as with an open o r closed circuit, the absence or presence of

Closed = 1 (on)

electronic

current,

different types o f

two

magnetic

alignment on a storage m e -

CIRCUIT

dium, and so on, as shown in Exhibit 2 - 1 .

Chapter

2:

Computer

Hardware

/

Hardware surrounds us in all areas of our lives— from computers and cellphones to cameras, digital music/media players, and gaming devices to barcode readers, ATMs, and toll booths.

R e g a r d l e s s o f their physical r e p r e s e n t a t i o n s , these Os a n d I s are c o m m o n l y referred t o as bits, a c o m p u t i n g term derived f r o m the phrase digits.

binary

A b i t is the smallest unit o f data that a binary c o m p u t e r c a n recognize.

T h e input y o u enter via a k e y b o a r d , the s o f t w a r e p r o g r a m y o u use t o play y o u r m u s i c c o l l e c t i o n , the term paper stored o n y o u r computer, and t h e digital p h o t o s located on your m o b i l e p h o n e are all just g r o u p s o f bits. A bit by itself typically represents only a f r a c t i o n o f a piece o f d a t a . Eight bits g r o u p e d t o g e t h e r

bit The smallest unit of data that a binary computer can recognize.

are collectively referred t o as a b y t e . A n a m e d c o l l e c t i o n

b y t e Eight bits grouped together.

o f bytes t h a t represent s o m e t h i n g such as a written d o c u -

file A named collection of bytes that represent

m e n t , a c o m p u t e r p r o g r a m , a digital p h o t o , a s o n g , o r virtually a n y o t h e r type o f data is called a file. Because

virtually any type of data.

Chapter

2:

Computer

Hardware

The computer translates ata into binary os and [s, rocesses it, and then transl it back to output the results ii form we can understand

LO22

Inside the System Unit

T

he s y s t e m unit is the m a i n case o f a computer. It

houses the processing h a r d w a r e for that c o m -

puter, as well as a few other devices, such as storage devices, the power supply, and cooling fans. T h e system unit for a desktop c o m p u t e r is often a rectangular b o x , although other shapes and sizes are available. T h e

the numbers o f bytes needed t o represent a file c a n

inside o f a system unit for a typical desktop computer

be in the thousands o r millions o f bytes, prefixes are

system is shown in E x h i b i t 2 - 2 .

c o m m o n l y used with the t e r m byte

to represent larger

a m o u n t s of data.

The Motherboard A circuit b o a r d is a thin b o a r d c o n t a i n i n g c o m p u t e r chips

A Bit about Bytes

and

other

electronic

components.

Computer

c h i p s are very small pieces o f silicon o r other semicon-

T h e f o l l o w i n g t e r m s s h o w h o w prefixes a r e c o m -

ducting material that c o n t a i n integrated circuits ( I C s ) ,

b i n e d w i t h t h e t e r m byte

which are collections o f e l e c t r o n i c circuits containing

t o describe d a t a t h a t is

m i c r o s c o p i c p a t h w a y s a l o n g w h i c h electrical current

large t h a n a byte: ^

1 k i l o b y t e ( K B ) is e q u a l t o 1,024 bytes, b u t is usually t h o u g h t o f as a p p r o x i m a t e l y

1,000

bytes. 1 m e g a b y t e ( M B ) is a b o u t 1 million bytes.

^

1 g i g a b y t e ( G B ) is a b o u t 1 billion bytes.

^

1 t e r a b y t e ( T B ) is a b o u t 1 trillion bytes.

^

1 p e t a b y t e ( P B ) is a b o u t 1,000

^

7 0

bytes).

(2

All devices used with a c o m p u t e r need to be c o n nected via a wired or wireless c o n n e c t i o n to the m o t h e r b o a r d . Typically, e x t e r n a l devices such as m o n i t o r s , k e y b o a r d s , m i c e , and printers c o n n e c t to the motherb o a r d by plugging into a p o r t . A p o r t is a special c o n n e c t o r accessible through the e x t e r i o r o f the system device. T h e port is either built i n t o the m o t h e r b o a r d or created with an e x p a n s i o n c a r d inserted into an

exabytes

bytes).

1 y o t t a b y t e ( Y B ) is a b o u t 1,000 8 0

main circuit b o a r d inside the system unit is called the

unit case that is used to c o n n e c t an external h a r d w a r e petabytes

1 z e t t a b y t e ( Z B ) is a b o u t 1,000 (2

^

6 0

terabytes

bytes).

1 e x a b y t e ( E B ) is a b o u t 1,000 (2

^

5 0

trolling the flow o f electrons a l o n g the pathways. T h e motherboard.

^

(2

c a n travel, and transistors, w h i c h are switches c o n -

zettabytes

bytes).

e x p a n s i o n slot on the m o t h e r b o a r d . Wireless external devices typically use a transceiver that plugs into a p o r t on the c o m p u t e r t o t r a n s m i t data between the wireless device and the m o t h e r b o a r d or they use wireless n e t w o r k i n g technology, such as Bluetooth, built into the m o t h e r b o a r d .

s y s t e m u n i t The main case of a computer. circuit b o a r d A thin board containing computer chips and other electronic components. c o m p u t e r c h i p A very small piece of silicon or other semiconducting material that contains integrated circuits (ICs) and transistors. m o t h e r b o a r d The main circuit board inside the system unit. p o r t A connector on the exterior of the system unit case that is used to connect an external hardware device.

Chapter

2:

Computer

The system unit for portable computers and mobile devices is usually combined with the screen to form a single piece of hardware.

Hardware

A\\\\\\\\\\

E x h i b i t 2-2

Inside a typical system unit CPU Performs the calculations and does the comparisons needed for processing, as well as controls the other parts of the computer system.

EXPANSION CARD

Connects peripheral devices or adds new capabilities to a computer.

POWER SUPPLY Converts standard electrical power into a form the computer can use.

FAN Cools the CPU.

HARD DRIVE Stores data and programs; the principal storage device for most computers. DRIVE B A Y S Hold storage devices, such as the DVD and hard drives shown here.

EXPANSION SLOTS Connect expansion cards to the mother board to add addi tional capabilities.

DVD DRIVE Accesses data stored on CDs or DVDs.

MOTHERBOARD Connects all compo nents of the computer system; the computer's main circuit board. M E M O R Y (RAM) MODULES Store data temporarily while you are working with it.

FLASH MEMORY CARD READER Accesses data stored on flash memory cards. U S B PORTS Connect USB devices to the computer.

M E M O R Y SLOTS Connect memory modules to the motherboard.

The Power Supply T h e p o w e r supply inside a d e s k t o p c o m p u t e r c o n n e c t s t o the m o t h e r b o a r d t o deliver electricity t o the c o m puter. P o r t a b l e c o m p u t e r s a l m o s t always c o n t a i n a rec h a r g e a b l e b a t t e r y p a c k to p o w e r the c o m p u t e r w h e n it is n o t c o n n e c t e d t o a p o w e r outlet, as well as an exter-

being generated worldwide from discarded mobile phones and other electronics.

nal p o w e r supply adapter t h a t c o n n e c t s the c o m p u t e r t o a p o w e r o u t l e t t o recharge the battery w h e n needed.

Nonremovable Batteries O n e issue w i t h n e w e r portable computers a n d m o -

The CPU T h e c e n t r a l p r o c e s s i n g u n i t ( C P U o r p r o c e s s o r ) is a c o m puter chip t h a t p e r f o r m s the c a l c u l a t i o n s a n d c o m p a r i sons needed for processing; it a l s o c o n t r o l s the c o m p u t er's o p e r a t i o n s . T h e C P U is the m a i n p r o c e s s i n g device

bile devices is t h e g r o w i n g use of n o n r e m o v a b l e b a t -

f o r a c o m p u t e r and is often c o n s i d e r e d the " b r a i n " o f

teries. These batteries m a k e t h e devices lighter a n d

the c o m p u t e r . T h e C P U consists o f a variety o f c i r c u i t r y

a r e supposed t o last f o r t h e typical life of t h e device.

and c o m p o n e n t s t h a t are p a c k a g e d t o g e t h e r a n d

are

However, t h e y a r e m o r e difficult a n d expensive t o r e place if t h e y fail. A n d , o f t e n it is not w o r t h t h e t r o u b l e a n d expense t o replace t h e m in mobile devices such as mobile

phones a n d

portable digital media players.

c e n t r a l p r o c e s s i n g u n i t ( C P U or p r o c e s s o r ) The chip located on the motherboard of a computer that performs the processing for a computer.

Chapter

2:

Computer

Hardware

connected directly to the m o t h e r b o a r d . M o s t personal computers today use C P U s m a n u f a c t u r e d by Intel or Advanced M i c r o Devices ( A M D ) . S o m e examples o f their processors are s h o w n in E x h i b i t 2 - 3 .

E x h i b i t 2-3

Examples of CPUs

1% O 5

M a n y CPUs today are

IS €

multi-core

E

9 3

CPUs;

that

is,

C P U s that contain the processing c o m p o n e n t s or cores of

multiple

independent

processors in a single C P U . For

Shared Level 3 cache memory

example,

C P U s c o n t a i n two cores and quad-core

DESKTOP PROCESSORS Typically have 2 to 4 cores and are designed for performance.

dual-core

SERVER AND WORKSTATION PROCESSORS Typically have at least 4 cores and are designed for very high performance.

CPUs

contain

four c o r e s . Multi-core CPUs a l l o w computers to w o r k simultaneously on more than one task at a time, such as burning a D V D while surfing the W e b , as well as t o w o r k faster within a single application if the software is

§ <S

© "I C

designed to take advantage o f multiple cores.

!/)

O

II

1«l

Projects

^

OB

0

6 8MB

09-04-01 22 47

•Ml for Portland

0

368 KB

0943-31 1006

0

23MB

0943-260649

t ,

174MB

0943-23 20 20

•

6 9 MB

09-03-24 11 97

W 5 KB

09-03-301441

121KB

0943-301906

1

a Broadway TIC

»

• immm. 344 USa** M m Abu Rati EstJU 94412 Cornp*

0

Bfj

CMy Board MbwIM

0

349KB

0944461100

iH

932 Cortland Ava C23 Proposal

1

96 KB

0943-30 14 97

0*

11*^*^ ?«* 1

a Quattiun' A*k « hara.

livered on demand via the W e b t o wherever the user is at the m o m e n t , provided he or she has an Internet connection (and has paid t o use the software if a payment is required). Also referred t o as Software as a Service (SaaS) and c l o u d w a r e , the use o f W e b - b a s e d software is growing rapidly. In fact, research firm G a r t n e r predicts that 2 5 percent o f n e w business software will be delivered via the W e b by 2 0 1 1 , up from 5 percent o f new software purchases in 2 0 0 6 . Typically, documents using W e b - b a s e d software are stored online.

D a * . i . W K»

^

See E x h i b i t 3 - 1 6 . A W e b - b a s e d software program is de-

created

«*

09-03-3014 30

0 2212 Kannady Court

Opart Houm print MtMWto

An ..... s,

£ 5J* •AFT* mfJGm

nm

.^

»v.

W E B DATABASE APPLICATIONS This application allows you to retrieve property information, such as home values and homes for sale.

LO35 Application Software for Business

S

o m e t i m e s , related s o f t w a r e p r o g r a m s (such as a g r o u p o f g r a p h i c s p r o g r a m s , utility p r o g r a m s , o r

office-related s o f t w a r e ) are sold bundled together as a s o f t w a r e s u i t e . Businesses a n d individuals often use office suites, s o m e t i m e s called p r o d u c t i v i t y s o f t w a r e suites, t o p r o d u c e written d o c u m e n t s . Typically, office suites c o n t a i n the f o l l o w i n g p r o g r a m s , and m a n y also c o n t a i n a d d i t i o n a l productivity t o o l s — s u c h as a c a l -

s o f t w a r e s u i t e Related software programs (such as a group of graphics programs, utility programs, or office-related

endar, a messaging p r o g r a m , o r c o l l a b o r a t i o n t o o l s : ^

W o r d p r o c e s s i n g s o f t w a r e — a l l o w s users t o create and edit c o m p l e x t e x t - b a s e d d o c u m e n t s t h a t

software) that are sold bundled together.

can also include images and o t h e r c o n t e n t .

Chapter

3: Computer

Software

Using software instead of paper and pencil to create a document means that you do not have to recreate the entire document w you want

terial, and reports. At its most basic level, w o r d processing is used to do what was done on a typewriter before computers were commonplace. M a n y documents created with word processing software also include c o n t e n t that was not possible to create using a typewriter, such as photos, drawn objects, clip art images, hyperlinks, video clips, and text in a variety of sizes and appearances. Like any document created with software instead o f paper and pencil, word processing documents can be retrieved, modified, and printed as many times as needed. T h e m o s t

^

S p r e a d s h e e t s o f t w a r e — p r o v i d e s users with a c o n v e n i e n t means of creating d o c u m e n t s c o n t a i n ing c o m p l e x mathematical c a l c u l a t i o n s .

^

D a t a b a s e s o f t w a r e — a l l o w s users t o store and organize vast amounts o f data and retrieve specific i n f o r m a t i o n when needed.

^

frequently used word processing programs are M i c r o s o f t W o r d , Corel WordPerfect, and Apple Pages. W o r d processing programs typically include

im-

proved c o l l a b o r a t i o n , security, and r i g h t s - m a n a g e m e n t tools (tools used t o protect original c o n t e n t f r o m misuse by o t h e r s ) . W o r d processing p r o g r a m s also typically include a variety o f Web-related t o o l s , as well as s u p p o r t

P r e s e n t a t i o n g r a p h i c s s o f t w a r e — a l l o w s users

for speech and pen input. Web-related features include

t o c r e a t e visual presentations t o convey i n f o r m a -

the ability t o send a document as an email message via

tion m o r e easily to others.

the w o r d processing p r o g r a m , the inclusion o f hyperlinks in d o c u m e n t s , and the ability t o c r e a t e o r m o d i f y

O n e o f the m o s t widely used office software

suites is M i c r o s o f t

W e b pages or blogs. T h e latest versions o f O f f i c e also

Office.

include the ability to c o l l a b o r a t e with o t h e r s o n l i n e .

T h e latest version is M i c r o s o f t Office 2010.

Similar

from

Corel

suites

are

available

(WordPerfect

Spreadsheet Concepts

Office)

and Apple ( i W o r k ) ; a free alterna-

A n o t h e r widely used application p r o g r a m is spread-

tive office suite is O p e n O f f i c e . o r g .

sheet s o f t w a r e . S p r e a d s h e e t s o f t w a r e is the type o f a p -

M a n y office suites are available in

plication software used to create c o m p u t e r i z e d spread-

a variety o f versions, such as a home

or

contains

student fewer

version

that

programs

than

sheets. A s p r e a d s h e e t is a group o f values a n d o t h e r data organized into rows and c o l u m n s , similar t o the ruled paper worksheets traditionally used by

a professional version. N o t all

keepers and a c c o u n t a n t s . M o s t spreadsheets

s o f t w a r e suites are available for

formulas that are used to c o m p u t e c a l c u l a t i o n s based

all o p e r a t i n g systems, however.

on data entered into the spreadsheet.

F o r e x a m p l e , M i c r o s o f t Office is

In spreadsheets created with spreadsheet s o f t w a r e ,

available for b o t h W i n d o w s and Mac

OS

computers;

iWork

is

available only for M a c O S c o m p u t ers; and O p e n O f f i c e . o r g is available for W i n d o w s , L i n u x , and M a c computers.

OpenOffice.org

available in m o r e than 3 0

is

bookinclude

OS also

v V

different

languages.

all formula results are updated a u t o m a t i c a l l y

when-

ever any changes are made to the d a t a . Consequently, n o manual computations are required, which increases accuracy. In addition, the a u t o m a t i c recalculation o f formulas allows individuals to modify spreadsheet data as

w o r d p r o c e s s i n g The use of a computer and word processing software to create, edit, save, and print written documents.

Word Processing Concepts

s p r e a d s h e e t s o f t w a r e The type of application software used to

Virtually all formal writing today is performed using a

create computerized spreadsheets.

word processing program. W o r d processing refers to using

s p r e a d s h e e t A group of values and other data organized into rows

a computer and word processing software to create, edit, save, and print written documents, such as letters, con-

and columns, similar to the ruled paper worksheets traditionally used by bookkeepers and accountants.

tracts, manuscripts, newsletters, invoices, marketing ma-

Chapter

3: Computer

Software

often as necessary either t o create n e w spreadsheets o r t o

o f program used t o create, maintain, and organize data

experiment with various possible scenarios (called what-

in a database, as well as to retrieve information from the

if analysis) to help make business decisions. Spreadsheet

database. T h e most c o m m o n l y used relational database

software typically includes a variety o f data analysis

management systems include M i c r o s o f t Access, Oracle

tools, as well as the ability t o generate charts. T h e most

D a t a b a s e , and I B M D B 2 .

widely used spreadsheet programs today are M i c r o s o f t

Databases are often used o n the W e b . For instance,

Excel, Corel Q u a t t r o P r o , and Apple N u m b e r s — a g a i n ,

many W e b sites use one or more databases to keep track

all are part o f their respective software suites. Spread-

of inventory; to allow searching for people, documents,

sheet software is c o m m o n l y used by a variety o f busi-

or other information; and t o place real-time orders. In

nesses and employees, including C E O s , managers, assis-

fact, any time you type keywords in a search b o x on a

tants, analysts, and sales representatives.

search site or hunt for a product o n a retail store's W e b

M o s t spreadsheet p r o g r a m s have built-in W e b c a -

site using its search feature, you are using a Web database.

pabilities. Although they are used less c o m m o n l y t o create W e b pages, m a n y spreadsheet programs include the option t o save the current w o r k s h e e t as a W e b page,

Presentation Graphics Concepts

and insert hyperlinks into w o r k s h e e t cells. M i c r o s o f t

If you try t o explain t o others w h a t you look like, it may

Excel includes the ability t o c o l l a b o r a t e online, as well

take several minutes. S h o w t h e m a c o l o r photograph,

as t o copy ranges o f cells t o a W e b publishing o r word

on the other h a n d , and you c a n c o n v e y the same infor-

processing p r o g r a m t o insert spreadsheet data into a

mation within seconds. T h e saying " a picture is worth a thousand w o r d s " is the c o r n e r s t o n e o f presentation

document as a t a b l e .

graphics. A p r e s e n t a t i o n g r a p h i c (see Exhibit 3 - 1 7 ) is an image designed t o visually e n h a n c e a presentation

Database Concepts

(such as an electronic slide s h o w o r a printed report),

People often need to retrieve specific data rapidly while

typically t o convey i n f o r m a t i o n m o r e easily to people.

on the j o b . F o r example, a customer service representa-

A variety o f software (including spreadsheet programs,

tive may need to locate a customer's order status quickly

image

while the customer is on the telephone. T h e type o f soft-

software) c a n be used t o create presentation graphics.

editing p r o g r a m s , a n d presentation

ware used for such tasks is a database management system. A d a t a b a s e is a collection o f related data that is stored on a computer and organized in a manner that enables information to be retrieved as needed. A database management system

(DBMS)—also

called d a t a b a s e s o f t w a r e — i s the type

d a t a b a s e A collection of related data that is stored on a tow>pv.\tf w\d orcjowzed in a manner that enables information to be retrieved as needed. d a t a b a s e s o f t w a r e The type of program used to create, maintain, and organize data in a database, as well as to retrieve information from it; also called a database management system (DBMS). p r e s e n t a t i o n g r a p h i c An image designed to visually enhance a presentation (such as an electronic slide show or a printed report).

E x h i b i t 3-17 Examples of presentation graphics

graphics

E x h i b i t 3-18

Graphics software

I

PAINTING P R O G R A M S Typically create images pixel by pixel so images cannot be layered or resized. DRAWING P R O G R A M S Typically create images using mathematical formulas so images can consist of multiple objects that can be layered, and the images can be resized without distortion.

mm PHOTO EDITING PROGRAMS Allow users to edit digital photos.

Presentation graphics often take the f o r m o f electronic

designed t o help individuals create o r m o d i f y g r a p h i c s ,

slides c o n t a i n i n g images, text, video, and m o r e that are

edit digital audio or video files, play m e d i a files, burn

displayed o n e after the other in an electronic slide show.

C D s and D V D s , and so forth, as discussed n e x t . S o m e

presentation

p r o g r a m s focus on just one task; o t h e r s are designed t o

g r a p h i c s s o f t w a r e and can be run on individual c o m p u t -

perform multiple tasks, such as t o i m p o r t a n d edit im-

ers or presented t o a large group using a c o m p u t e r pro-

ages, a u d i o , and video, and then create a finished D V D .

E l e c t r o n i c slide shows are created with

j e c t o r ; for instance, they are frequently used for business and educational presentations. S o m e o f the m o s t c o m m o n presentation graphics p r o g r a m s are M i c r o s o f t

Graphics Software

P o w e r P o i n t , C o r e l Presentations, and Apple K e y n o t e —

G r a p h i c s s o f t w a r e — a l s o called

again, all part o f their respective software suites.

w a r e — i s used t o create or m o d i f y i m a g e s . G r a p h i c s

Presentation graphics programs can be used to gen-

software

programs

digital

are c o m m o n l y

imaging

soft-

distinguished

by

erate W e b pages or W e b page c o n t e n t , and slides can

whether they are primarily oriented t o w a r d painting,

include hyperlinks.

drawing, or image editing, although these are general categories, not strict classifications. See E x h i b i t 3 - 1 8 .

Application Software for Working with Multimedia LO3.6

G

r a p h i c s are images, such as digital p h o t o g r a p h s ,

clip art, scanned drawings, and original images cre-

p r e s e n t a t i o n g r a p h i c s s o f t w a r e The type of program used to create electronic slide shows that can be run on individual computers or presented to a large group using a computer projector. g r a p h i c An image, such as a digital photograph, clip art, a scanned drawing, or an original image created using a software program. m u l t i m e d i a Any application that contains more than one type of

ated using a software p r o g r a m . M u l t i m e d i a technically

media; often used to refer to audio and video content.

refers t o any application that contains m o r e than one

g r a p h i c s s o f t w a r e A program used to create or modify images; also

type o f media, but is often used to refer t o audio and

called digital imaging software.

video c o n t e n t . T h e r e are a variety o f software p r o g r a m s

Chapter

3: Computer

Software

bitmap

Adobe P h o t o s h o p Elements, Ulead Photo Express, Ap-

i m a g e s , which are created by coloring the individual

ple iPhoto, Corel Paint Shop P r o P h o t o X 2 , M i c r o s o f t

pixels in an image. O n e o f the m o s t c o m m o n painting

Office Picture Manager, and the free Picasa 3 program.

p r o g r a m s is Microsoft Paint. Painting programs are of-

F o r professional image editing, A d o b e Photoshop is the

ten used to create and modify simple images, but, unless

leading program.

Painting

programs

traditionally

create

the painting program supports layers and other tools discussed shortly, use for these programs is relatively limited. This is because when something is drawn or

Audio Capture and Editing Software

placed on top o f a bitmap image, the pixels in the image

F o r creating and editing audio files, audio capture and

are recolored to reflect the n e w content, and whatever

audio editing software is used. T o capture sound from

was beneath the new c o n t e n t is lost. In addition, bit-

a m i c r o p h o n e , sound recorder software is used; to

mapped images c a n n o t be enlarged and still maintain

capture sound from a C D , ripping software is used. In

their quality, because the pixels in the images just get

either case, after the audio is captured, it can then be

larger, which m a k e s the edges o f the images look jag-

modified, as needed. For instance, background noise or

ged. Some painting p r o g r a m s (such as Corel Painter)

pauses can be removed, portions o f the selection can be

do support layers and so are m o r e versatile. Painting

edited out, multiple segments c a n be spliced together,

tools are also increasingly included in other types o f

and special effects such as fade-ins and fade-outs can be

software, such as in office suites and drawing programs.

applied. See Exhibit 3 - 1 9 . Also available are specialized

Drawing programs (also referred to as illustration programs) typically create v e c t o r g r a p h i c s , which use m a t h ematical formulas to represent image

^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ E x h i b i t 3-19

Audio editing software

content instead o f pixels. Unlike bitmap images, vector images c a n be resized and otherwise manipulated without loss o f quality. O b j e c t s in drawing programs can also typically be layered. So, if you place one object on top of another, you can later separate the t w o images if desired. D r a w i n g p r o g r a m s are often used by individuals and small business owners to create original art, logos, business cards, and m o r e . T h e y are also used by professionals t o create corporate images, W e b site graphics, and so forth. Popular drawing programs include Adobe Illustrator and CorelDRAW. Image

editing

or

photo

editing

programs are drawing or painting programs that are specifically designed for

I

touching up or modifying images, such as original digi-

audio capture and editing p r o g r a m s designed for spe-

tal images and digital p h o t o s . Some widely used con-

cific applications, such as creating podcasts or musical

sumer image editing and p h o t o editing programs are

compositions. Professional audio capture and editing software (such as Sony Creative Software Sound Forge 9 and Adobe Audition 3) is used to create professional

b i t m a p i m a g e A graphic created by coloring the

audio for end products, W e b pages, c o m m e r c i a l pod-

individual pixels in an image.

casts, presentations, and so forth. C o m m o n c o n s u m e r

v e c t o r g r a p h i c A graphic that uses mathematical formulas

audio capture and editing programs include W i n d o w s

to represent image content instead of pixels.

Sound Recorder, Apple G a r a g e B a n d , and Sony Creative Software Sound Forge Audio Studio s o f t w a r e .

m

Chapter

3: Computer

Software

E x h i b i t 3-20

Video creation software VIDEO EDITING

ALLOWS USERS TO IMPORT AND EDIT V I D E O ; THE FINISHED V I D E O CAN B E STORED IN A FILE OR INCLUDED IN A D V D PRESENTATION.

•' T I N •»»— 'OA/ft

A CLICK TO BURN THE FINISHED PRESENTATION TO A D V D .

A.

*—

flniHd

AH RIA AAA* A

AAA: I D % A I A U . A AAA" «4 A ,.AA, An A A 1 A AJ F A\ A A LV A A A 0 A

*A

T H E D V D INCLUDES THE V I D E O CLIPS

A*

ML A a AJ

AND U S E S THE TITLES AND A P P E A R A N C E DESIGNATED B Y THE USER.

A A

A

V I D E O CLIPS CAN B E EDITED AS N E E D E D ; THE T I M E L I N E IS U S E D TO CROP OUT S E C TIONS OF THE CURRENT V I D E O CLIP.

DVD AUTHORING ALLOWS USERS TO IMPORT AND ORGANIZE PHOTOS, V I D E O , AND M U S I C INTO A FINISHED D V D PRESENTATION.

Uideo Editing and DUD Authoring Software

D V D to control the playback o f those videos. D V D

Digital video can be imported directly into a video editing program by connecting the camera to the computer or by inserting the storage media containing the video (such as a D V D ) into the computer. After the video has been imported, video editing (such as deleting or rearranging scenes, adding voice-overs, and adding other special effects) can be performed, as shown in Exhibit 3 - 2 0 . Some video editing software today can edit video in high definition f o r m a t . D V D authoring refers to organizing c o n t e n t

to

be transferred to D V D , such as importing video clips and then creating the desired menu structure for the

burning refers to recording data (such as a c o l l e c t i o n of songs or a finished video) on a r e c o r d a b l e o r rewritable D V D . D V D authoring and burning

capabilities

are c o m m o n l y included with video editing capabilities in video creation software; there are also s t a n d - a l o n e D V D authoring programs, and D V D b u r n i n g capabilities are preinstalled on c o m p u t e r s c o n t a i n i n g a recordable o r rewritable optical drive. M a n y file m a n a g e m e n t programs (such as W i n d o w s E x p l o r e r ) include C D and D V D burning capabilities, as well.

Media Players M e d i a p l a y e r s are programs designed to play audio a n d video files available via your c o m p u t e r — s u c h as music

Individuals use video editing software to edit home videos or to create videos to upload to YouTube.

m e d i a p l a y e r A program designed to play audio and video files available via your computer.

Chapter

3: Computer

Software

Exhibit 3-21 Typical media player program

M Y LIBRARY IS SELECTED; U S E THE OTHER OPTIONS TO LISTEN TO THE RADIO, PURCHASE M U S I C , AND SO ON.

U S E THESE OPTIONS

—

B

TO V I E W T H E M E D I A FILES

Downtoadj » Recordngs

•

STORED ON YOUR

a

COMPUTER.

CD/DVD

CLICK TO PLAY A DISC IN YOUR C O M P U T E R ' S

t>

PtaySttocted

ft

Ed* d p Wo

C D OR D V D DRIVE.

B

Copy ToPtoy**

U S E THESE OPTIONS TO BURN A C D OR D V D ."

H

I

B " ^ LANDTORD.LV 9 NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC VTDEO2.LV P"THE PROPOSATIV [ PMAROON 5 - MAKES ME WONDER.LV BROAOONAL GEOGRAPHIC VIDEO.LV B JONATHAN COJTON - Baby GOT B.. BBEATLES TODOWNLOAD BOOMTO... B GCCLA CAGE HIDDEN CAM VIDEO B AMAMG BREAK DANCE MOVES VIDEO J BFHXTIYFREESTYTEI VIDEO B Amazng LIGHTER TRXKHH VIDEO B FUNNY FREESTYLE' VIDEO2.LV B BEST GOAL CETEBRAOONS VIDEO BFOOTBALTYICKSVIDEO.LV BSTRANGEANMALS VIDEO BTNE WATER THWF VKJEO4 B9OW MOTION MENTDS GEYSER w ± . BATTEN COMPOSE VIDEO • BGPOLBCS.LV 0 2006 WHITE HOUSE CORRESPOND... BCOMH)YTWE TVE OFFICIAL SI... •ARVITIORWL GEOGRAPHIC VTDEO.FTV

***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** *****

2:24 3:40 2:35 3:49 2:47 3:52 9:58

1:25 3:17 1:10 1:33 11:24 10:11 2:47

RASH VIDEO BS3 FIT; FLASH VIDEO 512 KBPS RASH VIDEO 334 KBPS RASH VIDEO 392KBPS RASH VIDEO 512 KBPS RASH VIDEO 400 KBPS RASH VIDEO 351KBPS RASH VIDEO RASH VIDEO RASH VIDEO RASH VIDEO RASH VIDEO 341KBPS RASH VIDEO RASH VIDEO 292 KBPS RASH VIDEO RASH VIDEO RASH VIDEO 344 KBPS RASH VIDEO RASH VIDEO 533KBPS RASH VIDEO 495 KBPS RASH VIDEO 496KBPS FLASH VW... 512 KBPS

8 *

4

1

± -a 2

~

i k with cts.

HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol)—used to display Web pages

^

H T T P S (Secure H y p e r t e x t Transfer Protocol)—used to display W e b pages

^

F T P (File Transfer P r o t o c o l ) — u s e d to transfer files over the Internet

p r o t o c o l A set of rules to be followed in a specific situation. TCP/IP A networking protocol that uses packet switching to facilitate the transmission of messages; the protocol used with the Internet.

^

S M T P (Simple M a i l Transfer P r o t o c o l ) — u s e d t o deliver e-mail over the Internet

^

P O P 3 (Post Office P r o t o c o l ) — u s e d to deliver email over the Internet

Chapter

4 : Computer

Networks

E x h i b i t 4-12

How TCP/IP works

1. Each message is split into packets.

2 . The packets are addressed to the same destination. From: [email protected]

ftTTlj

To: [email protected]

From: [email protected]

j

j

To: [email protected] From: [email protected]

SUE'S PC

4. The packets are reassembled into the message at the destination.

J I M ' S PC

Ethernet (802.3) E t h e r n e t (802.3) is the most widely used standard for wired n e t w o r k s . It is typically used with L A N s that have a star topology, though it can also be used with

|q^|

To: [email protected] 3. The packets may travel the same or different routes to the destination.

University of Southern California (USC)

W A N s and M A N s , and can be used in c o n j u n c t i o n with twisted-pair, c o a x i a l , or fiber-optic c a b l i n g . A b o u t every three years, the n e w approved a m e n d ments are incorporated into the existing I E E E

802.3

Ethernet standard to keep it up t o date. E x h i b i t 4 - 1 3 summarizes the various Ethernet standards. O f these, the m o s t c o m m o n are Fast Ethernet, G i g a b i t E t h e r n e t ,

Experts suggest that busniesses perform a network audti to determnie what hardware and software changes wil be needed to swtich to IPv6.

and 1 0 Gigabit Ethernet. T h e even faster standards listed in E x h i b i t 4 - 1 3 are currently under development and are expected to be used for c o n n e c t i o n s between

E t h e r n e t The most widely used standard for wired networks.

E x h i b i t 4-13

avoid multiple messages f r o m being sent at one

Ethernet standards

time and to detect any collisions of messages as they occur. Beginning in 1 9 9 7 , Ethernet became

Standard

Maximum Speed

full-duplex, so collisions n o longer occur. A recent E t h e r n e t d e v e l o p m e n t is Power over

10BASE-T

10 Mbps

Fast Ethernet (100BASE-T or 100BASE-TX)

100 Mbps

be sent along the c a b l e s in an Ethernet n e t w o r k

Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T)

1,000 Mbps (1 Gbps)

along with d a t a . T h e s e c a b l e s are often referred

10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GBASE-T)

10 Gbps

40 Gigabit Ethernet*

40 Gbps

100 Gigabit Ethernet*

100 Gbps

Terabit Ethernet**

1,000 Gbps (1 Tbps)

E t h e r n e t ( P o E ) , which a l l o w s electrical power to

t o as E t h e r n e t c a b l e s . C o n s e q u e n t l y , in addition to sending d a t a , the E t h e r n e t c a b l e can be used to supply p o w e r to the devices on the n e t w o r k . P o E is m o s t often used in business

networks

with r e m o t e wired devices, such as o u t d o o r netw o r k i n g h a r d w a r e , security c a m e r a s , and o t h e r

* Expected by 2010

devices, that are n o t l o c a t e d n e a r a p o w e r outlet.

** Expected by 2015

It c a n also be used t o p l a c e n e t w o r k e d devices near ceilings o r o t h e r l o c a t i o n s where a nearby p o w e r outlet m a y n o t be a v a i l a b l e . Using P o E re-

servers, as well as for delivering video, digital X - r a y s

quires special h a r d w a r e a n d devices designed for P o E

and other digital medical images, and other high-speed,

but it eliminates the need f o r a c c e s s t o power outlets

bandwidth-intensive, n e t w o r k i n g applications.

for that p o r t i o n o f the n e t w o r k . R e g u l a r Ethernetand

enabled devices c a n be p o w e r e d via P o E if a special

used a set o f procedures collectively called CSMA/CD

P o E adapter, such as the o n e s h o w n in E x h i b i t 4 - 1 4 ,

(Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection) to

is used.

Early

Ethernet

E x h i b i t 4-14

Chapter

networks

were

half-duplex

Ethernet-enabled devices powered via PoE

4 : Computer

Networks

Wi-Fi (802.11)

lernet has continued t o

O n e o f the m o s t c o m m o n networking s t a n d a r d s used

olve since it w a s i m e n t o

with wireless L A N s is Wi-Fi (802.11), w h i c h is a f a m -

in t h e mid-1970s.

ily o f wireless networking standards that use the I E E E 8 0 2 . 1 1 standard. Wi-Fi is the current standard f o r wireless n e t w o r k s in the home or office, as well as f o r public W i - F i h o t s p o t s . It is sometimes called wireless E t h e r n e t because it is designed to easily c o n n e c t to a wired Eth-

Phoneline, Powerline, G.hn, and Broadband over Powerline (BPL)

ernet n e t w o r k . W i - F i hardware is built into virtually all

T w o alternatives t o the Ethernet standard for wired

when the user is within range of a W i - F i n e t w o r k . In a d -

h o m e n e t w o r k s are the Phoneline and Powerline stan-

dition to portable computers and m o b i l e p h o n e s , W i - F i

dards. P h o n e l i n e (also called the H o m e P N A Alliance

capabilities are becoming increasingly integrated into

o r H o m e P N A standard) allows c o m p u t e r s t o be net-

everyday products, such as printers, digital c a m e r a s ,

portable c o m p u t e r s sold today. It is also built i n t o m a n y mobile phones to allow faster W e b b r o w s i n g via W i - F i

w o r k e d t h r o u g h ordinary telephone wiring and tele-

portable digital media players, handheld g a m i n g de-

p h o n e j a c k s w i t h o u t interfering with voice telephone

vices, and gaming consoles (see E x h i b i t 4 - 1 5 ) , t o a l l o w

calls, as well as over existing h o m e c o a x i a l c a b l e wir-

those devices to wirelessly n e t w o r k with o t h e r devices

ing. T h e n e w e s t version o f this s t a n d a r d — H o m e P N A

or to access the Internet.

3 . 0 — s u p p o r t s speeds up to 3 2 0 M b p s and is designed t o n e t w o r k b o t h the c o m p u t e r s and the h o m e entert a i n m e n t devices within a h o m e . T h e Powerline (also called H o m e P l u g ) standard allows c o m p u t e r s t o be

E x h i b i t 4-15

Wi-Fi enabled products

n e t w o r k e d over existing p o w e r lines using c o n v e n tional

electrical

outlets. Similar

to

Phoneline

net-

w o r k s , P o w e r l i n e n e t w o r k s are quick and easy to set up a n d a r e relatively fast (up t o 2 0 0 M b p s ) . In addit i o n , they have the advantage that houses usually have m a n y m o r e p o w e r outlets than p h o n e outlets. Similar t o the n e w e s t Phoneline s t a n d a r d , the newest Powerline s t a n d a r d — n a m e d H o m e P l u g A V — c a n be used to n e t w o r k h o m e entertainment devices in addition to computers. T h e G . h n standard is an emerging standard designed as a unified worldwide standard for creating h o m e n e t w o r k s over phone lines, power lines, and c o a x i a l c a b l e . It is being promoted by the H o m e G r i d F o r u m and is supported by the H o m e P N A Alliance. O n c e the standard is finalized, products that support all three types o f h o m e networking c o n n e c t i o n s discussed in this section can be developed. An emerging technology based on the Powerline standard that is under development and that is designed to deliver b r o a d b a n d Internet to homes via the existing o u t d o o r p o w e r lines (with the addition o f some new

PORTABLE DIGITAL MEDIA P L A Y E R S

G A M I N G CONSOLES

h a r d w a r e at the power poles) is b r o a d b a n d over Powerline ( B P L ) . Currently, B P L service is available only in limited areas through the area's power company, but B P L has great potential for delivering b r o a d b a n d Internet access to virtually any h o m e or business that has

Wi-Fi (802.11) A widely used networking standard for medium-range wireless networks.

access to electricity.

C h a p t e r

4 :

C o m p u t e r

N e t w o r k s

27

T h e speed o f a Wi-Fi network and the area it can cover depend on a variety o f factors, including the Wi-Fi

802.1 ig and 802.1m products can

standard and hardware being used, the number of solid

b e used o n the s a m e network, b u t

objects, such as walls, trees, or buildings, between the ac-

c o m p u t e r s using older 802.1 ig

cess point and the computer or other device being used, and the amount o f interference from cordless phones, baby monitors, microwave ovens, and other devices that also operate on the same radio frequency as Wi-Fi (usually 2 . 4 G H z ) . In general, Wi-Fi is designed for medium-

hardware t o c o n n e c t t o 802. nn networks will only c o n n e 802.1 ig speed:

range data transfers—typically between 1 0 0 and 3 0 0 feet indoors and 3 0 0 to 9 0 0 feet outdoors. Usually both speed and distance degrade with interference. T h e distance of a Wi-Fi network can be extended using additional anten-

and about twice the range. To ensure

nas and other hardware designed for that purpose.

that hardware from various vendors

A s u m m a r y o f the different W i - F i standards in use

will work together, consumers can

and under development is s h o w n in Exhibit 4 - 1 6 . T h e

look for products that are certified

most widely used o f these are 8 0 2 . 1 l g and 8 0 2 . 1 I n .

by the Wi-Fi Alliance.

Fi CERTIFIED'

Courtesy Wi-Fi Alliance. The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance

While Wi-Fi is very widely used E x h i b i t 4-16

today, it does have some l i m i t a t i o n s —

Wi-Fi standards

particularly its relatively limited range. F o r instance, an individual using a W i -

Wi-Fi S t a n d a r d

Description

802.11b

An early Wi-Fi standard; supports data transfer rates of 11 Mbps,

802.11a

Supports data transfer rates of 54 Mbps, but uses a different

Fi hotspot inside a coffeehouse will

radio frequency (5 GHz) than 802.11 g/b (2.4 GHz), making the standards incompatible. A current Wi-Fi standard; supports data transfer rates of 54

802.11g

Mbps and uses the same 2.4 GHz frequency as 802.11 b, so their products are compatible. The newest Wi-Fi standard; supports speeds up to about 300

802.11n

Mbps and has twice the range of 802.11 g. It can use either the 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz frequency. Designed for Wi-Fi mesh networks.

802.11u*

Includes additional security features.

802.11Z*

Designed for direct (ad hoc) networking between devices.

802.11ac and

Designed to increase throughput.

802.11ad**

lose that Internet connection when he or she moves out o f range of that netw o r k and will need to locate another hotspot at his o r her next location. In addition, many businesses may be physically t o o large for a Wi-Fi netw o r k to span the entire organization. While hardware can be used to extend a Wi-Fi n e t w o r k , an emerging possibility for creating larger wireless networks is W i M A X .

802.11s*

WiMAX and Mobile WiMAX WiMAX

(Worldwide

Interoperability

for M i c r o w a v e Access) is a series o f

* Expected by 2010

standards designed for longer range

** Expected no earlier than 2012

wireless Similar

networking to

Wi-Fi,

connections.

WiMAX

(also

k n o w n as 802.16a) is designed to p r o T h e 8 0 2 . 1 I n standard is currently the fastest Wi-Fi

vide Internet access to fixed l o c a t i o n s , sometimes called

standard today. Its use of M I M O (multiple in, multiple

hotzones. However, W i M A X hotzones can provide ser-

out) antennas to transfer multiple streams of data at one

vice to anyone in the h o t z o n e , including mobile users,

time, in addition to other improvements, allows for data

while the range o f Wi-Fi hotspots is fairly limited. T h e

transmissions typically about five times as fast as 8 0 2 . 1 l g

coverage o f a hotzone is significantly larger; a typical

W i M A X (802.16a) An emerging wireless networking

transmit data as far as 6 miles o r so w i t h o u t line of

standard that is faster and has a greater range than Wi-Fi.

sight. W i t h W i M A X , it is feasible t o provide coverage

hotzone radius is close to 2 miles, t h o u g h W i M A X can

to an entire city or other geographical area by using

Chapter

4: Computer

Networks

I

Wi-Fi SD Cards O n e i n t e r e s t i n g n e w Wi-Fi p r o d u c t t h a t b e c a m e a v a i l a b l e r e c e n t l y is t h e Wi-Fi S D c a r d . T h e s e cards a r e d e s i g n e d t o u p l o a d p h o t o s wirelessly a n d a u t o m a t i c a l l y

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi

2GB

f r o m y o u r c a m e r a t o y o u r c o m p u t e r via a Wi-Fi n e t w o r k .

Wi-Fi

2GB

4GB

S o m e cards c a n also t a g y o u r p h o t o s w i t h l o c a t i o n i n f o r m a t i o n b a s e d o n g e o g r a p h i c c o o r d i n a t e s as y o u t a k e

Courtesy Eye-Fi

t h e m (called geotags); others can automatically upload y o u r p h o t o s t o p h o t o sharing W e b sites like Flickr, Face-

directly t o y o u r computer w h i l e o n t h e g o w h e n e v e r

b o o k , o r Picasa.

t h e c a m e r a is in r a n g e o f y o u r c o m p u t e r .

F o r i n s t a n c e , a l l t h r e e Eye-Fi c a r d s in t h e a c c o m panying

p h o t o wirelessly transfer t h e p h o t o s

from

In a d d i t i o n t o a l l o w i n g y o u t o s h a r e y o u r

photos

i m m e d i a t e l y w i t h others, using a Wi-Fi S D c a r d f o r y o u r

y o u r digital camera t o y o u r h o m e c o m p u t e r as soon

digital p h o t o s c a n also give y o u t h e p e a c e o f m i n d t h a t

as t h e c a m e r a is w i t h i n r a n g e o f y o u r h o m e W i - F i n e t -

your photos are backed up on your h o m e computer and/

w o r k . T h e Eye-Fi S h a r e a n d t h e Eye-Fi P r o c a r d s c a n

o r o n l i n e . This is especially beneficial if y o u r c a m e r a is

w/relessly u p l o a d p h o t o s t o y o u r f a v o r i t e p h o t o

stolen o r t h e c a r d b e c o m e s d a m a g e d . In f a c t , using a n

a l s o

s h a r i n g W e b site, a n d t h e Eye-Fi P r o c a r d a u t o m a t i -

Eye-Fi c a r d e n a b l e d o n e w o m a n t o c a t c h t h e i n d i v i d u a l

cally g e o t a g s y o u r p h o t o s . In a d d i t i o n , t h e Eye-Fi P r o

w h o stole h e r c a m e r a g e a r w h i l e s h e w a s o n v a c a t i o n —

c a r d c a n u p l o a d v i d e o s a n d u n c o m p r e s s e d R A W files in

her p h o t o s , a l o n g w i t h images o f t h e t h i e f w i t h t h e c a m -

a d d i t i o n t o photos, send images t o p h o t o sharing W e b

era gear, w e r e u p l o a d e d t o h e r h o m e c o m p u t e r a n d t h e

sites a n d y o u r h o m e c o m p u t e r v i a a w i r e l e s s h o t s p o t

police w e r e a b l e t o a p p r e h e n d t h e t h i e f a n d r e c o v e r t h e

w h e n y o u are away from home, a n d upload

stolen gear.

photos

multiple W i M A X t o w e r s , similar t o the w a y cell p h o n e

t o deliver b r o a d b a n d wireless n e t w o r k i n g t o

cells o v e r l a p t o provide c o n t i n u o u s cell p h o n e service.

users via a m o b i l e p h o n e , p o r t a b l e c o m p u t e r , o r o t h e r

See E x h i b i t 4 - 1 7 . W i M A X c a n use licensed r a d i o fre-

W i M A X - e n a b l e d device. W i M A X c a p a b i l i t i e s a r e b e -

q u e n c i e s , in a d d i t i o n t o unlicensed frequencies like W i -

ginning t o be built into p o r t a b l e c o m p u t e r s a n d o t h e r

Fi, t o a v o i d interference issues.

devices, a n d W i M A X is currently being used t o provide

mobile

M o b i l e W i M A X (802.16e) is the m o b i l e version o f the

Internet access t o selected g e o g r a p h i c a l a r e a s by a n u m -

W i M A X wireless n e t w o r k i n g s t a n d a r d . It is designed

ber o f c o m p a n i e s in over 1 3 5 c o u n t r i e s . In t h e United S t a t e s , f o r i n s t a n c e , Sprint N e x t e l ' s W i M A X

E x h i b i t 4-17

WiMAX vs. Wi-Fi

division

and W i M A X leader C l e a r w i r e h a v e m e r g e d a n d are in ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^

t h e p r o c e s s o f building a

new WiMAX-based

nationwide network

high-speed

designed

to

deliver b o t h fixed a n d mobile

WiMAX-based

I n t e r n e t service t o businesses a n d individuals.

mobile WiMAX

WiMAX hotzone

(802.16e) Aversion of WiMAX designed to be used

Wi-Fi hotspot

with mobile phones.

C h a p t e r

4:

C o m p u t e r

N e t w o r k s

29

Cellular Standards

up to about 1.7 M b p s at the present time, with speeds

Cellular standards have evolved over the years

to

better fulfill the demand for m o b i l e Internet, m o b i l e multimedia delivery, and o t h e r relatively recent m o bile trends. T h e original

first-generation

phones were

a n a l o g and designed for voice only. N e w e r cell p h o n e s , starting with s e c o n d - g e n e r a t i o n ( 2 G ) p h o n e s , are digital, support both data and v o i c e , and are faster. C o m -

expected to reach 3 M b p s in the near future. T h e s e speeds are equivalent to the speeds many home b r o a d band Internet users experience. Consequently, Internet access via a 3 G network is often referred to as mobile b r o a d b a n d . In addition to m o b i l e phones, computers can access the Internet via a 3 G n e t w o r k with appropriate hardware.

mon 2 G wireless standards include G S M ( G l o b a l System for M o b i l e c o m m u n i c a t i o n s ) and C D M A (Code Division M u l t i p l e A c c e s s ) . B o t h o f these standards are

veloped t e c h n o l o g i e s such as E D G E (Enhanced D a t a

Locked vs. Unlocked Phones

Rates for G S M

A l t h o u g h many mobile phones a r e locked t o a

designed for voice traffic and b o t h support speeds up to 1 4 . 4 K b p s , t h o u g h s o m e wireless providers have deE v o l u t i o n ) t h a t can be used with

2 G n e t w o r k s to provide faster service; for instance,

particular cellular provider, b u y i n g a n

E D G E supports speeds up t o 1 3 5 K b p s . T h e s e interim

mobile p h o n e allows y o u t o switch providers and

unlocked

developments are s o m e t i m e s referred to as 2 . 5 G cel-

k e e p y o u r s a m e p h o n e , as w e l l as carry y o u r c o n -

lular s t a n d a r d s . B o t h G S M a n d C D M A are used in

tacts a n d o t h e r d a t a w i t h y o u t o a n e w u n l o c k e d

the United States, a l t h o u g h they are n o t c o m p a t i b l e

p h o n e just by m o v i n g t h e S I M c a r d c o n t a i n i n g

with each other. ( S o m e p h o n e s t h a t can be used with

data to t h e n e w phone.

that

both standards are available.) G S M is also widely used overseas, though with different frequencies so international travelers will need t o ensure their 2 G phone supports the frequencies used in their destination loca-

Virtually all mobile phone providers today have, or

t i o n — s o m e 2 G p h o n e s s u p p o r t multiple frequencies

are in the process o f building, a 3 G network. T h e 3 G

to permit i n t e r n a t i o n a l r o a m i n g . T h e current standard for cellular networks today in

standard used with a n e t w o r k depends on the type of cellular network. F o r instance, G S M mobile networks,

the United States and m a n y other countries is 3 G (third

such as A T & T Wireless and T - M o b i l e , typically use the

generation). 3 G cellular standards use packet switching

H S D P A (High Speed D o w n l i n k P a c k e t Access)/UMTS

instead of circuit switching and are designed to support

(Universal

Mobile Telecommunications

System)

3G

both data and voice. Users o f 3 G mobile phones and

standards for their 3 G n e t w o r k s ; C D M A

other 3 G mobile devices c a n access b r o a d b a n d Internet

such as Verizon Wireless and C r i c k e t Wireless, typically

networks,

content (such as online m a p s , music, games, TV, videos,

use the E V - D O (Evolution D a t a Optimized) 3 G stan-

and more—see Exhibit 4 - 1 8 ) at relatively fast s p e e d s —

dard instead. T o get 3 G speeds, m o b i l e users need to be in range of their providers' 3 G n e t w o r k ; typically, users outside the coverage area can still get service, but only at 2 G speeds. T h e n e x t generation for m o b i l e

networks—4G

(fourth g e n e r a t i o n ) — i s under development and t w o standards have emerged so far: the mobile W i M A X standard already discussed and L o n g Term Evolution ( L T E ) . L T E , which is supported by A T & T Wireless, Verizon Wireless, and T - M o b i l e , is a cellular standard and is based on U M T S . L T E n e t w o r k s are expected t o arrive in the United States, by 2 0 1 1 . W h i l e m o b i l e W i M A X is not a cellular s t a n d a r d , the new n a t i o n a l W i M A X n e t w o r k being built in the U n i t e d States by Sprint N e x t e l and Clearwire will be used to provide 4 G mobile phone service t o s u b s c r i b e r s , in addition to Internet service.

Uuetooth can automatically

Personal Mobile Hotspots

synchronize a portable c o m p u t e r o r mobile phone w i t h a desktop

Y o u k n o w y o u c a n access W i - F i h o t s p o t s in m a n y l o c a t i o n s , b u t h o w a b o u t c r e a t i n g y o u r o w n hots p o t w h e n e v e r y o u n e e d it? T h a t ' s n o w possible w i t h several emerging products designed t o crea t e p e r s o n a l m o b i l e hotspots t h a t c a n b e

used

c o m p u t e r , or c o n n e c t a wireless keyboard as soon as t h e c o m p u t e r is p o w e r ^ ^ ^

w i t h a n y W i - F i d e v i c e , such as n o t e b o o k c o m p u t ers, m o b i l e p h o n e s , a n d p o r t a b l e g a m i n g d e v i c e s . One

such

Wireless's

product

MiFi

is

Verizon

Intelligent

Mobile

or less) c o n n e c t i o n s . It is designed to replace c a b l e s be-

H o t s p o t , s h o w n in t h e a c c o m p a n y -

tween devices, such as to c o n n e c t a wireless k e y b o a r d

ing illustration. T h e M i F i is a b o u t t h e

o r mouse to a desktop computer, to send print j o b s

size of s e v e r a l s t a c k e d c r e d i t

wirelessly f r o m a portable c o m p u t e r t o a printer, o r t o

cards.

its

c o n n e c t a mobile phone to a wireless headset. B l u e t o o t h

initial s e t u p , it

devices automatically recognize and n e t w o r k with each

After

creates a m o -

other when they get within transmission r a n g e . Blue-

by

t o o t h signals can transmit through clothing a n d o t h e r

the

nonmetallic o b j e c t s , so a mobile p h o n e o r o t h e r device

device. T h e MiFi device c o n -

in a p o c k e t or briefcase can c o n n e c t with B l u e t o o t h

bile h o t s p o t just

powering

up

nects t o V e r i z o n W i r e l e s s ' s 3G m o -

h a r d w a r e , such as a headset, w i t h o u t having t o be re-

bile n e t w o r k a n d p r o v i d e s access t o t h a t n e t w o r k

moved from the pocket or briefcase. In a d d i t i o n , s o m e

f o r u p t o f i v e Wi-Fi devices. To t h o s e devices, t h e

industry experts predict that m a j o r h o u s e h o l d appli-

M i F i h o t s p o t a p p e a r s as a n y o t h e r W i - F i h o t s p o t ,

ances will be Bluetooth-enabled in the f u t u r e , resulting

so users c o n n e c t as t h e y n o r m a l l y w o u l d . W h i l e

in an a u t o m a t i c , always connected, s m a r t h o m e .

t h e cost p e r M B is relatively e x p e n s i v e a n d t h e r e

Bluetooth works using radio signals in the frequency

is c u r r e n t l y n o u n l i m i t e d d a t a p l a n , this d e v i c e is

band of 2 . 4 G H z , the same as W i - F i . It traditionally sup-

useful f o r m a n y s i t u a t i o n s — s u c h as i P h o n e users

ports data transfer rates up to 3 M b p s , though the new-

w h o n e e d t o quickly d o w n l o a d files l a r g e r t h a n

est Bluetooth 3 . 0 standard incorporates 8 0 2 . 1 1

t h e limit a l l o w e d via a cellular c o n n e c t i o n a n d so

nology to support transfers up to 2 4 M b p s . W h e n t w o

n e e d t o use a Wi-Fi c o n n e c t i o n i n s t e a d , a n d f a m i -

Bluetooth-enabled devices c o m e within range of each

lies w h o w a n t t o all access t h e I n t e r n e t w h i l e t r a v -

other, their software identifies each other using their

j

tech-

e l i n g in a car. W i t h a r e c e n t poll i n d i c a t i n g t h a t

unique identification numbers and establishes a link. Be-

9 0 % o f c o n s u m e r s s u r v e y e d p r e f e r I n t e r n e t access

cause there may be many Bluetooth devices within range,

t o D V D v i d e o players in t h e i r cars, it a p p e a r s t h a t

up to 1 0 individual Bluetooth n e t w o r k s (called piconets)

m o b i l e p e r s o n a l hotspots a r e h o t .

can be in place within the same physical area at one time. Each piconet can connect up to eight devices, for a m a x i m u m of 8 0 devices within any 1 0 - m e t e r radius. See

Bluetooth, Ultra Wideband (1MB), and Other Short-Range Wireless Standards

Exhibit 4 - 1 9 . T o facilitate this, Bluetooth divides its al-

Several wireless networking standards are in existence

frequencies, jumping randomly (in unison with the other

or being developed that are designed for short-range

devices in that piconet) on a regular basis to minimize

located radio spectrum into multiple channels o f 1 M H z each. Each Bluetooth device can use the entire range o f

wireless networking connections. M o s t o f these are used to facilitate PANs or very small, special-purpose h o m e n e t w o r k s , such as connecting h o m e entertainment devices or appliances within a h o m e . Bluetooth is a wireless standard that is designed for

B l u e t o o t h A networking standard for very shortrange wireless connections. p i c o n e t A Bluetooth network.

very short-range ( 1 0 m e t e r s — a p p r o x i m a t e l y 3 3 f e e t —

C h a p t e r

4:

C o m p u t e r

N e t w o r k s

Exhibit

ECAUSE BLUETOOTH

4-19Piconets

The desktop computer, keyboard, printer, and mouse form a piconet to communicate with each other. The headset and cell phone (not shown in this photo) belong to another piconet.

The headset and cell phone form a piconet when they are within range to communicate with each other.

ANSMITTERS CHANGE FREQUENCIES 1 , 6 0 0 TI EVERY SECOND, TW< TRANSMITTING DEV ARE UNLIKELY TO B E SAME FREQUENCY AT SAME TIME.

A n e w s t a n d a r d t h a t is designed t o c o n n e c t peripheral devices, similar t o B l u e t o o t h , but t h a t transfers data more

quickly

is

wireless USB. The

speed o f wireless U S B depends on the distance

between

the

devices

being

used, but is a p p r o x i m a t e l y 1 0 0 M b p s interference between piconets, as well as from other de-

at 1 0 meters ( a b o u t 3 3 feet) o r 4 8 0 M b p s at 2 meters

vices, such as garage-door openers, Wi-Fi networks, and

(about 6 . 5 feet).

some cordless phones and baby monitors, that use the same frequencies. As the use o f Bluetooth g r o w s , the standard is evolving to meet new needs. F o r instance, Bluetooth 2 . 1 includes support for N e a r Field C o m m u n i c a t i o n s ( N F C ) , a standard for m a k i n g payments via mobile p h o n e , and the newest B l u e t o o t h 3 . 0 standard is fast enough to support multimedia applications, such as transferring music, p h o t o s , and videos between computers, mobile phones, and other devices. O n e interesting emerging Bluetooth application is intended to protect teenagers from texting or talking on their mobile phones while driving—a special Bluetooth-enabled car key prevents the driver's mobile phone from being used

Bluetooth and Wireless USB A l t h o u g h B l u e t o o t h a n d w i r e l e s s U S B can be used f o r similar a p p l i c a t i o n s , it is possible t h e y m i g h t coexist. For e x a m p l e , w i r e l e s s U S B m i g h t be used t o c o n n e c t c o m p u t e r h a r d w a r e in m o r e p e r m a n e n t setups, w h e r e a s B l u e t o o t h m i g h t be used in short-range m o b i l e s i t u a t i o n s w i t h p o r t a b l e c o m puters a n d m o b i l e devices.

while the car is on. T h e r e are several wireless technologies being dew i r e l e s s U S B A wireless version of USB designed to

cornea peripheral devices.

U l t r a W i d e b a n d ( U W B ) A networking standard for very shortrange wireless connections among multimedia devices. W i r e l e s s H D ( W i H D ) An emerging wireless networking specification designed for connecting home consumer devices.

veloped to transfer multimedia c o n t e n t quickly between nearby devices. O n e e x a m p l e is Ultra W i d e b a n d ( U W B ) . Similar to wireless U S B (because wireless U S B is based on U W B ) , U W B speeds vary f r o m 1 0 0 M b p s at 1 0 meters (about 3 3 feet) to 4 8 0 M b p s at 2 meters (about 6 . 5 feet). A n o t h e r possibility is W i r e l e s s H D ( W i H D ) . Similar

T r a n s f e r J e t A networking standard for wireless connections between

t o U W B , W i H D is designed for fast transfers o f high-

devices that are touching.

definition video between h o m e c o n s u m e r

electronic

devices, such as high-definition T V s , s e t - t o p b o x e s ,

C h a p t e r

4 :

C o m p u t e r

N e t w o r k s

g a m i n g c o n s o l e s , and D V D players, but it is B a c k e d by seven m a j o r electronics c o m p a n i e s , W i H D is designed t o transfer full-quality u n c o m p r e s s e d highdefinition a u d i o , video, and data within a single r o o m at speeds up t o 2 5 G b p s , t h o u g h t h o s e speeds have

,VB is especially a p p r o p r i a t e for applications that require high-speed transfers over short

n o t been o b t a i n e d yet. W i H D o p e r a t e s at 6 0 G H z and

distances, such as wirelessly

i n c o r p o r a t e s a smart antenna system t h a t allows the

delivering multimedia c o n t e n t . \\\\\\\\w

system t o steer the transmission, allowing for n o n line-of-sight c o m m u n i c a t i o n s . W i H D aims t o help users c r e a t e an e a s y - t o - m a n a g e wireless video n e t w o r k . Devices t h a t include W i H D capabilities began t o bec o m e a v a i l a b l e in 2 0 0 9 . A new wireless standard designed for very fast

Bee can be used for home and c o m m e r c i a l a u t o m a t i o n

transfers between devices that are extremely close t o -

systems to c o n n e c t a wide variety o f devices (such as

gether (essentially touching each other) is TransferJet.

appliances and lighting, heating, c o o l i n g , water,

Developed by Sony, TransferJet is designed to quickly

tion, and security systems), and allows for their c o n -

transfer large files, such as digital p h o t o s , music, and

trol from anywhere in the w o r l d . Z i g B e e is also used in

video, between devices as soon as they c o m e in c o n t a c t

industrial plant manufacturing, personal h o m e health-

with each other. F o r example, you can use TransferJet

c a r e , device tracking, t e l e c o m m u n i c a t i o n s , a n d wireless

to transfer data between mobile phones or between dig-

sensor n e t w o r k s .

ital c a m e r a s , to download music or video from a c o n -

ZigBee is designed to a c c o m m o d a t e m o r e

filtra-

than

sumer k i o s k or digital signage system to a mobile phone

6 5 , 0 0 0 devices on a single network and supports speeds

or other m o b i l e device, or to transfer images or video

from 2 0 K b p s to 2 5 0 Kbps, depending o n the frequency

from a digital c a m e r a to a T V set or printer. At a m a x i -

being used (several different frequencies are available

m u m speed o f 5 6 0 M b p s , TransferJet is fast enough to

for Z i g B e e n e t w o r k s ) . ZigBee has a range o f 1 0 t o 1 0 0

support the transfer of video files.

meters (about 3 3 to 3 2 8 feet) between devices, depend-

An emerging networking standard designed

for

ing on p o w e r output and environmental c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s .

inexpensive and simple short-range networking (par-

A wireless mesh configuration c a n be used t o greatly

ticularly sensor networks) is ZigBee ( 8 0 2 . 1 5 ) . ZigBee is

extend the range o f the network.

intended f o r applications that require low data transfer rates and several years of battery life. F o r instance, Zig-

E x h i b i t 4-20

F o r a s u m m a r y of the wireless n e t w o r k i n g standards just discussed, see E x h i b i t 4 - 2 0 .

Summary of common wireless networking standards

Category

Examples

Intended Purpose

Approximate Range

Short range

Bluetooth Wireless USB

To connect peripheral devices to a mobile phone

33 feet

or computer. Ultra Wideband (UWB)

To connect and transfer multimedia content

TransferJet

(computers, TVs, DVD players, etc.).

WirelessHD (WiHD) ZigBee

1 inch-33 feet

between home consumer electronic devices

To connect a variety of home, personal, and

33 feet-328 feet

commercial automation devices. Medium range Long range

Wi-Fi (802.11)

To connect computers and other devices to a local

100-300 feet indoors;

area network.

300-900 feet outdoors

WiMAX

To provide Internet access to a large geographic

Mobile W i M A X

area for fixed and/or mobile users.

6 miles non-line of sight;

Cellular standards (2G and 3G)

To connect mobile phones and mobile devices to a

30 miles line of sight

cellular network for telephone and Internet service.

C h a p t e r

4:

10 miles

C o m p u t e r

N e t w o r k s

describing devices used t o obtain Internet access via certain n e t w o r k s , such as cellular o r W i M A X networks. W h e n selecting a network adapter or modem, the \

/ arious types o f h a r d w a r e are necessary t o create a •

computer n e t w o r k , t o c o n n e c t multiple networks

together, or to c o n n e c t a c o m p u t e r or network t o the Internet. T h e following sections discuss the most c o m mon types o f networking h a r d w a r e used in h o m e and small office n e t w o r k s .

type o f device being used and the expansion slots and ports available on that device need t o be considered as well. F o r e x a m p l e , network adapters and modems for desktop computers typically c o m e in P C I , PCI Express (PCIe), o r U S B format, and n e t w o r k adapters and m o dems for portable computers usually connect via USB or an ExpressCard slot. In addition, the network adapter or m o d e m needs t o support the type o f networking m e -

Network Adapters and Modems

dia (such as twisted-pair cabling, c o a x i a l cabling, or

A n e t w o r k a d a p t e r , also called a n e t w o r k i n t e r f a c e c a r d

(NIC) when it is in the f o r m o f an expansion card, is used t o c o n n e c t a c o m p u t e r t o a network (such as a home or business n e t w o r k ) . A m o d e m (derived from the terms modulate

a n d demodulate)

is used t o c o n n e c t

a c o m p u t e r t o a n e t w o r k over telephone lines. Technically, t o be called a m o d e m , a device must convert digital signals (such as those used by a computer) t o modulated analog signals (such as those used by conventional telephone lines) a n d vice versa. However, in everyday use, the term modem

is also used t o refer t o

any device that c o n n e c t s a c o m p u t e r t o a broadband Internet c o n n e c t i o n , such as a cable m o d e m used for cable Internet service. In addition, the term modem often used interchangeably with network

adapter

is

when

• H I nternet

wireless signal) being used. S o m e examples o f network adapters and m o d e m s are s h o w n in Exhibit 4 - 2 1 .

Switches, Routers, and Other Hardware for Connecting Devices and Networks A variety o f networking h a r d w a r e is used to c o n n e c t the devices o n a n e t w o r k , as well as t o connect multiple n e t w o r k s together. F o r i n s t a n c e , as mentioned earlier in this chapter, n e t w o r k s using the star topology need a central device t o c o n n e c t all o f the devices on the n e t w o r k . In a wired n e t w o r k , this device w a s originally a h u b . A h u b transmits all data received t o all network devices c o n n e c t e d t o the h u b , regardless of which device the data is being sent t o , so the bandwidth o f the network is shared a n d the network is n o t extremely efficient. Today, the central device in a wired network is usually a s w i t c h . A switch contains ports to which the devices on the n e t w o r k c o n n e c t (typically via networking cables) and facilitates c o m m u n i c a t i o n s between the devices, similar t o a h u b . B u t , unlike hubs, switches identify which device c o n n e c t e d to the switch

odem a n d r 3 0 seconds, then plug in your m o d e m and wait 3 0 seconds

is the o n e the data is intended f o r a n d send the data only t o that device, rather than sending data out to all connected devices. Consequently, switches are more efficient than hubs.

then plug in your router.

Updating Firmware n e t w o r k a d a p t e r A device used to connect a computer to a network. n e t w o r k i n t e r f a c e c a r d (NIC) A network adapter in the form of an expansion card.

You can often update t h e firmware—embedded instructions—for a router a n d o t h e r

networking

hardware t o improve performance or obtain n e w capabilities. F i r m w a r e u p d a t e s a r e usually d o w n -

m o d e m A device that is used to connect a computer to a network over

l o a d e d f r o m t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r ' s site; o f t e n r o u t -

telephone lines.

er u p d a t e s n e e d t o b e installed w i t h a c o m p u t e r

s w i t c h A device that connects multiple devices on a wired network and

connected t o t h e device via a w i r e d , n o t wireless,

forwards data only to the intended recipient.

connection.

Exhibit 4-21 Network adapters and modems

T o c o n n e c t multiple networks (such as t w o L A N s , t w o W A N s , or a L A N and the Internet), a r o u t e r is

used. R o u t e r s pass data on to the intended recipient only and can plan a path t h r o u g h the network to ensure the data reaches its destination in the m o s t efficient manner possible, and are used t o route traffic over the Internet. A w i r e l e s s access p o i n t is a

de-

vice used t o grant network access to wireless client devices. In home and small business n e t w o r k s , typically the capabilities o f a switch, router, and wireless access point are integrated into a single w i r e l e s s r o u t e r

device. A wireless router (such as the one shown in E x h i b i t 4-22) is

r o u t e r A device that connects multiple networks together and passes data to the intended recipient using the most efficient route.

M o s t computers and mobile devices c o m e with a network

w i r e l e s s access p o i n t A device on a wireless network that connects wireless devices to that network. w i r e l e s s r o u t e r A router with a built-in wireless access point.

adapter and/or a m o d e m built in.

Chapter

4 : Computer

Networks

c o m m o n l y used to connect both wireless (via Wi-Fi)

A n o t h e r alternative for increasing the range o f

and wired (via Ethernet cables) devices to a network

a Wi-Fi

network

is using a higher-gain

(stronger)

and to connect that n e t w o r k to an Internet c o n n e c t i o n .

a n t e n n a . T h e M I M O a n t e n n a s used by many 8 0 2 . 1 I n

S o m e broadband modems today include wireless router

routers a l l o w for faster c o n n e c t i o n s and a greater

capabilities to create a wireless n e t w o r k and to provide

range than typically experienced by 8 0 2 . 1 l g wireless

Internet access using a single piece o f hardware. T o con-

n e t w o r k s , but sometimes this still isn't enough. Us-

nect just two L A N s together, a b r i d g e can be used. T h e

ing a n e t w o r k adapter designed f o r the router being

most c o m m o n use for a bridge in a h o m e network is to

used typically helps the n e t w o r k range to some e x t e n t ;

wirelessly c o n n e c t a wired device (such as a home au-

so does replacing the a n t e n n a on the router with a

dio/video system, D V R , or gaming console) to a home

higher-gain a n t e n n a or adding an external antenna to

network via a wireless c o n n e c t i o n .

a n e t w o r k i n g adapter, if the a d a p t e r contains an an-

Also, routers and other devices are used to connect

tenna c o n n e c t o r .

multiple devices t o a cellular n e t w o r k . F o r instance, 3 G mobile b r o a d b a n d routers are used to share a 3 G mobile wireless Internet c o n n e c t i o n with multiple devices (such as your cell p h o n e , personal computer, and handheld gaming device)—essentially creating a Wi-Fi hotspot that connects t o your 3 G Internet connection. Other devices can be used t o route cell phone calls over a b r o a d b a n d n e t w o r k in order to provide better cellular coverage while indoors.

Antennas W h e n b u y i n g a n e x t e r n a l a n t e n n a f o r a device, b e sure t h e y a r e c o m p a t i b l e . For instance, 802.11n MIMO

routers w i t h t h r e e a n t e n n a s cannot

use

a single a n t e n n a d e s i g n e d f o r 802.11g devices. T h e r e a r e also r a n g e e x t e n d e r s a n d

antennas

designed t o extend t h e r a n g e of a cellular netw o r k , such as t o b o o s t r e c e p t i o n i n s i d e a h o m e

Other Networking Hardware Additional networking h a r d w a r e is often needed to e x tend the range o f a n e t w o r k and to share networking

in o r d e r t o use a cell p h o n e as a p r i m a r y h o m e telephone.

media. R e p e a t e r s are devices t h a t amplify signals along a n e t w o r k . T h e y are necessary whenever signals have

A n t e n n a s c o m e in a variety o f f o r m a t s and are

possible

classified as either directional a n t e n n a s (antennas that

over the n e t w o r k i n g m e d i u m being used. Repeaters

c o n c e n t r a t e the signal in a p a r t i c u l a r area) or o m n i -

are available for b o t h wired a n d wireless n e t w o r k s ;

directional a n t e n n a s ( a n t e n n a s t h a t are equally effec-

repeaters for a wireless n e t w o r k are often called r a n g e

tive in all d i r e c t i o n s ) . D i r e c t i o n a l a n t e n n a s have a far-

e x t e n d e r s . R a n g e e x t e n d e r s usually c o n n e c t wirelessly

ther range than o m n i d i r e c t i o n a l a n t e n n a s , but a m o r e

to travel farther t h a n w o u l d be otherwise

t o the network and repeat the wireless signal to extend

limited delivery a r e a . T h e strength o f an antenna is

coverage of that n e t w o r k outside or to an additional

measured in decibels ( d B ) . F o r a p p l i c a t i o n s where a

floor o f a building, o r t o eliminate dead s p o t s — a r e a s

large W i - F i c o v e r a g e area is needed (such as in a large

within the n o r m a l n e t w o r k range that d o n ' t have cov-

business o r a h o t e l ) , high-gain o u t d o o r antennas c a n

erage. S o m e W D S (Wireless D i s t r i b u t i o n System) wire-

be used (in c o n j u n c t i o n with o u t d o o r range extenders

less access points can be used as range extenders by

and access p o i n t s , if needed) t o e n a b l e the n e t w o r k to

extending the n e t w o r k c o v e r a g e f r o m one access point

span a larger area than the h a r d w a r e would n o r m a l l y

to another.

allow. H i g h - s p e e d c o m m u n i c a t i o n s lines are expensive and a l m o s t a l w a y s have far g r e a t e r c a p a c i t y t h a n a

b r i d g e A device used to connect two LANs. r e p e a t e r A device on a network that amplifies signals. r a n g e e x t e n d e r A repeater for a wireless network. a n t e n n a A device used for receiving or sending radio signals and often used to increase the range of a network.

single device c a n use. B e c a u s e o f t h i s , signals f r o m multiple devices are o f t e n c o m b i n e d a n d sent t o gether to share a single c o m m u n i c a t i o n s m e d i u m . A m u l t i p l e x e r c o m b i n e s the t r a n s m i s s i o n s f r o m several different devices and sends t h e m as o n e m e s s a g e . R e gardless o f h o w the signals are s e n t , w h e n the c o m bined signal r e a c h e s its d e s t i n a t i o n , t h e

Chapter

4 : Computer

Networks

individual

Devices in a Network This is a n e x a m p l e of h o w t h e d e v i c e s discussed in this c h a p t e r m i g h t b e used in a n e t w o r k . A s s h o w n , m a n y d i f f e r e n t t y p e s o f h a r d w a r e a r e used t o c o n n e c t n e t w o r k i n g d e v i c e s .

DIAL-UP CUSTOMER

DIAL-UP CUSTOMER

DIAL-UP CUSTOMER

J )

SCHOOLS OR B U S I N E S S E S W I T H MULTIPLE LANS

m e s s a g e s are s e p a r a t e d f r o m o n e a n o t h e r . M u l t i p l e x -

Multiple analog signals can be sent at one time by using multiple frequencies, and multiple optical signals can be sent at one time by using multiple wavelengths.

ing is f r e q u e n t l y used w i t h

fiber-optic

cables

and

other high-capacity media to increase data throughp u t . F o r i n s t a n c e , if eight signals a r e m u l t i p l e x e d a n d sent t o g e t h e r o v e r e a c h fiber in o n e

fiber-optic

cable,

then the t h r o u g h p u t o f t h a t c a b l e is i n c r e a s e d by a f a c t o r o f eight. A c o n c e n t r a t o r is a type o f multiplexer t h a t c o m bines multiple messages a n d sends them via a single transmission medium in such a w a y that all the

Chapter

4 : Computer

N e tv

individual messages are simultaneously active, instead of being sent as a single c o m b i n e d message. F o r exam-1 pie, ISPs often use c o n c e n t r a t o r s t o c o m b i n e the signals from their conventional dial-up m o d e m customers to be sent over faster c o m m u n i c a t i o n s connections to their Internet destinations.

Practice It Practice It 4-1 H o m e networks—particularly wireless home n e t w o r k s — are becoming very c o m m o n . Suppose that you have a desktop computer and a n o t e b o o k computer, and you want to network the two computers wirelessly. You also want to use a printer with both computers. 1.

Quiz Yourself

Determine the hardware you will need to wirelessly network the t w o c o m p u t e r s and the printer.

1.

Define computer

network.

2.

Create a labeled sketch o f the n e t w o r k .

2.

H o w do GPS receivers determine the receiver's

3.

Create a list o f the hardware you need to acquire.

geographical location?

4.

Describe telecommuting.

4.

W h a t are the three m o s t c o m m o n network

network (excluding the cost o f the computers and the printer). R e c o r d the sources where you found

topologies? 5.

the prices.

W h a t is the difference between a client-server network and a peer-to-peer n e t w o r k ?

6.

Research the a p p r o x i m a t e c o s t o f the hardware to determine the overall cost o f creating the wireless

3.

5.

Prepare a one-page summary o f your

findings

that includes your sketch, and submit it to your

W h a t is a small n e t w o r k designed to c o n n e c t the

instructor.

personal devices for an individual (such as via Bluetooth) called?

Practice It 4-2

7.

W h a t is the world's largest W A N ?

As computers get smaller and devices such as cell phones

8.

W h a t is a virtual private n e t w o r k (VPN)?

have more capabilities, the differences between the vari-

9.

Describe the difference between digital and analog signals.

ous types o f computers are blurring. F o r example, most cell phones are capable o f surfing the W e b , sending and receiving email, as well as m a k i n g and receiving phone

1 0 . W h a t are the three m o s t c o m m o n types o f cables used to create wired n e t w o r k s ?

calls and text messages. 1.

Research W i - F i , W i M A X , and 3 G and 4 G net-

1 1 . W h a t is TCP/IP?

w o r k s . W h i c h type o f n e t w o r k s are used most

1 2 . W h a t is the most widely used standard for wired

often by cell phone users? W h y ?

networks?

2.

1 3 . W h a t is the current standard for wireless networks?

W h i c h type o f network do m o s t laptops use? W h a t a b o u t n e t b o o k s and slate computers?

3.

R e s e a r c h the c o s t o f 3 G d a t a p l a n s with at least t h r e e cell p h o n e c o m p a n i e s . W h a t is the

1 4 . W h a t is an emerging wireless n e t w o r k i n g stan-

a v e r a g e c o s t ? F i n d at l e a s t o n e c o m p a n y t h a t

dard t h a t is faster a n d h a s a g r e a t e r range t h a n

o f f e r s a 4 G d a t a p l a n . H o w d o e s the a v e r a g e

Wi-Fi?

c o s t o f the 3 G d a t a p l a n s c o m p a r e to the c o s t

1 5 . W h a t is Bluetooth?

o f the 4 G d a t a p l a n ?

1 6 . W h a t is a switch?

4.

If you need to transfer a large file from your cell phone or slate computer to a n o t h e r computer,

1 7 . W h a t does a router do?

which type o f network would be the fastest? H o w

1 8 . W h a t is a repeater?

much faster? W h a t conditions might affect download time? 5.

Prepare a one-page summary that answers these questions, and submit it to your instructor.

Chapter

4 : Computer

Networks

2.

On Your Own

for illegal purposes, should the o r g a n i z a t i o n o r person w h o set up the P2P n e t w o r k be respon-

On Your Own 4-1 Internet peer-to-peer (P2P) networking involves sharing files a n d other resources directly with other c o m -

sible? E x p l a i n your answer. 3.

e x c h a n g e d via an Internet P2P n e t w o r k , some content

W o u l d you w a n t to use an Internet P 2 P n e t w o r k ? W h y or w h y not?

puters via the Internet. While some c o n t e n t is legally 4.

(such as movies and music) is exchanged illegally. 1.

If a P 2 P n e t w o r k set up for legitimate use is used

Use the W e b to research m o r e a b o u t B i t T o r r e n t and Gnutella's LimeWire. D o y o u t h i n k these are legitimate P 2 P networks? W h y o r w h y n o t ?

Should Internet P2P networks be regulated to ensure they are used for only legal activities? W h y

5.

Prepare a one-page summary t h a t a n s w e r s these questions, and submit it t o y o u r instructor.

o r w h y not?

ADDITIONAL STUDYTOOLS

Chapter 4 IN THE BOOK

ONLINE

^

Complete end-of-chapter exercises

^

Complete additional end-of-chapter exercises

^

Study tear-out Chapter Review Card

^

Take practice quiz to prepare for tests

^

Review key term flash cards (online, printable, and audio)

^

Play "Beat the Clock" and "Memory" to quiz yourself

^

Watch the videos "How to Select a Wireless Router," "How to Set Up a Wireless Network," "How to Share a Printer over a Network," and "WiMAX vs. Wi-Fi"

Chapter

4:

Computer

Networks

1001010101

Networks and the Internet -

Introducing the Internet and Email Learning Objectives After studying the material in this chapter,

Introduction

you will be able to:

With the prominence o f the Internet in our personal and professional lives today, it is hard to believe that there was a time not t o o long ago when few people had even heard o f the Internet, let alone used it. But technology is continually evolving. In fact, it is only relatively recently that technology has evolved enough to allow the use of multimedia applications—such as downloading music and movies, watching T V and videos, and playing multimedia interactive g a m e s — o v e r the Internet to become everyday activities. Today, Internet

and World

Wide

Web are household w o r d s , a n d , in many ways, they have redefined h o w people think a b o u t c o m p u t e r s , c o m m u n i c a t i o n s , and the availability o f

LO5.I

Understand h o w the Internet

evolved

LO5.2

Describe c o m m o n Internet

LO5.3

Set up your computer to use

LO5.4

Use Microsoft Internet Explorer

communication methods and activities

the Internet

LO5.5

U

s

e

W i n d o w s Mail

news and information. Despite the popularity o f the Internet, however, many users c a n n o t answer some important basic questions a b o u t it. W h a t makes up the Internet? Is it the same thing as the World Wide Web? H o w did the Internet begin, and where is it heading? H o w can the Internet be used to find specific information? This chapter addresses these types of questions and m o r e .

LO5.1

Evolution of the Internet

T

he Internet is a worldwide collection o f separate, but interconnected, networks accessed

daily by millions o f people using a variety of devices to obtain information, dissemi-

nate information, access entertainment, or c o m m u n i c a t e with others. Although Internet

become

has

a household w o r d only during the past t w o decades or so, it has actually operated in

one form o r a n o t h e r for much longer than that. A R P A N E T The predecessor of the

From ARPANET to Internet2

Internet, named after the Advanced

T h e U.S. Department o f Defense Advanced R e -

Research Projects Agency (ARPA), which

search Projects Agency (ARPA) created A R P A N E T

sponsored its development.

in 1 9 6 9 . O n e objective of the A R P A N E T project

Chapter

5: Introducing

the Internet

and

Email

CHAPTER

In only 20years, Internet and World Wide Web have become household words and ubiquitous tools in our personal, social, and business lives and activities.

was t o create a computer network that would allow researchers located in different places t o c o m m u n i c a t e with each other. A n o t h e r objective w a s t o build a c o m p u t e r network capable o f sending o r receiving data over a variety o f paths to ensure that network c o m m u n i c a t i o n s could c o n t i n u e even if part o f the network w a s destroyed, such as in a nuclear attack or by a natural disaster. Initially, A R P A N E T connected four supercomputers and enabled researchers at a f e w dozen a c a d e m i c institutions t o c o m m u n i c a t e with each other and with government agencies. E x h i b i t 5 - 1 is a sketch o f A R P A N E T that w a s drawn in 1 9 6 9 . As the project grew during the next decade, students were granted access t o A R P A N E T as hundreds o f college and university n e t w o r k s were connected t o it. These networks consisted o f a mixture o f different c o m puters s o , over the years, protocols were developed f o r tying this m i x o f computers and netw o r k s together, for transferring data over the n e t w o r k , and f o r ensuring that data was transferred intact. Additional

net-

w o r k s soon connected t o A R P A N E T , and

began with an experimental

this i n t e r n e t — o r network o f n e t w o r k s —

project called A R P A N E

Internet.

r

eventually evolved into the present-day

Chapter

5: Introducing

the Internet

and

Email

E x h i b i t 5-1

met

Hand-drawn sketch of ARPANET

today is t h e result of the evolution o f ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ reation of the ^ W i d e M (WWW).

1

decades because (1) it required a c o m p u t e r and (2) it was hard to use (see the left image in E x h i b i t 5 - 2 ) . As always, however, c o m p u t e r and networking technology improved and new applications quickly followed. Then,

in

1989,

named T i m T

H

e

AtfA

a

researcher

Berners-Lee

pro-

posed the idea o f the World

******

W i d e W e b ( W W W ) . He envisioned the W o r l d Wide Web as

PEC

2

a way to organize information

Wdir 100 port cofwand successful 300 opening ASCII mode data connection for file list EH15 readie.txt Hon Apr 10 1:S2:04 1110 322S1 pkzip.exe Tues Sept L 0

dustry, g o v e r n m e n t , a n d the

ITCRC;

•

mSb?l iis-zip Sun Jan 17 ID:]

rfc M2D transfer complete ftp>cd rfc SDD cud command successful ftp>get rfc-contents-txt co itents.txt

international

community

that is dedicated t o the development o f r e v o l u t i o n a r y Internet t e c h n o l o g i e s . Internet2 uses h i g h - p e r f o r m a n c e n e t w o r k s linking over 2 0 0 m e m b e r institutions t o deploy and test n e w n e t w o r k applications

and

capabili-

ties. H o w e v e r , the I n t e r n e t 2 EARLY 1990S

n e t w o r k is n o t a n e w net-

TODAY

w o r k designed t o

eventu-

ally replace the I n t e r n e t — i t is simply

a

research

and

Although there is no precise definition, Web 2 . 0 generally

development tool t o help create t e c h n o l o g i e s t h a t en-

refers to applications and services that use the Web as a

sure the Internet in the future can handle t o m o r r o w ' s

platform t o deliver rich applications that enable people to

applications. M u c h o f I n t e r n e t ! research is f o c u s e d on

collaborate, socialize, and share information online. Some

speed. F o r instance, the Internet2 L a n d Speed R e c o r d is

Web 2 . 0 applications include cloud computing, social net-

an ongoing contest for the highest-bandwidth e n d - t o -

working sites, podcasts, blogs, and wikis.

end n e t w o r k . T h e current record is an average speed o f

T h e W e b is only part o f the Internet, but it is by far the m o s t widely used part. Today, m o s t c o m p a n i e s

9 . 0 8 G b p s while transferring 2 0 . 4 2 T B o f d a t a a c r o s s a b o u t 3 0 , 0 0 0 miles o f n e t w o r k .

regard their use o f the Internet and their World Wide W e b presence as indispensable competitive

business

tools, and m a n y individuals view the I n t e r n e t — a n d es-

The Internet Community Today

pecially the W e b — a s a vital research, c o m m u n i c a t i o n s ,

T h e Internet c o m m u n i t y today consists o f individuals, businesses, and a variety o f o r g a n i z a t i o n s located

and e n t e r t a i n m e n t medium.

t h r o u g h o u t the w o r l d . Virtually a n y o n e with a c o m puter o r other W e b - e n a b l e d device c a n be p a r t o f the Internet, either as a user or as a supplier o f i n f o r m a t i o n

The Internet Is Not the World Wide Web E v e n t h o u g h m a n y p e o p l e use t h e t e r m s a n d Web

Internet

interchangeably, they are not t h e same

o r services. M o s t members o f the Internet c o m m u n i t y fall into one or m o r e of the following g r o u p s : ^

U s e r s — P e o p l e w h o use the Internet t o retrieve c o n t e n t or perform online activities, such as t o l o o k up a telephone number, read the day's news

t h i n g . Technically, t h e I n t e r n e t is t h e physical n e t w o r k , a n d t h e W e b is t h e c o l l e c t i o n of W e b p a g e s accessible o v e r t h a t n e t w o r k . A m a j o r i t y o f I n t e r n e t a c t i v i t i e s t o d a y t a k e p l a c e via W e b p a g e s , b u t I n t e r n e t resources o t h e r t h a n t h e W e b a r e n o t accessed via a W e b b r o w s e r . For instance, files c a n b e u p l o a d e d a n d d o w n l o a d e d using a n FTP (File Transfer P r o t o c o l ) p r o g r a m a n d c o n v e n t i o n a l e m a i l c a n b e accessed using a n e m a i l p r o g r a m .

e Internet, a c c o r d i n g t o t h e P e w Internet & A m e r i c a n Life Project, is used by approximately 75 percent o f the U . S . population.

/

headlines or top stories, b r o w s e through an online c a t a l o g , make an online p u r c h a s e , d o w n l o a d a

^

^

Application service providers (ASPs)—The c o m p a n i e s that manage and distribute Web-based

music file, watch an online video, m a k e a p h o n e

software services to customers over the Internet.

call, or send an email message.

Instead o f providing access t o the Internet like ISPs d o , ASPs provide access t o software applica-

I n t e r n e t service p r o v i d e r s (ISPs)—Businesses or other organizations, including telephone, cable,

tions via the Internet. C o m m o n ASP applications

and satellite c o m p a n i e s , that provide Internet ac-

for businesses include office suites, collaboration

cess to others, typically for a fee. Exhibit 5 - 3 shows

and c o m m u n i c a t i o n s s o f t w a r e , accounting pro-

the logos o f some o f these c o m p a n i e s . Regardless

grams, and e-commerce s o f t w a r e .

o f their delivery m e t h o d and geographical coverage, ISPs are the o n r a m p t o the Internet, providing

^

I n f r a s t r u c t u r e c o m p a n i e s — T h e enterprises that own or operate the paths or " r o a d w a y s " along

their subscribers with access t o the World Wide

which Internet data travels, such as the Internet

Web, email, and other Internet resources. Some

backbone and the c o m m u n i c a t i o n s networks con-

ISPs also provide proprietary online services avail-

nected to it. Examples o f infrastructure companies

able only t o their subscribers.

include conventional and mobile phone companies, cable companies, and satellite Internet providers.

E x h i b i t 5-3 ISP logos

^

H a r d w a r e a n d s o f t w a r e c o m p a n i e s — T h e organizations that m a k e and distribute the products

^at&t

used with the Internet and Internet activities. For e x a m p l e , companies that create o r sell the software used in c o n j u n c t i o n with the Internet, such

verizon

as W e b browsers, email p r o g r a m s , e-commerce and multimedia software, and W e b development

(comcast.

tools, fall into this category. S o , t o o , do the com-

HUGHES

panies that m a k e the h a r d w a r e , such as network adapters, m o d e m s , cables, routers, servers, com-

Connect to the future:

puters, and mobile p h o n e s , for instance, that is

clearwre

0

E a r t h Link'

used with the Internet. ^

G o v e r n m e n t s — T h e ruling bodies of countries that can pass laws limiting both the information made

wireless broadband

available via Web servers located in a particular country and the access individuals residing in that country have to the Internet. F o r example, in France,

Use of the AT&T logo is granted under permission by AT&T Intellectual Property.; Courtesy of Verizon

Communications; Comcast; Hughes Network Systems, LLC; EarthLink, Inc.; and Clearwire

it is illegal to sell items or post online content related to racist groups or activities. In China, tight controls are imposed on what information is published on

I n t e r n e t c o n t e n t p r o v i d e r s — T h e suppliers o f the i n f o r m a t i o n t h a t is available through the

Web servers located in China, as well as on the in-

Internet. Internet c o n t e n t providers can be c o m -

formation available to its citizens. And in the United

mercial businesses, nonprofit organizations,

States, anything illegal offline is illegal online.

educational institutions, individuals, and m o r e .

^

K e y I n t e r n e t o r g a n i z a t i o n s — O t h e r organizations that are responsible for m a n y aspects o f the

I n t e r n e t service p r o v i d e r (ISP) A business or other organization that provides Internet access to others, typically for a fee.

Internet. F o r e x a m p l e , the Internet Society ( I S O C ) provides leadership in addressing issues that may impact the future o f the Internet. It also oversees

I n t e r n e t c o n t e n t p r o v i d e r A person or an organization that

the groups responsible for Internet infrastructure

a p p l i c a t i o n s e r v i c e p r o v i d e r (ASP) A company that manages

that can be used and h o w Internet addresses

provides Internet content.

standards, such as determining the p r o t o c o l s

and distributes software-based services over the Internet.

are constructed. I C A N N (Internet C o r p o r a t i o n for Assigned N a m e s and N u m b e r s ) c o o r d i n a t e s

Chapter

5: Introducing

the Internet

and

Email

Who's in Charge of the Internet and the World Wide Web? O n e r e m a r k a b l e characteristic of b o t h t h e I n t e r n e t a n d

and coordinating communications a m o n g

W o r l d W i d e W e b is t h a t t h e y a r e n o t o w n e d by a n y

networks connected t o the Internet. G o v e r n -

p e r s o n o r business, a n d n o s i n g l e p e r s o n , business, or

m e n t s in e a c h c o u n t r y

o r g a n i z a t i o n is in c h a r g e . E a c h n e t w o r k c o n n e c t e d t o

r e g u l a t e t h e c o n t e n t a n d use of t h e I n t e r n e t

t h e I n t e r n e t is privately o w n e d a n d m a n a g e d i n d i v i d u -

w i t h i n t h e i r b o r d e r s , as a l l o w e d by t h e i r l a w s .

have the p o w e r

th to

ally by t h a t n e t w o r k ' s a d m i n i s t r a t o r , a n d t h e p r i m a r y

However,

i n f r a s t r u c t u r e t h a t m a k e s u p t h e I n t e r n e t b a c k b o n e is

stacles g e t t i n g l e g i s l a t i o n passed i n t o l a w — l e t

legislators o f t e n f a c e serious o b -

t y p i c a l l y o w n e d by c o m m u n i c a t i o n s c o m p a n i e s , such as

a l o n e g e t t i n g it e n f o r c e d . M a k i n g g o v e r n m e n t a l

t e l e p h o n e a n d c a b l e c o m p a n i e s . T h e closest t h e I n t e r -

t r o l e v e n h a r d e r is t h e " b o m b p r o o f " d e s i g n o f t h e I n -

n e t c o m e s t o h a v i n g a g o v e r n i n g b o d y is a g r o u p o f o r -

t e r n e t itself. If a g o v e r n m e n t tries t o block access t o o r

g a n i z a t i o n s , i n c l u d i n g t h e ISOC, I C A N N , a n d W 3 C , t h a t

f r o m a specific c o u n t r y or W e b site, f o r e x a m p l e , users

a r e i n v o l v e d w i t h issues such as e s t a b l i s h i n g t h e p r o -

c a n use a t h i r d party, such as a n i n d i v i d u a l l o c a t e d in

con-

tocols used o n t h e Internet, making recommendations

a n o t h e r c o u n t r y or a d i f f e r e n t W e b site, t o c i r c u m v e n t

for changes, and encouraging cooperation

t h e block.

between

activities related to the Internet's naming system,

G o o g l e T a l k ; Web-based messaging services such as

such as IP address allocation and domain n a m e

M e e b o . c o m or W e b versions o f A I M , Y a h o o ! M e s s e n -

m a n a g e m e n t . T h e World W i d e W e b C o n s o r t i u m

ger, or G o o g l e T a l k ; or other online c o m m u n i c a t i o n s

( W 3 C ) is a group of over 4 5 0 organizations dedi-

programs that support instant messaging. O r i g i n a l l y a

c a t e d t o developing new p r o t o c o l s and specifica-

popular c o m m u n i c a t i o n s method a m o n g friends, I M

tions t o p r o m o t e the evolution o f the W e b and

has also b e c o m e a valuable business t o o l . I n s t a n t mes-

t o ensure its interoperability. In addition, many

saging capabilities are also sometimes integrated into

colleges and universities support Internet research

W e b pages, such as to ask questions o f a c u s t o m e r ser-

and m a n a g e blocks of the Internet's resources.

vice representative or to start a c o n v e r s a t i o n with o n e o f your friends via a social networking site; this type o f messaging is sometimes referred to as c h a t .

LO5.2

I

Beyond Browsing and Email

Text m e s s a g i n g is a f o r m o f messaging frequently

used by mobile phone users. Also called S h o r t M e s s a g e Service o r S M S , text messaging is used t o send short

n addition to basic browsing and email, m a n y other activities c a n take place via the Internet. Although

originally the programs that supported these various types o f online c o m m u n i c a t i o n s were dedicated to a single t a s k , today's programs often can be used for a variety o f types o f online c o m m u n i c a t i o n s .

^

^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ Instant messaging ( I M ) uses presence technology, w h i c h allows one c o m p u t i n g device t o

Other Types of Online Communications

identify the status o f another.

I n s t a n t m e s s a g i n g ( I M ) allows you to e x c h a n g e real-

time typed messages with people on your buddy l i s t — i n s t a n t m e s s a g i n g (IM) A way of exchanging real-time

a list of individuals such as family, friends, and business associates w h o m you specify. Instant

( I M s ) can be sent via computers and mobile phones using

installed

Windows

Live

messaging Messenger,

programs Yahoo!

such

typed messages with other individuals.

messages as

AIM,

Messenger,

t e x t m e s s a g i n g A way of exchanging real-time typed messages with other individuals via a cellular network and, typically, cell phones.

or

Chapter

5 : Introducing

the

(less than 1 6 0 characters) text-based messages via a cel-

from c o m p u t e r t o computer, such as by starting a voice

lular network. T h e messages are typically sent t o the

conversation with an online buddy using an I M pro-

recipient via his or her m o b i l e p h o n e number.

gram and a headset or m i c r o p h o n e connected to the

T w e e t i n g , sometimes referred t o as microblogging,

computer. C o m p u t e r - t o - c o m p u t e r calls, such as via the

is a free service that allows members (both individu-

popular Skype service, as well as via messaging pro-

als and businesses) to post short (up to 1 4 0 characters)

grams that support voice calls, are generally free. Often

updates—called t w e e t s — a b o u t what they are doing at

calls c a n be received from o r m a d e t o conventional o r

any moment. T h e updates can be sent via text message,

mobile phones f o r a small fee, such as t w o cents per

I M , email, or even X b o x (see Exhibit 5 - 4 ) , and are posted

minute for domestic calls.

to the member's Twitter.com page. Tweet updates can

M o r e p e r m a n e n t VoIP s e t u p s — s o m e t i m e s referred

also be sent t o your friends' mobile phones if they have

to as digital voice, b r o a d b a n d p h o n e , o r Internet phone

set up their accounts t o follow you via text. Members can

service—are designed to replace c o n v e n t i o n a l landline

also search the Twitter W e b site to find tweets o f interest.

phones

in h o m e s

and businesses. VoIP

is offered

through some ISPs, such as c a b l e , telephone, and E x h i b i t 5-4

mobile

Twitter

phone

companies;

it

is

also

through

offered dedicated

VoIP providers, such as

Vonage.

Perma-

nent VoIP setups require

a

broadband

Internet

connection

and

a VoIP

phone

adapter, also

called

an

phone

Internet

adapter,

that

between

a

goes

conven-

tional phone and a b r o a d b a n d router, as shown in Exhibit 5 - 5 . Once

your

phone

calls

are

routed

through your phone adapter

and router

t o the Internet, they travel t o the recipient's

phone,

which

c a n be another VoIP Internet telephony is the original industry term for

phone, a mobile p h o n e , o r a landline phone. VoIP

the process o f placing telephone calls over the Internet.

phone adapters are typically designed for a specific

Today, the standard term f o r placing telephone calls

VoIP provider. W i t h these m o r e permanent VoIP set-

over the Internet o r any other type o f data network is

ups, most users switching f r o m landline phone service

V o i c e o v e r I n t e r n e t P r o t o c o l ( V o I P ) and it can t a k e m a n y

can keep their existing telephone number.

forms. At its simplest level, VoIP calls c a n take place

T h e biggest advantage o f VoIP is cost savings, such as unlimited local and long-distance calls for as little as $ 2 5 per m o n t h , or cable and VoIP services bundled

t w e e t i n g Sending short status updates about your

together for a b o u t $ 5 0 per m o n t h . O n e o f the biggest

current activities via the Twitter service.

disadvantages o f VoIP at the present time is that it does

V o i c e o v e r I n t e r n e t P r o t o c o l (VoIP) The process of

not function during a power outage o r if your Internet

placing telephone calls via the Internet.

connection goes down.

W e b c o n f e r e n c e A face-to-face meeting taking place via the Web.

W e b conferences typically take place via a personal computer or mobile phone and are used by businesses

Chapter

5: Introducing

the Internet

and

Email

E x h i b i t 5-5

How VoIP works

your Face-book p a g e t o the individuals you

identift.

W///MWMMM/

THE INTERNET.

locations, as well as for e m p l o y e e training, sales presentations, c u s t o m e r s u p p o r t , a n d

1. A conventional phone is plugged into a VoIP adapter, which is connected to a broadband modem.

3HB j

other business applications. W e b i n a r s (Web seminars) are similar to W e b conferences, but typically have a designated presenter and an audience. A l t h o u g h interaction with the audience is usually included, a Webinar is typically m o r e o n e - w a y c o m m u n i c a t i o n than a W e b c o n f e r e n c e . A social n e t w o r k i n g s i t e c a n

. Calls coming from the VoIP phone travel over the Internet to the recipient's phone.

be l o o s e l y

defined as any site that creates a c o m m u nity o f individuals w h o c a n c o m m u n i c a t e with and/or share i n f o r m a t i o n another.

Some

examples

are

with

one

MySpace

and F a c e b o o k , which a l l o w users t o p o s t

and individuals. Basic Web conferences, such as a video

information

call between individuals as in E x h i b i t 5 - 6 , can be per-

M e e t u p . c o m , which connects people with

f o r m e d via any online c o m m u n i c a t i o n s p r o g r a m , such

hobbies and interests; video sharing sites like Y o u T u b e ;

as an instant messaging program, that supports video

and p h o t o sharing sites like Flickr and F o t k i . Social

p h o n e calls. Business Web conferences that require mul-

networking can be performed via personal c o m p u t e r s ,

tiple participants or other c o m m u n i c a t i o n tools, such

though the use o f mobile social n e t w o r k i n g — s o c i a l net-

as a shared w h i t e b o a r d or the ability for attendees to

w o r k s accessed with a mobile phone or o t h e r m o b i l e

share the c o n t e n t on their c o m p u t e r screens, may need

device—is growing rapidly. In fact, J u p i t e r

to use W e b conferencing software or services instead.

predicts the n u m b e r of active m o b i l e social n e t w o r k -

Business W e b conferencing is often used for meetings

ing users will rise from 5 4 million t o d a y to 7 3 0 mil-

between individuals located in different geographical

about

themselves

for

others

to

read;

common

Research

lion in five years, and M y S p a c e expects half o f its traffic to c o m e from mobile devices within a few years. S o m e reasons for this include that m o s t individuals c a r r y a

E x h i b i t 5-6

Web conferencing

mobile p h o n e with them all the t i m e , m a n y individuals like to c o m m u n i c a t e with others via the W e b while they are on the g o , and the use o f a m o b i l e p h o n e enables location applications to be integrated into the social networking experience. Social networking sites are used m o s t often t o c o m municate with existing friends. F a c e b o o k , for instance (shown in E x h i b i t 5 - 7 ) , allows you to post p h o t o s , videos, music, and other content. Y o u c a n also c h a t with

W e b i n a r A seminar presented via the Web. social n e t w o r k i n g site A site that enables a community of individuals to communicate and share information.

Chapter

5: Introducing

the Internet

and

Email

E x h i b i t 5-7

Social networking sites

MARK ZUCKCRBCRG • Press t h e E n t e r key.

Internet E x p l o r e r adds http://

to the

U R L , and then displays the page in the b r o w s e r window.

and then click

dress b a r changes t o the address for t h a t page. ^

T

j

p

.

Y

q

uc

a

n a

|

s

Q

c

|

j

c

k

t h e G o t o b u t t o n «•> on t h e Address bar

Visiting Preuiously Viewed Web Pages

to display t h e p a g e

After you visit a W e b page during a b r o w s e r session,

indicated by the URL.

you can use the B a c k and F o r w a r d b u t t o n s t o the left o f the Address b a r t o move t o the m o s t recently viewed

T h e h o m e page for

W e b pages. Y o u c a n also quickly g o t o t h e start page

the N A S A W e b site appears, and the n a m e o f the

for your b r o w s e r by clicking the H o m e b u t t o n o n t h e

W e b page appears on the t a b and in the title bar.

C o m m a n d bar. O n c e y o u have visited a W e b page by typing its U R L in the Address bar, you can start typing the U R L ,

The Dynamic Web

and a list o f W e b sites you previously visited t h a t c o n -

The

d r o p - d o w n list b e l o w the Address bar.

Web

is a d y n a m i c m e d i u m , so t h e screen-

tain the string o f characters you are typing appears in a

shots o f W e b p a g e s s h o w n in t h i s b o o k w i l l m o s t likely d i f f e r f r o m t h e p a g e s y o u s e e w h e n t h e Web

p a g e s a p p e a r in y o u r b r o w s e r w i n d o w . Y o u

l o a d To copy a Web page from a server to a computer,

s h o u l d still b e a b l e t o i d e n t i f y t h e e l e m e n t s c a l l e d o u t in t h e f i g u r e s .

h o m e p a g e The main page on a Web site.

C h a p t e r

5:

I n t r o d u c i n g

t h e

I n t e r n e t

a n d

E m a i l

Y o u

c a n c l i c k t h e

b u t t o n

Go to previously viewed Web pages.

t o v i e w

Q u i c k

t h u m b n a i l s o f all

ft

THE left of the A D D R E S S BAR, click the B a c k b u t t o n @ . T h e previously viewed Web p a g e — the NASA Web site h o m e p a g e — a p p e a r s in the browser window. N o w the F o r w a r d button is

a N e w T a b . W h e n you open a n e w t a b by right-clicking a

available.

link, the current tab and the new t a b create a t a b g r o u p ,

f W ) T o the left o f the Address bar, click the F o r w a r d button Q

. T h e A b o u t N A S A page loads again.

T h e F o r w a r d button is again unavailable (dimmed) because there are n o m o r e pages after the current page in the history list. I O n the C o m m a n d bar, click the H o m e b u t t o n [||

which is a collection o f related t a b s . W h e n multiple tabs are open, the tab that appears t o be on t o p is the active t a b . T o m a k e another tab the active t a b and display the Web page on that tab in the b r o w s e r window, click the tab. Finally, you can close a t a b for a W e b page that n o longer interests you.

Your browser's start page appears in the browser

ACTIVITY

window. ) C l i c k in the A d d r e s s b a r , and then type n. A list o f U R L s beginning w i t h n t h a t were visited using

Use tabs. \% T o the right o f the N A S A - H o m e t a b , point to the

the b r o w s e r a p p e a r s b e l o w the Address bar. See

N e w Tab b u t t o n . T h e N e w T a b b u t t o n

Exhibit 5 - 1 9 .

on it.

| In the list, click http://www.nasa.gov/. T h e N A S A

I Click the N e w T a b b u t t o n

appears

A new tab appears in

the browser window. In the Address bar, the text

W e b site home page appears again.

" a b o u t : T a b s " appears. T h i s t e x t appears in the

Exhibit 5-19 List of previously visited Web pages

U

Address bar whenever a new, blank t a b is created.

[http://www.nasa. gov/ i Favorites w < "1 ^ http://nascar.corr com/

previously visited W e b pages beginning with n (your list might differ)

P

Love what Bing can bring'' Take it with you everywhere you go on the web

Using Tabs

T h e text in the Address b a r is selected. See

T a b s allow you to display multiple W e b pages in the same browser window. W i t h t a b b e d browsing, you can

Exhibit 5 - 2 0 . | Type w w w . u s a . g o v and then press the Enter key.

create a tab for each W e b page you visit that you might

T h e h o m e page for the USA.gov W e b site appears

want to return to quickly. T o open a new t a b , you click

in the new t a b .

the N e w T a b button t o the right o f the current tabs, or right-click a link on a W e b page, and then click O p e n in

I Scroll down to the bottom of the page. Right-click the

t a b g r o u p A collection of related tabs,

Contact Us link, and

a c t i v e t a b The tab that appears to be on top in a browser window.

then on the shortcut

C h a p t e r

5:

I n t r o d u c i n g

the

I n t e r n e t

and

menu, click O p e n in

Email

^k, T i p : Y o u c a n also press a n d h o l d t h e Ctrl k e y w h i l e y o u c l i c k a link to o p e n t h e linked p a g e in a n e w t a b .

E x h i b i t 5-20

New, blank tab in Internet Explorer window

NewTab Favorites -

fT

^

Suggested Sites •

button

G e t More Add-ons *

^ ! New Tab

© NASA - Home

Page

Safety

Tools •

QuickTabs button Browsls with InPrivate

REOPEN CLOSED TABS View tabs that you've closed £ince starting Internet Explorer.

n e w t a b in

Browse the\web without storing data about your browsing session. Open an InPrivat\ Browsing window

front of N A S A • H o m e tab

USE AN ACCELERATE

C

|

Open a web service with 1 .

O

S

E

T

A

B

fed

from a webpaqe.

button

Show copied text FP Blog with Windows Live Map with Bing T=> Search with Bing •fe Translate with Bing

|

Learn more about tabs and tab shortcuts. Accelerators, and InPrivate Browsing

* . Internet | Protected Mode: On

N e w T a b . A new tab opens to the right of the current tab displaying Contact Us: USA.gov as the Web

[]P

LlOOtt -

Right-click the NASA - H o m e t a b , and then on the shortcut menu, click Close O t h e r Tabs. T h e USA.gov

page title on the tab. The USA.gov tab and the Con-

tab closes, and the N A S A - H o m e t a b b e c o m e s the

tact Us: USA.gov tabs are the same color to indicate

current t a b .

they are in the same tab group. I Click the C o n t a c t Us: U S A . g o v t a b . The

C o n t a c t Us page b e c o m e s the active tab in the window.

^ K , T i p : Y o u c a n click t h e

Using Search Sites

Q u i c k T a b s b u t t o n |OO|

Finding

t o t h e left o f t h e first

through the p o w e r o f search engines, a v a i l a b l e

tab to see thumbnail

search sites. S e a r c h sites are W e b sites designed

i m a g e s of o p e n tabs,

information

on the I n t e r n e t

is m a d e

p o p u l a r search engines are G o o g l e , Bing (the

USA.gov t a b , point

a thumbnail to switch

search engine f o r Internet E x p l o r e r

to the C l o s e T a b

to that tab.

w h i c h is n o w p o w e r e d by M i c r o s o f t Bing

button [ X L The

specifi-

cally t o help you find i n f o r m a t i o n o n the W e b .

a n d t h e n y o u c a n click

I O n the C o n t a c t U s :

easier

through

8 ) , and

Some default

Yahoo!,

technology.

but-

ton changes to [ X I C l i c k the Close Tab b u t t o n

T h e C o n t a c t Us:

s e a r c h site A Web site designed to help users search

USA.gov tab closes. Because there is only one t a b

for Web pages that match specified keywords or selected categories.

left in the tab group that had been colored green, the JJSA.gov

tab is n o longer colored.

Chapter

5:

Introducing

the

Internet

and

Email

search sites use a s e a r c h

Most

engine—a

software

E x h i b i t 5-21

program—

Using a search site

in c o n j u n c t i o n with a huge d a t a base o f i n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t W e b

v ga

' *Go g.,-W,ndow, Internet fepiore, 0

|

pages t o help visitors find W e b

•

google.com

ft - B '

pages that c o n t a i n t h e i n f o r m a -

• I- '

P»gei^

tion they are seeking. Search

site

databases

Type appropriate keywords in the search box to display the search results.

are

updated o n a regular basis; f o r example, G o o g l e

estimates

that

its entire index is updated a b o u t once per m o n t h . Typically, this o c curs using small, a u t o m a t e d p r o grams (often called spiders o r w e bcrawlers) that use the hyperlinks located o n W e b pages t o j u m p continually At

each

from

page t o page.

W e b page, t h e spider

program records i m p o r t a n t data about the page into t h e search site's d a t a b a s e , such as t h e page's U R L , its title, the k e y w o r d s that appear

frequently o n t h e page,

and the keywords a n d descriptive information added t o t h e page's code

by the W e b page

author

when the page was created. In ad-

Type In the name of your favorite artist, song or composer and well create a radio station featuring that mustc and more like it.

dition t o spider p r o g r a m s , search

lartist o

site databases also o b t a i n information from W e b page

authors

w h o submit W e b page U R L s a n d keywords

associated

Click the hyperlink for a Web page in the search results to display that page.

with

»> i Internet | Protected Mode: Off

their

W e b sites to the search site. T o conduct a search, type a p propriate k e y w o r d s — o n e o r m o r e words describing w h a t you are looking f o r — i n t o a search b o x on a search site. Multiple keywords are sometimes called a search p h r a s e . T h e site's search engine then uses those keywords t o return a list o f links t o W e b pages (called hits) that match your search criteria (see Exhibit 5 - 2 1 ) . Search sites differ in determining h o w close a

Evaluating Web Sites W h e n y o u g a t h e r i n f o r m a t i o n f r o m W e b pages, y o u n e e d t o d e t e r m i n e if t h e i n f o r m a t i o n c a n be trusted. Y o u should e v a l u a t e b o t h t h e author a n d t h e source t o d e c i d e if t h e i n f o r m a t i o n c a n b e c o n s i d e r e d r e l i a b l e a n d w h e t h e r it is biased. B e

s e a r c h e n g i n e A software program used by a search

sure t o also check f o r a d a t e t o see h o w u p t o d a t e

site to retrieve matching Web pages from a search database. k e y w o r d A word typed in a search box on a search site or other Web page to locate information related to that keyword.

is i m p o r t a n t , t r y t o v e r i f y t h e i n f o r m a t i o n w i t h a s e c o n d source.

hit A link that matches search criteria in a search site.

5:

I n t r o d u c i n g

o l d . If y o u w i l l b e using t h e i n f o r m a t i o n in a r e port, paper, o r o t h e r d o c u m e n t in w h i c h accuracy

s e a r c h p h r a s e Multiple keywords.

C h a p t e r

t h e i n f o r m a t i o n i s — m a n y o n l i n e articles a r e y e a r s

the

I n t e r n e t

a n d

E m a i l

Setting a Search Engine in Internet Explorer

^ T I P : IF T H E SEARCH

Search the Internet

P H R A S E Y O U W A N T TO

using a search engine.

USE APPEARS IN THE

I T o the right o f the

Y o u c a n c h a n g e t h e search e n g i n e used w i t h t h e S e a r c h b o x in I n t e r n e t Explorer. To d o this, click t h e S e a r c h box a r r o w , a n d t h e n click F i n d M o r e P r o v i d e r s . T h e I n t e r n e t Explorer A d d - o n s G a l l e r y W e b p a g e a p p e a r s listing search e n g i n e s y o u c a n

S E L E C T IT A N D E X E C U T E

the S e a r c h b o x , and

THE SEARCH.

then type live g r e e n .

A list o f suggestions for completing the search phrase appears. See E x h i b i t 5 - 2 2 .

a d d . Click t h e search e n g i n e y o u w a n t t o use, a n d t h e n click A d d t o I n t e r n e t Explorer. This o p e n s

LIST, Y O U C A N CLICK IT TO

Address bar, click in

E x h i b i t 5-22

Using the Search box

t h e A d d S e a r c h P r o v i d e r d i a l o g box. If y o u w a n t t h e s e a r c h e n g i n e y o u selected t o b e t h e d e f a u l t s e a r c h e n g i n e , click t h e M a k e this m y

X

default

s e a r c h p r o v i d e r check box t o select it. Click A d d t o

Bing Suggestions

close t h e d i a l o g box a n d a d d t h e search e n g i n e t o

•

t h e S e a r c h box.

I I

m a t c h m u s t be between the specified search criteria and a W e b page before a link to that page is displayed, so the n u m b e r o f hits from one search site t o a n o t h e r may vary. You

can

also

use the

Search

box

in

Internet

E x p l o r e r t o access a search site. T h e Search b o x is lo-

live green live green expo live green go yellow live green live smart live green in piano live green landscape associates live green twin cities

suggestions for completing the

live greenery

search phrase

Update

121 See how Live Search has evolved

cated to the right o f the Address bar. T o c o n d u c t a search using the S e a r c h b o x , you type keywords in the Search b o x , and then click the Search button [pj or press the

I T o the right o f the Search b o x , click the S e a r c h

Enter key t o begin the search. T h e hits are displayed on

b u t t o n [pj. A list o f hits for the search p h r a s e live

the search site you used.

green

O f t e n , a search phrase returns millions o f hits. T o

appears in your default search site in the

current t a b . Usually, the first 1 0 hits a p p e a r on the

n a r r o w the search, you can add w o r d s to the search

page and links to additional pages o f results are

phrase. F o r e x a m p l e , if you type cooking

listed at the b o t t o m o f the p a g e .

as the search

phrase, the list o f results will include recipe sites, sites with definitions o f c o o k i n g , links t o b o o k s a b o u t c o o k -

| Scroll d o w n the page to e x a m i n e the t o p 1 0 hits.

ing, and so o n . T o restrict the list o f results t o only W e b

| Scroll b a c k up t o the top o f the p a g e , click in the

sites that c o n t a i n recipes for c o o k i n g in the fusion style

S e a r c h box at the top o f the search site page after

with fish, you c a n add fusion,

the k e y w o r d green.

fish,

and recipes

search phrase.

to the

Press the S p a c e b a r , type o n a

b u d g e t and then press the E n t e r k e y . T h e list o f results changes to include only W e b sites t h a t discuss living green on a budget. | Scroll d o w n the list on the first page o f results a n d click one t h a t interests you. T h e W e b page you

Spider p r o g r a m s c a n b e tremendously fast, visiting millions o f pages per day.

clicked loads in the current t a b , replacing the list o f results. E x a m i n e the W e b page you selected. ) T o the left o f the Address bar, click the B a c k b u t t o n Q . T h e list of results appears in the t a b again.

C h a p t e r

5 :

I n t r o d u c i n g

t h e

I n t e r n e t

a n d

E m a i l

After you close your b r o

Favorites tab in the Favorites Center E x h i b i t 5-23

t h e pages you visited are n available via t h e tabs o r B

O

N o t i c e that in the list o f results, the

^

link you clicked has changed from blue to purple t o indicate that you

Favorites tab

have visited that W e b page.

bar

wnasa^gjErt^

S

A d d to Favorites...

eHow

0_

Suggested Sites *

•

A

History

Pin t h e

|, Favorites Bar

Favorites

Microsoft Websites

| To the left of the Address bar, click the

favorite added to

®

Favorites Center

| | Government Sites

NASA - Home ©

Using Favorites Web addresses can be very long and, as a result, difficult

button

W i n d o w s Live

^^^^^

browser window again.

Center

M S N Websites

twice. T h e h o m e page on the

N A S A Web site appears in the

a d d e d to

NASA - Home - W i n d o w s Internet E x p l o r e - ^

and F
SPYWARE ADWARE 4 SPYWARE 4 BACKDOOR 0 TROJAN 1 DIALER • SPYWARE £ TROJAN £ TROJAN

• °'* Tf

n

w o r m A malicious program

j ROGUE % ROGUE A TROJAN

designed to spread rapidly to a large




of computers by sending copies of

itself to other computers. Trojan h o r s e A malicious program that masquerades as something else.

SCARING: |||||| LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL [SCAN NOW] GET FULL REAL-TIME PROTECTION WITH ANTIVIRUS 2009

Remove

Path: Infections found:

40

Q SAVE REPORT

E x h i b i t 6-4

How a DoS attack might work

The hacker's computer sends several simultaneous requests; each request asks to establish a connection to the server but supplies false return information. In a distributed DoS attack, multiple computers send multiple requests at one time.

Hello? I'd like some info...

Hello? I'd like some info... 2. The server tries to respond to each request but can't locate the computer because false return information was provided. The server waits for a short period of time before closing the connection, which ties up the server and keeps others from connecting.

'm busy, I can't help you right

I can't find y o u , Til wait and try again...

HACKER'S COMPUTER

LEGITIMATE COMPUTER

.The hacker's computer continues to send new requests, so as a connection is closed by the server, a new request is waiting.This cycle continues, which ties up the server indefinitely.

4. The server becomes so overwhelmed that legitimate requests cannot get through and, eventually, the server usually crashes.

Hello? I'd like some info... W E B SERVER

it, n o t realizing the program is a T r o j a n horse. Some

a r e s p o n d i n g ping b a c k t o a false r e t u r n a d d r e s s , o r

T r o j a n horses today act as spyware and are designed to

to

find private information located on infected computers

e n o u g h useless traffic is g e n e r a t e d , t h e server h a s n o

and then send that information t o the m a l w a r e creator

r e s o u r c e s left t o deal with legitimate r e q u e s t s (see

to be used in illegal activities. A n o t h e r type o f T r o j a n

E x h i b i t 6 - 4 ) . An emerging trend is D o S a t t a c k s a i m e d

horse records every keystroke made on the infected

at m o b i l e wireless n e t w o r k s . T h e s e a t t a c k s t y p i c a l l y

request

nonexistent

information

continually.

If

computer, a n d then sends the sensitive information it

involve repeatedly establishing a n d r e l e a s i n g c o n n e c -

recorded t o criminals.

tions with the g o a l o f o v e r l o a d i n g t h e n e t w o r k t o disrupt service.

Denial of Service (DoS) Attacks A d e n i a l o f s e r v i c e ( D o S ) a t t a c k is an a c t o f s a b o t a g e

t h a t a t t e m p t s t o flood a n e t w o r k server or W e b server

DoS

attacks

today

are o f t e n

directed

toward

p o p u l a r sites a n d typically are c a r r i e d o u t via multiple c o m p u t e r s . T h i s is k n o w n as a d i s t r i b u t e d d e n i a l of s e r v i c e ( D D o S ) a t t a c k . D D o S a t t a c k s are typically

with so m a n y requests for a c t i o n t h a t it shuts d o w n or

p e r f o r m e d by b o t n e t s created by h a c k e r s ; the c o m p u t -

simply c a n n o t handle legitimate requests a n y longer,

ers in the b o t n e t participate in t h e a t t a c k s w i t h o u t the

c a u s i n g legitimate users t o be denied service. F o r e x -

o w n e r s ' k n o w l e d g e . Because h o m e c o m p u t e r s are in-

a m p l e , a h a c k e r might set up o n e or m o r e c o m p u t e r s

creasingly using direct Internet c o n n e c t i o n s but tend

t o c o n t a c t a server c o n t i n u a l l y with a request t o send

to be less p r o t e c t e d than s c h o o l a n d business c o m p u t ers, h a c k e r s are increasingly targeting h o m e c o m p u t ers f o r b o t n e t s used in D D o S a t t a c k s a n d o t h e r f o r m s of computer sabotage.

is c o m m o n ror an types o f d e n i a l of s e r v i c e (DoS) a t t a c k An act of

malware to be referred t o as

sabotage that attempts to flood a network server or a Web

"viruses," even though s o m e

server with so much activity that it is unable to function. d i s t r i b u t e d d e n i a l of s e r v i c e ( D D o S ) a t t a c k A DoS attack

m i g h t not technically

carried out by multiple computers.

c o m p u t e r vi ruses.

ter

6:

Network

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

T h e best protection against m a n y d o t cons is pro-

Security c o m p a n y W e b s e n s e

tecting your identity—that is, protecting any identifying

reports that over half o f the W e b

information a b o u t you that could be used in fraudu-

sites classified as malicious are

lent activities. W i t h any dot c o n , it is important t o a c t

actually legitimate W e b sites that

stance, you should w o r k with your local law enforce-

quickly if you think you have been a victim. F o r inment agency, credit card c o m p a n i e s , and the three

have been c o m p r o m i s e d .

m a j o r consumer credit b u r e a u s — E q u i f a x ,

Experian,

and T r a n s l l n i o n — t o close any accessed or fraudulent

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

accounts, place fraud alerts o n your credit report, and take other actions t o prevent additional fraudulent a c tivity while the fraud is being investigated.

Data, Program, or Web Site Alteration Another type o f c o m p u t e r sabotage occurs when a

Theft of Data, Information, and Other Resources

hacker breaches a c o m p u t e r system t o delete data, change data, modify p r o g r a m s , o r otherwise alter the data and programs located there. F o r e x a m p l e , a stu-

D a t a t h e f t or i n f o r m a t i o n t h e f t is the theft o f data or

dent might try t o h a c k into the school database t o

information located on o r being sent from a computer.

change his o r her grade, o r a hacker might change a

It can be committed by stealing an actual computer, or

program located o n a c o m p a n y server t o steal money

it can take place over the Internet o r a network by an

or information.

individual gaining unauthorized access t o that data by

D a t a on W e b sites c a n also be altered by hackers.

hacking into the computer o r by intercepting the data

For instance, individuals sometimes hack into and alter

in transit.

other people's social n e t w o r k i n g a c c o u n t s . In early

M o n e y is another resource that c a n be stolen via a

2 0 0 9 , for instance, the Twitter accounts o f over 3 0

computer. C o m p a n y insiders sometimes steal money by

high-profile individuals, including then President-elect

altering c o m p a n y programs t o transfer small amounts

O b a m a , were accessed by an unauthorized individual

of m o n e y — f o r e x a m p l e , a few c e n t s ' w o r t h o f bank a c -

who sent o u t fake and sometimes embarrassing tweets

count interest—from a very large n u m b e r o f transac-

posing as those individuals. It is also becoming more

tions t o an a c c o u n t controlled by the thieves. Added

c o m m o n for hackers t o c o m p r o m i s e legitimate Web sites

together, the amounts

and then use those sites t o perform malware attacks.

can be substantial.

Another

example o f monetary theft performed via computers

Typically, a hacker alters a legitimate site t o display an

involves hackers electronically transferring money il-

official-looking message that informs the user that a

legally from online bank a c c o u n t s , traditional

particular software p r o g r a m must be downloaded, or

bank

accounts, credit card a c c o u n t s , o r accounts at online

the hacker posts a rogue b a n n e r ad on a legitimate site

payment services such as PayPal.

that redirects the user t o a m a l w a r e site instead o f the

Y o u should be vigilant a b o u t p r o t e c t i n g private

site for the product featured in the banner a d .

i n f o r m a t i o n by sending sensitive i n f o r m a t i o n via secure W e b servers only a n d n o t disclosing personal

Online Theft, Online Fraud, and Other Dot Cons

y o u r m o t h e r ' s maiden n a m e — u n l e s s it is absolutely

A booming area of computer crime involves online fraud,

be used a n d t h a t it will n o t be s h a r e d with o t h e r s . In

i n f o r m a t i o n — e s p e c i a l l y a S o c i a l Security n u m b e r o r necessary a n d y o u k n o w h o w t h e i n f o r m a t i o n will

theft, scams, and related activities designed to steal money

a d d i t i o n , never give o u t sensitive p e r s o n a l i n f o r m a -

or other resources from individuals or businesses—these

tion t o a n y o n e w h o requests it over the p h o n e o r by

are collectively referred t o as dot cons.

e m a i l ; businesses t h a t legitimately need b a n k a c c o u n t i n f o r m a t i o n , p a s s w o r d s , o r credit c a r d n u m b e r s will n o t request t h a t i n f o r m a t i o n via p h o n e o r e m a i l . E n -

d o t c o n A fraud or scam carried out through the Internet.

crypting c o m p u t e r s a n d o t h e r h a r d w a r e c o n t a i n i n g

d a t a t h e f t ( i n f o r m a t i o n t h e f t ) The theft of data or

sensitive i n f o r m a t i o n so it will n o t b e r e a d a b l e if the

information located on or being sent from a computer.

h a r d w a r e is lost o r stolen is a n o t h e r i m p o r t a n t prec a u t i o n discussed later in this c h a p t e r .

Chapter

6:

Network

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

E x h i b i t 6-5

How identity theft works

1. The thief obtains information about an individual from discarded mail, employee records, credit card transactions, Web server files, or some other method.

2. The thief uses the information to make purchases, open new credit card accounts, and more in the victim's name. Often, the thief changes the address on the account to delay the victim's discovery of the theft.

3. The victim usually finds out by being denied credit or by being contacted about overdue bills generated by the thief. Clearing one's name after identity theft is time-consuming and can be very difficult and frustrating for the victim.

Identity Theft, Phishing, and Pharming A l t h o u g h information u s e d

A growing dot c o n trend is obtaining enough inform a t i o n a b o u t an individual to perform fraudulent financial t r a n s a c t i o n s . Often, this is carried out in c o n -

identity theft is often g a t h e r

junction with identity theft. I d e n t i t y t h e f t occurs when

via c o m p u t e r , it can also b e

s o m e o n e o b t a i n s enough information a b o u t a person to

obtained from mailboxes, tras

be able t o masquerade as that person—usually to buy products o r services in that person's n a m e , as illustrated

dumpsters, and o t h e r locatio

in E x h i b i t 6 - 5 . Typically, identity theft begins with o b taining a person's name, address, and Social Security number, often from a discarded or stolen d o c u m e n t , such as a preapproved credit card application that was

credit card or debit card numbers by using an illegal de-

sent in the mail; from information obtained via the In-

vice attached to an A T M or credit card reader that reads

ternet, such as a resume posted online; from informa-

and stores the card numbers t o be retrieved by the thief

tion located on a computer, such as on a stolen c o m -

at a later time. Social engineering involves p r e t e n d i n g —

puter or h a c k e d server; or from information sent from

typically via phone or email—to be a b a n k officer, poten-

a c o m p u t e r via a computer virus or spyware program

tial employer, or other trusted individual in order to get

installed on that computer. T h e thief may then order a

the potential victim to supply personal information.

copy o f the individual's birth certificate, obtain a " r e -

P h i s h i n g (pronounced " f i s h i n g " ) is the use o f a

p l a c e m e n t " driver's license, m a k e purchases and charge them to the victim, and/or

spoofed email m e s s a g e — a n email that appears to c o m e

open

from a legitimate organization such as eBay, PayPal, o r

credit or bank accounts in the vic-

a b a n k , but is actually sent from a p h i s h e r — t o trick

tim's n a m e . Identity theft is illegal and,

in 1 9 9 8 , the federal govern-

ment passed the Identity T h e f t and

i d e n t i t y t h e f t Using someone else's identity to

Assumption Deterrence Act, which

purchase goods or services, obtain new credit cards or bank

made identity theft a federal crime. Other

commonly

used

loans, or otherwise illegally masquerade as that individual.

tech-

p h i s h i n g The use of spoofed email messages to gam credit card

niques are skimming and social engi-

numbers and other personal data to be used for fraudulent purposes.

neering. Skimming involves stealing

Chapter

6:

Network

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

S p e a r p h i s h i n g s c h e m e s m i g h t

i n c l u d e p e r s o n a l i z e d

i n f o r m a t i o n . t h e

m a

D o n ' t b e f o o l e d

e m a i l i s .

usually include an urgent message stating that the individual's credit card or a c c o u n t information needs t o be updated and instructing the recipient o f the email t o click the link provided in the email in order to keep the account active, as shown in E x h i b i t 6 - 6 . If the victim

I d e n t i t y t h e f t c a n b e e x t r e m e l y distressing f o r vic-

clicks the link and supplies the requested information

tims, c a n t a k e y e a r s t o s t r a i g h t e n o u t , a n d c a n b e

via the spoofed site, the criminal gains access to all in-

v e r y e x p e n s i v e . F o r e x a m p l e , f o r a y e a r a n d a half,

formation provided by the victim. Phishing attempts

a t h i e f used t h e i d e n t i t y o f v i c t i m M i c h e l l e B r o w n

can also occur via instant messages, text messages, fake

t o o b t a i n o v e r $50,000 in g o o d s a n d services, t o

messages sent via eBay or M y S p a c e , Twitter tweets, and

r e n t p r o p e r t i e s — e v e n t o e n g a g e in d r u g t r a f f i c k -

pop-up security alert w i n d o w s . Phishers also frequently

ing. A l t h o u g h t h e c u l p r i t w a s e v e n t u a l l y a r r e s t e d

utilize spyware; typically, clicking the link in the phish-

a n d c o n v i c t e d f o r o t h e r c r i m i n a l acts, she c o n t i n -

ing email installs the spyware o n the victim's computer,

u e d t o use B r o w n ' s i d e n t i t y a n d w a s e v e n b o o k e d

and it will remain there, transmitting passwords and

i n t o jail using B r o w n ' s s t o l e n identity. A s a f i n a l

other sensitive data t o the phisher, until it is detected

insult a f t e r t h e c u l p r i t w a s in prison, U.S. C u s t o m s

and removed.

agents detained t h e real Michelle B r o w n w h e n

Another recent trend is the use o f more targeted,

she w a s r e t u r n i n g f r o m a t r i p t o M e x i c o b e c a u s e

personalized phishing schemes, k n o w n as spear phishing.

of t h e criminal r e c o r d o f t h e i d e n t i t y t h i e f . B r o w n

Spear phishing emails are directly targeted to a specific

states t h a t s h e h a s n o t t r a v e l e d o u t o f t h e c o u n -

individual and typically appear t o c o m e from an organi-

try since, f e a r i n g a n a r r e s t o r s o m e o t h e r serious

zation or person that the targeted individual has an asso-

p r o b l e m r e s u l t i n g f r o m t h e t h e f t o f h e r identity,

ciation with. T h e y also often include personalized infor-

a n d estimates s h e h a s s p e n t o v e r 500 h o u r s t r y i n g

mation, such as the potential victim's name, to make the

t o correct all t h e p r o b l e m s r e l a t e d t o t h e i d e n t i t y theft.

spear phishing emails seem even m o r e legitimate. Spear phishers also target employees o f selected organizations

T^^^iP^B^p^pjgl^F

by posing as someone within the company, such as a human resources or technical support employee. These

the recipient into revealing sensitive personal informa-

spear phishing emails often request confidential informa-

tion, such as W e b site logon i n f o r m a t i o n or credit card

tion or direct the employee t o click a link to supposedly

numbers. O n c e o b t a i n e d , this i n f o r m a t i o n is used in

reset his or her password. T h e goal o f corporate spear

identity theft and other fraudulent activities. A phish-

phishing attacks is usually t o steal intellectual property,

ing email typically looks legitimate and it contains links

such as software source code, design documents, or

in the email that appear t o g o t o the W e b site o f the

schematics.

legitimate business, but these links go t o the phisher's W e b site that is set up t o l o o k like the legitimate site in-

P h a r m i n g is another type o f scam that uses spoofed

s r e a d — a n a c t called W e b site s p o o f i n g . P h i s h i n g e m a i l s

domain names t o obtain personal information for use in fraudulent activities. W i t h pharming, the criminal re-

are typically sent t o a wide group o f individuals and

routes traffic intended for a c o m m o n l y used W e b site t o a spoofed W e b site set up by the pharmer. Sometimes s p e a r p h i s h i n g A personalized phishing scheme

pharming takes place via malicious code sent to a c o m -

targeted at an individual.

puter via an email message or other distribution m e t h o d .

p h a r m i n g The use of spoofed domain names to obtain personal

M o r e often, it takes place via changes m a d e t o a D N S

information to be used in fraudulent activities.

server—a c o m p u t e r that translates U R L s into the appropriate IP addresses needed t o display the W e b page

Chapter

6:

Network

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

E x h i b i t 6-6

Phishing email

• A* jjj —S

%^ Q Reply

From: To:

»

Bank of America Security Measures

Message (HTML)

a

Message

Reply Forward to All Respond

x '®>

X

Move to Folder -

ft

-

c

M

i

j $ Create Rule

Delete

s

B l o c k

Other Actions -

Sender

Actions

- J Not Junk

Junk E-mail

G

T*

Categorize Follow Mark as U p ' Unread Options 5

^

Find Related *

onbrebanking@atert. bankof america. com Deborah Morley

Find Sent

l i

a*)

Link to E-mail Record Auto-link

^ Select-

Business Contact... j W e d 9/3/2008 1:50 A M

Cc Subject

Bank of America Security Measures

The link is for an insecure Web page and does not use the bofa.com domain.

Y o u r Online B a n k i n g is B l o c k e d

http://www.htss.com.gr/www/ BankOfAmerica/.com/update/ informabon/update&restore=suspended/ index.htm

Because of unusual number of invalid login attempts on to believe that, their might be some security problem or „ ^ have decided to put an extra verification process to e n s " , P!*?y_^your account security. Please click on siqrwi to Online Banking the verification process and ensure your «Oount security. It is all about your security. Thank you, and visit the customer service section. 1

This email looks legitimate, but the link goes to a spoofed W e b page.

f

B a n k of America, M e m b e r FDIC. © 2009 B a n k of America Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

1 corresponding t o a U R L . After hacking into a c o m p a n y

your c o m p u t e r o r a b o u t your activities t o a c r i m i n a l . In

D N S server, t h e pharmer changes the IP addresses used

addition, shred the preapproved credit c a r d offers a n d

in c o n j u n c t i o n with a particular c o m p a n y U R L (called

other documents containing personal i n f o r m a t i o n that

D N S poisoning) so any Web page requests made via the

frequently arrive in the mail before recycling t h e m . T o

legitimate c o m p a n y U R L are routed via the company's

prevent the theft o f outgoing mail c o n t a i n i n g sensitive

poisoned D N S server t o a phony spoofed W e b page

i n f o r m a t i o n , don't place it in y o u r m a i l b o x — m a i l it at

located o n the pharmer's W e b server. S o , even though

the post office o r in a USPS drop b o x .

a user types t h e proper U R L t o display the legitimate

T o avoid phishing schemes, never click a link in an

c o m p a n y W e b page in his o r her browser, the spoofed

email message t o g o t o a secure W e b s i t e — a l w a y s type

page is displayed instead. Because spoofed sites are set

the U R L f o r that site in your b r o w s e r ( n o t necessarily

up t o look like the legitimate sites, the user typically

the U R L shown in the email message) instead. I f y o u

does n o t notice a n y difference, a n d any information

think an unsolicited email message requesting i n f o r m a -

sent via that site is captured by the pharmer.

tion from y o u m a y be legitimate, type the U R L f o r t h a t site in your browser t o load the legitimate site a n d then update your a c c o u n t information.

Protecting Against Identity Theft In addition t o disclosing personal information

T o prevent identity theft, protect your Social Secuonly

rity n u m b e r a n d give it out only w h e n necessary. K e e p

w h e n it is necessary and only via secure W e b pages,

a close eye o n your credit card bills a n d credit history

you should use security software and keep it up t o date

to m a k e sure y o u catch any fraudulent charges o r a c -

to guard against computer viruses, spyware, a n d other

counts opened by an identity thief as s o o n as possible.

m a l w a r e that c a n be used to send information from

M a k e sure your bills arrive every m o n t h — s o m e thieves

Chapter

6:

Network

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

Online Auction Fraud and Other Internet Scams

will change your mailing address t o delay d e t e c t i o n — and read credit card statements carefully to look for unauthorized charges. Be sure t o follow up on any calls

Online auction fraud

you get from creditors, instead o f assuming it is just a

( s o m e t i m e s called I n t e r n e t a u c -

t i o n f r a u d ) occurs when an o n l i n e auction buyer pays

mistake. M o s t security experts also r e c o m m e n d order-

for merchandise that is never delivered, or that is de-

ing a full credit history o n yourself a few times a year to

livered but it is n o t as represented. A wide range o f

check for accounts listed in your n a m e that you did not

other scams c a n o c c u r via W e b sites o r unsolicited

open and any other p r o b l e m s .

emails. C o m m o n types

You can also use browser-based antiphishing tools

o f scams include

and digital certificates t o help guard against identity

scams,

theft and the phishing and pharming schemes used in

loan

work-at-home

c o n s , pyramid schemes,

conjunction with identity theft. Antiphishing tools are

bogus credit card offers

built into many email p r o g r a m s and W e b browsers to

and prize

help notify users o f possible phishing W e b sites. For in-

and

stance, some email p r o g r a m s will disable links in email

promotions,

fraudulent

busi-

ness opportunities and

messages identified as questionable, unless the user

franchises. T h e s e offers typically try t o sell potential

overrides it; many browsers warn users when a W e b

victims n o n e x i s t e n t services o r worthless i n f o r m a t i o n ,

page associated with a possible phishing U R L is re-

or they try t o convince potential victims t o volun-

quested (see E x h i b i t 6 - 7 ) ; and antiphishing capabilities

tarily supply their credit c a r d details and other per-

are included in many recent security suites.

sonal i n f o r m a t i o n , which are then used for fraudulent purposes.

E x h i b i t 6-7

One

Unsafe Web site alert

ongoing

Internet

scam is the Nigerian letter fraud scheme. This scheme involves an email message that appears t o come from the

Nigerian

government

and that promises the p o tential a

victim

substantial

a share o f amount

of

m o n e y in exchange for the use

o f the victim's

account.

Supposedly

bank the

victim's bank account inf o r m a t i o n is needed t o facilitate a wire transfer but the victim's account is emptied

instead,

or

up-front

cash is needed to pay for nonexistent fees, which the c o n artist keeps while giving nothing in return. See E x h i b i t 6 - 8 . T h e theme o f these scams often changes to fit current events. T h e best protection against m a n y dot cons is c o m -

online auction fraud (Internet auction

mon sense. Be extremely cautious o f any unsolicited

f r a u d ) When an item purchased through an online auction is never delivered after payment, or the item is not as specified by

email messages you receive a n d realize that if an offer

the seller.

sounds t o o good t o be true, it p r o b a b l y is. Before bidding on an auction item, check o u t the feedback rating

Chapter

6:

Network

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

Digital Certificates and Digital Signatures T h e p u r p o s e o f a d i g i t a l c e r t i f i c a t e is t o a u t h e n t i c a t e

ing a n e m a i l m e s s a g e o r o t h e r d o c u m e n t v i a a d i g i t a l

t h e identity of a n individual or organization. Digital

s i g n a t u r e . To d i g i t a l l y sign a n e m a i l m e s s a g e o r o t h e r

c e r t i f i c a t e s a r e g r a n t e d by C e r t i f i c a t e A u t h o r i t i e s a n d

d o c u m e n t t h e sender's p r i v a t e k e y is u s e d a n d t h a t key,

typically contain t h e name of t h e person, organization,

a l o n g w i t h t h e c o n t e n t s of t h e d o c u m e n t ,

o r W e b site b e i n g c e r t i f i e d a l o n g w i t h a c e r t i f i c a t e s e -

a unique digital signature; consequently, a digital sig-

generates

rial n u m b e r a n d a n e x p i r a t i o n d a t e . D i g i t a l c e r t i f i c a t e s

n a t u r e is d i f f e r e n t w i t h e a c h s i g n e d d o c u m e n t . W h e n

a l s o i n c l u d e a public/private k e y pair. In a d d i t i o n t o b e -

a d i g i t a l l y s i g n e d d o c u m e n t is r e c e i v e d , t h e r e c i p i e n t ' s

i n g u s e d by t h e c e r t i f i c a t e h o l d e r t o e n c r y p t files a n d

c o m p u t e r uses t h e sender's public k e y t o v e r i f y t h e d i g i -

e m a i l m e s s a g e s , t h e s e keys a n d t h e d i g i t a l c e r t i f i c a t e

t a l s i g n a t u r e . B e c a u s e t h e d o c u m e n t is s i g n e d w i t h t h e

a r e u s e d w i t h secure W e b p a g e s t o g u a r a n t e e t h e W e b

sender's p r i v a t e k e y a n d t h e d i g i t a l s i g n a t u r e w i l l b e

p a g e s a r e secure a n d actually b e l o n g t o t h e stated

d e e m e d i n v a l i d if e v e n o n e c h a r a c t e r o f t h e d o c u m e n t

organization.

is c h a n g e d a f t e r it is s i g n e d , d i g i t a l s i g n a t u r e s g u a r a n -

T h e keys i n c l u d e d in a d i g i t a l c e r t i f i c a t e c a n also

t e e t h a t t h e d o c u m e n t w a s sent by a specific i n d i v i d u a l

be used t o authenticate t h e identity of a person send-

a n d t h a t it w a s n o t t a m p e r e d w i t h a f t e r it w a s s i g n e d .

o f the seller t o see c o m m e n t s written by o t h e r a u c t i o n

Cyberstalking and Other Personal Safety Concerns

LO6

sellers a n d buyers. Always pay for a u c t i o n s and o t h e r online p u r c h a s e s using a credit c a r d o r an online paym e n t service such as PayPal t h a t accepts credit card p a y m e n t s so you can dispute the t r a n s a c t i o n y o u r c r e d i t c a r d c o m p a n y , if needed. F o r

I

through

expensive

items, c o n s i d e r using an e s c r o w service, w h i c h allows

3

n addition t o being expensive a n d i n c o n v e n i e n t , c y b e r c r i m e c a n also be physically d a n g e r o u s . A l t h o u g h

m o s t o f us m a y n o t ordinarily view using t h e Internet

y o u t o ensure t h a t the merchandise is as specified b e f o r e

as a potentially dangerous activity, c a s e s o f

your p a y m e n t is released t o the seller.

physical

h a r m due t o Internet activity d o h a p p e n . F o r e x a m p l e , children E x h i b i t 6-8

y )

Reply

From: To; Cc

3

and

teenagers

;

become

pedophiles

Nigerian letter fraud email

u • •

have

victims

who

of

arranged

f a c e - t o - f a c e m e e t i n g s by using

YOUR NOTIFICATION OF PAYMENT VIA. ATM ... M

information

gathered

via e m a i l , m e s s a g e

THIS I S TO OFFICIALY INFORM YOU THAT WE HAVE OPEN YOUR PAYMENT F I L E Fo WHICH WORTH ABOUT EIGHT HUNDERED THOUSAND DOLLARS (US$800.QQQ.OQ).WE ALSO FOUND OUT THAT YOU HAVE NOT RECEIVED ANY PAYMENT.

boards,

social n e t w o r k i n g sites, o r

Reply to Ail Respond

CENTRAL BANK OF NIGERIA < [email protected]: Deborah Mortey

the

digital certificate

Sent Sun 6/7/2009 7:18

Electronic data that can be used to verify the identity

Subject YOUR NOTIFICATION OF PAYMENT VIA ATM CARD AND NOTICE ON RECENT HAPPENINGS OFFICE OF THE PRESIDENCY

of a person or an organization; includes a key pair that

INCONJUNCTION WITH THE OFFICE OF THE CENTRAL BANK OF NIGERIA ALHA3I UMARU YARADUA (GCFR) ASO- ROCK, GARKI ABUDA NIGERIA.

can be

used for encryption and digital signatures.

Our ref: ATM/13479/IDR Your ref: Date: 91/ 29 / 2999

d i g i t a l s i g n a t u r e A unique digital code that can be attached

YOUR NOTIFICATION OF PAYM HAPPENINGS ATTENTION: BENEFICIARY THIS IS TO OFFICIALY INFORM YOU THAT WE HAVE OPEN YOUR PAYMENT FILE WHICH WORTH ABOUT EIGHT HUNDERED THOUSAND DOLLARS (US$899.999.99).WE ALSO FOUND OUT THAT YOU HAVE NOT RECEIVED ANY PAYMENT. SINCE THE BRITISH GOVERNMENT HAS SET ASIDE ONLY EIGHT HUNDERED MILLION UNITED STATE DOLLARS, (US$899,999,999.99) FROM THE ONE

Chapter

to a file or an email message to verify the identity of the sender and guarantee the file or message has not been changed since it was signed.

6:

Network

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

Cyberstalking typically begins with online harass-

T h e m o s t c o m m o n security risks

ment, such as sending harassing o r threatening email

and c o m p u t e r crimes that take place

messages to the victim, posing as the victim in order to

via networks and the I nternet are

sign the victim up for p o r n o g r a p h i c or otherwise of-

hacking, c o m p u t e r viruses, identity

address and telephone number, o r hacking into the

fensive email newsletters, publicizing the victim's h o m e victim's social networking pages to alter the content. Cyberstalking can also lead to offline stalking and possibly physical h a r m — i n at least o n e case, it led to the death of the victim.

other online sources. Also, a growing number of inci-

Although there are as yet n o specific federal laws

dents have occurred in which children are threatened

against cyberstalking, all states have m a d e it illegal, and

by classmates via email, W e b site posts, or text mes-

some federal laws do apply if the online actions include

sages. Adults may fall victim t o unscrupulous or dan-

computer fraud or another type o f computer crime,

gerous individuals w h o misrepresent themselves online,

suggest a threat o f personal injury, o r involve sending

and the availability o f personal information online has

obscene email messages.

made it m o r e difficult for individuals to hide from people w h o may w a n t t o do them h a r m , such as abused

Online Pornography

women trying to hide f r o m their abusive husbands.

A variety o f controversial and potentially objectionable material is available on the Internet. Although there

Cyberbullying and Cyberstalking

have been attempts to ban this type o f material from the

T w o o f the most c o m m o n ways individuals are harassed

Internet, they have not been successful. Like its printed

online are cyberbullying and cyberstalking. Children

counterpart, online pornography involving minors is

and teenagers bullying other children or teenagers via

illegal. Because of the strong link experts believe ex-

the Internet, such as through email, text messaging, a

ists between child pornography and child molestation,

social networking site, o r other online c o m m u n i c a t i o n s

many experts are very concerned a b o u t the amount of

m e t h o d , is referred to as c y b e r b u l l y i n g . Unfortunately,

child pornography that can be found and distributed

cyberbullying is c o m m o n today. By some estimates, it

via the Internet. T h e y also believe that the Internet

affects as many as o n e - h a l f o f all U.S. teenagers. M a n y

makes it easier for sexual predators to act out, such as

states and schools have reviewed their harassment stat-

by striking up " f r i e n d s h i p s " with children online and

utes and bullying policies a n d , as a result, implemented

convincing these children to meet them in real life.

new laws or amended existing harassment laws to address cyberbullying. Repeated threats or other harassment carried out on-

Protecting Against Personal Safety Concerns

line between adults is referred to as cyberstalking. Cyber-

T h e increasing a m o u n t o f attention paid to cyberbul-

stalkers sometimes find their victims online; for instance,

lying and cyberstalking is leading to more efforts to

someone in a discussion group w h o makes a comment or

improve safeguards for children. F o r instance, social

has a screen name that the cyberstalker does not like, or

networking sites have privacy features that can be used

bloggers who are harassed and threatened with violence

to protect the private i n f o r m a t i o n o f their members. In

or murder because of their blogging activities. Other

addition, numerous states in the U.S. have implemented

times, the attack is more personal, such as employers

cyberbullying and cyberstalking laws. Although there is

w h o are stalked online by ex-employees w h o were fired

no surefire way to protect against cyberbullying, cyber-

left their position under adverse conditions,

stalking, and other online dangers completely, some

or otherwise

and celebrities w h o are stalked online by fans.

common-sense precautions can reduce the chance o f a serious personal safety problem occurring due to online activities. T o protect yourself against cyberstalking and

c y b e r b u l l y i n g Children or teenagers bullying other

other types o f online harassment:

children or teenagers via the Internet.

• Use gender-neutral, n o n p r o v o c a t i v e identifying

cyberstalking Repeated threats or harassing behavior between

names, such as jsmith,

adults carried out via email or another Internet communications method.

iamcute.

Chapter

6:

Network

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

instead o f janesmith

or

Be careful a b o u t the types o f p h o t o s you post o f

O N E

yourself online and do not reveal personal in-

S T U D Y R E V E A L E D

THAT

» P E R C E N T O F U S E R S

f o r m a t i o n , such as your real n a m e , address, or telephone number, to people you meet online.

B R M A T I O N

O N

T H E I R

yf^^m^

D o n o t respond to any insults or other harassing c o m m e n t s you may receive online.

;D

C o n s i d e r requesting that your personal i n f o r m a -

STORE

THAT

FOR IDENTITY

C O U L D

THEFT.

tion be removed from online directories, especially t h o s e associated with your email address or other g o v e r n m e n t employees may be targeted by c o m p u t e r

online identifiers.

thieves for the i n f o r m a t i o n contained on their c o m p u t ers. A n d even if the data on a device is n o t the p r i m a r y reason for a theft, any unencrypted sensitive data stored

Personal Computer Security

L O 6 . 4

on the stolen device is at risk o f being e x p o s e d o r used for fraudulent purposes, which is h a p p e n i n g at u n p r e c edented levels today.

T

here are a n u m b e r o f security c o n c e r n s surround-

ing c o m p u t e r s and related technology that all in-

dividuals should be concerned a b o u t , including having your c o m p u t e r stolen, losing a term paper because the storage m e d i u m your paper was stored on b e c o m e s unr e a d a b l e , losing your mobile phone containing your entire c o n t a c t list and calendar, or buying pirated or digitally counterfeited products. Although c o n c e r n s a b o u t h a c k i n g , c o m p u t e r viruses, identity theft, and cyberbullying are valid, there are additional c o m p u t e r security issues t h a t are n o t related specifically t o n e t w o r k s and the Internet.

H a r d w a r e loss also occurs when h a r d w a r e is being transported in luggage or in a p a c k a g e t h a t is lost by an airline or shipping company, or w h e n an individual misplaces or otherwise loses a piece o f h a r d w a r e . If any sensitive data was contained on the lost h a r d w a r e , individuals risk identity theft. Businesses h o s t i n g sensitive data that is breached have t o deal with the n u m e r o u s issues and potential consequences o f t h a t loss, such as notifying c u s t o m e r s that their personal

information

w a s e x p o s e d , responding to potential lawsuits, a n d trying t o repair d a m a g e to the c o m p a n y ' s r e p u t a t i o n . Computer

hardware often consists o f

relatively

delicate c o m p o n e n t s that can be d a m a g e d easily by p o w e r fluctuations, heat, dust, static electricity, water,

Hardware Loss and Damage

and abuse. F o r instance, fans clogged by dust c a n cause

H a r d w a r e loss c a n occur when a personal computer, U S B flash drive, mobile device, or other piece o f hardware is stolen or is lost by the owner. H a r d w a r e loss, as well as o t h e r security issues, can also result from hardware d a m a g e — b o t h intentional and

accidental—and

system failure. O n e o f the m o s t obvious types o f h a r d w a r e loss is h a r d w a r e t h e f t , which occurs when h a r d w a r e is stolen from an individual or from a business, s c h o o l , or other organization. A l t h o u g h security experts stress t h a t the vast m a j o r i t y o f h a r d w a r e theft is stolen t o o b t a i n the value o f the h a r d w a r e itself, c o r p o r a t e executives and

a c o m p u t e r t o overheat; dropping a c o m p u t e r will often break it; and spilling a drink on a k e y b o a r d o r leaving a m o b i l e p h o n e in the p o c k e t o f y o u r j e a n s while they go through the wash will likely c a u s e s o m e d a m a g e . In addition t o accidental d a m a g e , b u r g l a r s , vandals, disgruntled employees, and other individuals s o m e t i m e s intentionally damage the c o m p u t e r s a n d o t h e r h a r d ware they have access t o .

System Failure and Other Disasters Although m a n y o f us m a y prefer n o t t o t h i n k a b o u t it, s y s t e m f a i l u r e — t h e complete m a l f u n c t i o n o f a c o m puter

system—and

other types o f

computer-related

h a r d w a r e t h e f t The theft of computer hardware,

T H E

RECOVERY RATE O F A LOST O R

C O M P U T E I ' I S A B O U T

2 O R

s y s t e m f a i l u r e The complete malfunction of a computer

STOLEN

system.

3

t e r 6:

Network

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

Exhibit 6-9 Cable locks secure computers and other hardware

NOTEBOOK COMPUTERS This combination cable lock connects via a security slot built into the notebook computer.

permutations.

DESKTOP COMPUTERS AND MONITORS This keyed cable lock connects via a cable anchor attached to the back of the monitor.

disasters do happen. F r o m accidentally deleting a file

Encryption can be used to prevent a file from being

to having your c o m p u t e r just stop working, computer

readable if it is intercepted or viewed by an unauthor-

problems can be a huge inconvenience, as well as cost

ized individual. Full disk e n c r y p t i o n ( F D E ) provides an

a great deal of time and money. W h e n the system con-

easy way to protect the data on an entire computer in

tains your personal d o c u m e n t s and data, it is a prob-

case it is lost or stolen. F D E systems encrypt everything

lem; when it contains the only copy o f your c o m p a n y

stored on the drive (the operating system, application

records or controls a vital system—such as a nuclear

programs, data, temporary files, and so forth) automati-

power plant—it can be a disaster. System failure can

cally, so users don't have to remember to encrypt sensi-

occur because o f a h a r d w a r e problem, software prob-

tive documents and the encryption is always enabled. A

lem, or c o m p u t e r virus. It can also occur because o f a

hard drive that uses F D E , which is often referred to as

natural disaster, s a b o t a g e , o r a terrorist attack.

a self-encrypting hard d r i v e , typically needs a username

Protecting Against Hardware Loss, Hardware Damage, and System Failure

computer containing the drive will b o o t .

Locked doors and equipment can be simple deterrents

word

to computer theft. T o secure c o m p u t e r s and other hard-

feature (such as a built-

ware to a table or other o b j e c t that is difficult to move,

in

you can use cable locks, such as the ones shown in E x -

as in the U S B drive in

and password or biometric characteristic before the Encryption can also be used to protect the data stored on removable storage media; either a strong passor

a

fingerprint 6-10)

biometric reader,

hibit 6 - 9 . As an additional precaution with portable

Exhibit

computers, you can use laptop alarm software that

to provide access to the

emits a very loud alarm noise if the computer is un-

data on the drive. Some

plugged, if USB devices are removed, or if the computer

is

used

software

tools are designed

is shut down w i t h o u t the owner's permission.

to

aid in hardware recovfull disk e n c r y p t i o n (FDE) A technology

ery. O n e software tool

that encrypts

that can be used to help

everything stored on a storage medium

automatically, without any user interaction.

increase the chances o f

s e l f - e n c r y p t i n g h a r d d r i v e A hard drive that uses full disk

a stolen o r lost c o m -

encryption (FDE).

puter being is

Chapter

6:

Network

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

computer

recovered tracking

Exhibit 6-10 Encrypted USB flash drive

I

Safeguarding Passwords P a s s w o r d s a r e secret w o r d s o r c h a r a c t e r c o m b i n a t i o n s associa t e d w i t h a n individual. They a r e t y p i c a l l y used in c o n j u n c tion

with

a

username.

name/password

User-

I'M A CURRENT ONLINE CUSTOMER Email Address Password:

#

a r e o f t e n used t o restrict access t o networks, computers,

used

to

remember

word "Msji5yotMd@". Or you can

#

(Password is case sensitive.)

combinations

be

t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g s t r o n g pass-

[email protected] *

older t h a n my d a u g h t e r A b b y " could

choose

an

abbreviation

or u n u s u a l w o r d s y o u w i l l r e member, a n d t h e n a d d a mix

log in

of n u m b e r s a n d s p e c i a l

Web

char-

acters. D o n o t use y o u r n a m e ,

sites, r o u t e r s , a n d o t h e r c o m p u t i n g r e s o u r c e s — t h e user is g r a n t e d access t o t h e r e -

y o u r kids' o r p e t s ' n a m e s , y o u r address, y o u r b i r t h d a t e ,

q u e s t e d resource only after supplying t h e correct infor-

or a n y o t h e r p u b l i c i n f o r m a t i o n as y o u r p a s s w o r d .

m a t i o n . P a s s w o r d s typically a p p e a r as asterisks or d o t s as t h e y a r e b e i n g e n t e r e d so t h e y c a n n o t b e v i e w e d .

To k e e p y o u r p a s s w o r d s safe, d o n o t k e e p a w r i t t e n c o p y o f t h e p a s s w o r d in y o u r desk or t a p e d t o y o u r m o n -

C r e a t e s t r o n g passwords t h a t a r e a t least e i g h t c h a r -

itor. If y o u n e e d t o k e e p a record o f y o u r p a s s w o r d s , c r e -

a c t e r s l o n g ; use a c o m b i n a t i o n o f u p p e r a n d l o w e r c a s e

a t e a p a s s w o r d - p r o t e c t e d file o n y o u r c o m p u t e r . A l s o ,

letters, n u m b e r s , a n d symbols; a n d d o n o t f o r m w o r d s

use a d i f f e r e n t p a s s w o r d f o r y o u r h i g h l y s e n s i t i v e a c t i v i -

f o u n d in t h e d i c t i o n a r y or t h a t m a t c h t h e

username

ties, such as o n l i n e b a n k i n g or stock t r a d i n g , t h a n f o r

t h a t t h e p a s s w o r d is associated w i t h . O n e w a y t o c r e a t e

W e b sites t h a t r e m e m b e r y o u r settings o r p r o f i l e , such

a s t r o n g p a s s w o r d is t o c r e a t e a passphrase t h a t y o u c a n

as o n l i n e n e w s , a u c t i o n , or s h o p p i n g sites. If a h a c k e r

r e m e m b e r a n d use c o r r e s p o n d i n g letters a n d symbols,

d e t e r m i n e s y o u r p a s s w o r d o n a low-security site, h e o r

such as t h e first letter of e a c h w o r d , f o r y o u r p a s s w o r d .

she c a n use it o n a n a c c o u n t c o n t a i n i n g s e n s i t i v e d a t a if

For i n s t a n c e , t h e passphrase " M y son J o h n is f i v e y e a r s

y o u use t h e s a m e p a s s w o r d o n b o t h a c c o u n t s .

s o f t w a r e . C o m p u t e r tracking software can be used to

computer's video camera of the person using the stolen

help increase the chances of a stolen or lost c o m p u t e r

c o m p u t e r to help identify and prosecute the thief.

being recovered by sending identifying

information,

O f t e n any sign that computer tracking

software

such as o w n e r s h i p information and location informa-

is running on the computer or is sending i n f o r m a t i o n

tion determined from nearby W i - F i n e t w o r k s , to the

via the Internet is hidden from the user, so the thief is

c o m p u t e r tracking c o m p a n y on a regular basis. W h e n

usually not aware that a c o m p u t e r tracking system is

the c o m p u t e r is in the owner's possession, this informa-

installed on the computer. An alternative is tracking

tion is sent infrequently—maybe once a day. W h e n the

software that displays a message on the screen when

c o m p u t e r is reported lost or stolen, however, the c o m -

the c o m p u t e r is lost or stolen, such as a plea t o return

puter t r a c k i n g software typically increases its c o n t a c t

the device for a reward or a simple statement o f " T H I S

with the c o m p u t e r tracking software company, such

C O M P U T E R IS S T O L E N " in a big bright banner on the

as sending new information every 1 5 minutes, so cur-

desktop. Messages typically reappear every 3 0 seconds,

rent l o c a t i o n information can be provided to law en-

no matter h o w many times they are closed by the thief.

forcement agencies to help them recover the computer.

A n o t h e r antitheft tool is the use o f asset tags on

Some software can even take video or p h o t o s with the

hardware and other expensive assets. T h e s e labels usually identify the o w n e r o f the asset and are designed to be permanently attached to the asset. S o m e tags are designed to be indestructible; others are t a m p e r evident

IS; DON'T YOUR PASSWORDS DOWN ON STICK\ NOTES THAT YOU LEAVE ATTACHED TO YOUR MONITOR

labels that change their appearance if s o m e o n e tries t o remove them. p a s s w o r d A secret word or character combination associated with an individual.

Self-Destructing Devices W h e n y o u are less c o n c e r n e d a b o u t r e c o v e r i n g a stolen device t h a n a b o u t e n s u r i n g t h e d a t a located o n t h e c o m p u t e r is n o t c o m p r o m i s e d , devices t h a t self-destruct u p o n c o m m a n d a r e a v i a b l e o p t i o n . A v a i l a b l e as part o f s o m e c o m p u t e r t r a c k i n g s o f t w a r e programs, such as t h e o n e s h o w n in t h e a c c o m p a n y i n g illustration, as w e l l as stand-alone utilities, kill s w i t c h capabilities destroy t h e d a t a o n a d e v i c e , typically by o v e r w r i t i n g

preselected

files m u l t i p l e t i m e s , r e n d e r i n g t h e m u n r e a d a b l e , w h e n instructed. Kill switches a r e a c t i v a t e d u p o n customer r e quest w h e n t h e d e v i c e is d e t e r m i n e d t o b e lost or stolen. O n c e t h e kill s w i t c h is a c t i v a t e d , all d a t a o n t h e c o m p u t e r is erased w h e n e v e r it next c o n n e c t s t o t h e I n t e r n e t or

Courtesy Absolute Software Corporation

w h e n a n o t h e r p r e d e s i g n a t e d r e m o t e t r i g g e r is a c t i v a t e d , such as a certain n u m b e r o f unsuccessful l o g o n a t t e m p t s .

Keep in mind the following precautions when using

Proper care o f hardware c a n help prevent serious damage to a computer system. An obvious precaution

portable computers a n d other mobile devices:

is to not harm your hardware physically, such as by

• Install and use encryption, antivirus, antispyware,

dropping a portable computer. T o help protect portable

anci firewall s o f t w a r e .

•

devices against minor abuse, use protective cases, as

Secure computers with b o o t passwords; set your

shown in E x h i b i t 6 - 1 1 . T h e s e cases are typically pad-

mobile phone t o a u t o l o c k after a short period o f

ded or made from protective material; they also often

time and require a passcode t o unlock it.

have a thin protective layer over the device's display t o protect against scratches.

• Use only secure W i - F i c o n n e c t i o n s , and disable

If you need more protection than a protective

Wi-Fi and Bluetooth w h e n they are not needed.

case can provide, r u g g e d i z e d d e v i c e s are designed t o

D o n ' t store usernames or passwords attached to a c o m p u t e r o r inside its case. E x h i b i t 6-11

Use a plain case t o m a k e a portable

Protective cases

computer less c o n s p i c u o u s . Keep an eye on your devices at all

l•oOQ 111 y

times, especially when traveling. Use a cable lock to secure devices to a desk or other o b j e c t whenever you must leave them unattended. Regularly back up your data. Consider using tracking or kill switch

software.

•

r u g g e d i z e d d e v i c e A device that is designed to withstand much more physical

MOBILE PHONE CASE

abuse than a conventional device.

Chapter

6:

Network

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

NOTEBOOK CASE

prevents electrical power spikes f r o m h a r m i n g your sys-

o protect a portable c o m p u t e r

tem. F o r desktop computers, surge suppressors should

rom scratches and other d a m a g e ,

be used with all o f the powered c o m p o n e n t s in the c o m -

use a neoprcne laptop sleeve

puter system. Surge suppressors designed for p o r t a b l e

w h e n carrying it in a conventional

nect only one device.

c o m p u t e r s are typically smaller a n d designed to c o n Users w h o w a n t their desktop c o m p u t e r s to remain

brie:^^^^^^

powered up when the electricity goes o f f should use an u n i n t e r r u p t i b l e p o w e r s u p p l y ( U P S ) , s u c h as the

one

shown in E x h i b i t 6 - 1 2 , which c o n t a i n s a built-in battery. T h e length o f time that a UPS c a n p o w e r a system w i t h s t a n d much more physical abuse than conventional

depends on the type and number o f devices c o n n e c t e d

devices and range from semirugged to

ultrarugged.

to the UPS, the power capacity o f the UPS device, and

Ruggedized devices are used m o s t often by individu-

the age o f the battery. M o s t UPS devices also p r o t e c t

als w h o w o r k outside o f an office, such as field w o r k -

against p o w e r

ers, c o n s t r u c t i o n w o r k e r s , o u t d o o r technicians, military

individuals usually provide power for a few minutes t o

personnel, police officers, and

keep the system powered up during short p o w e r blips,

firefighters.

fluctuations.

UPSs designed for use by

T o protect hardware from damage due to power

as well as to allow the user to save open d o c u m e n t s and

everyone should use a s u r g e suppressor

shut d o w n the c o m p u t e r properly in case the electric-

with a c o m p u t e r whenever it is plugged into a power

ity remains off. Industrial-level UPSs typically run for a

outlet, as s h o w n in Exhibit 6 - 1 2 . T h e surge suppressor

significantly longer a m o u n t of time (up t o a few h o u r s ) ,

fluctuations,

but n o t long enough to p o w e r a facility during an e x tended p o w e r outage. E x h i b i t 6-12

Dust, heat, static electricity, a n d moisture

Surge protectors and UPSs

can also be dangerous to a c o m p u t e r , so be sure n o t to place your c o m p u t e r e q u i p m e n t in direct sunlight or in a dusty a r e a . Y o u c a n use a small handheld vacuum made for electrical equipment periodically to r e m o v e the dust from the k e y b o a r d and from inside the system unit, but be very careful when v a c u u m i n g

inside the

system unit. Also, be sure the system unit has plenty of ventilation, especially a r o u n d the fan vents. T o help reduce the a m o u n t o f dust that

SURGE S U P P R E S S O R FOR NOTEBOOK COMPUTERS

is drawn into the fan vents, raise your desktop c o m p u t e r several inches o f f the floor. Y o u should also avoid placing a p o r t a b l e c o m p u t e r on a soft surface, such as a c o u c h or b l a n k e t , to help prevent overheating. Unless your c o m puter is ruggedized, like the o n e s h o w n in E x -

S U R G E S U P P R E S S O R FOR DESKTOP COMPUTERS

hibit 6 - 1 3 , do not get it wet o r otherwise e x pose it to adverse c o n d i t i o n s .

s u r g e s u p p r e s s o r A device that protects a computer system from damage due to electrical fluctuations. u n i n t e r r u p t i b l e p o w e r s u p p l y ( U P S ) A device containing a built-in battery that provides continuous power UPS FOR HOME COMPUTERS

to a computer and other connected components when the

U P S FOR SERVERS

Chapter

electricity goes out.

6:

Network

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

To protect against becoming infected with a c o m -

jnt o f the phones

puter virus or other type of m a l w a r e , all computers

received by o n e d a t a recove

and other devices used to access the Internet or a c o m -

firm are w a t e r d a m a g e d

pany network should have security software installed. Security s o f t w a r e typically includes a variety of security features, including a

firewall,

protection against spy-

ware and bots, and protection against some types o f E x h i b i t 6-13

online fraud. O n e o f the m o s t i m p o r t a n t components

A ruggedized computer

is antivirus s o f t w a r e , which protects against computer viruses and other types of m a l w a r e . Antivirus

software

typically

runs

continuously

whenever the computer is on t o perform

real-time

monitoring of the c o m p u t e r and incoming email messages, instant messages, W e b page content, and downloaded files to prevent malicious software from executing. M a n y antivirus programs also automatically scan any devices as soon as they are c o n n e c t e d to a USB port in order to guard against infections from a USB flash drive, a portable digital media player, o r other USB device. Antivirus software helps prevent malware from being installed on your c o m p u t e r because it deletes or quarantines any suspicious c o n t e n t as it arrives. Regular full system scans can detect and remove any viruses or w o r m s that find their way onto your computer. See E x h i b i t 6 - 1 4 . E x h i b i t 6-14

security

Security software

s o f t w a r e Software, typically a suite of programs,

ANTIVIRUS SOFTWARE

used to protect your computer against a variety of threats. antivirus software Software used to detect and eliminate computer viruses and other types of malware. disaster r e c o v e r y p l a n (business c o n t i n u i t y p l a n ) A written plan that describes the steps a company will take following the occurrence of a disaster. h o t site An alternate location equipped with the computers and other equipment necessary to keep a business's operations going. f i r e w a l l A collection of hardware and/or software that protects a computer or computer network from unauthorized access.

Chapter

6:

Network

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

Disaster Recovery Plan To

and

e m e r g e n c y c o m m u n i c a t i o n s m e t h o d s , a n d so f o r t h . If a

o t h e r organizations should have a disaster recovery

supplement

backup

procedures,

businesses

h o t s i t e — a n a l t e r n a t e location e q u i p p e d w i t h t h e c o m -

p l a n (also c a l l e d a business c o n t i n u i t y p l a n ) — a

plan

puters, c a b l i n g , desks, a n d o t h e r e q u i p m e n t n e c e s s a r y

t h a t spells o u t w h a t t h e o r g a n i z a t i o n w i l l d o t o p r e -

t o k e e p a business's o p e r a t i o n s g o i n g — i s t o b e u s e d

p a r e f o r a n d r e c o v e r f r o m a d i s r u p t i v e e v e n t , such as

f o l l o w i n g a m a j o r disaster, it s h o u l d b e s e t u p a h e a d

a f i r e , n a t u r a l disaster, terrorist a t t a c k , p o w e r o u t a g e ,

o f t i m e , a n d i n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t t h e h o t site s h o u l d b e

o r c o m p u t e r f a i l u r e . Disaster r e c o v e r y plans s h o u l d i n -

i n c l u d e d in t h e disaster recovery p l a n . Businesses t h a t

c l u d e i n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t w h o w i l l b e in c h a r g e i m m e -

c a n n o t a f f o r d t o b e w i t h o u t e m a i l service s h o u l d also

d i a t e l y a f t e r t h e disaster has o c c u r r e d , w h a t a l t e r n a t e

consider m a k i n g arrangements w i t h a n e m e r g e n c y mail

facilities a n d e q u i p m e n t can b e used, w h e r e

backup

system p r o v i d e r t o a c t as a t e m p o r a r y m a i l s e r v e r if t h e

m e d i a is l o c a t e d , t h e priority o f g e t t i n g e a c h o p e r a t i o n

c o m p a n y m a i l server is n o t f u n c t i o n i n g . C o p i e s o f t h e

b a c k o n l i n e , disaster insurance c o v e r a g e i n f o r m a t i o n .

disaster r e c o v e r y p l a n s h o u l d b e l o c a t e d off-site.

Individuals and businesses c a n p r o t e c t against s o m e

installed on a c o m p u t e r w i t h o u t the user's p e r m i s s i o n .

types o f c o m p u t e r s a b o t a g e by c o n t r o l l i n g access t o their

F o r e x a m p l e , the user can be p r o m p t e d f o r p e r m i s s i o n

c o m p u t e r s a n d n e t w o r k s . Intrusion p r o t e c t i o n systems

w h e n e v e r a d o w n l o a d is initiated.

c a n help businesses detect and p r o t e c t against denial o f service ( D o S ) a t t a c k s . F o r e x t r a p r o t e c t i o n against spym a l w a r e , specialized security p r o g r a m s (such as the an-

Firewalls, Encryption, and Virtual Private Networks (VPNs)

t i s p y w a r e p r o g r a m shown in E x h i b i t 6 - 1 4 ) c a n be used.

A f i r e w a l l is a security system t h a t e s s e n t i a l l y c r e a t e s

In a d d i t i o n , m o s t W e b browsers have security settings

a b a r r i e r b e t w e e n a c o m p u t e r o r n e t w o r k a n d the In-

t h a t c a n be used t o help prevent p r o g r a m s f r o m being

ternet in o r d e r t o p r o t e c t against u n a u t h o r i z e d a c c e s s .

w a r e , r o g u e antivirus p r o g r a m s , and o t h e r specialized

Securing a Router A h o m e wireless n e t w o r k should b e secured p r o p -

Use the router's IP address to display the router's configuration screen.

Use this tab to enable MAC address filtering.

erly so it c a n n o t b e used by u n a u t h o r i z e d individuals. Security settings a r e specified in t h e router's c o n f i g u ration screen, such as t h e o n e s h o w n in t h e a c c o m p a -

Use this tab to change the administrator password used to access this configuration screen.

nying illustration. To o p e n y o u r router's c o n f i g u r a t i o n Type your desired SSID here.

screen t o check or modify t h e settings, t y p e t h e IP address assigned t o t h a t device (such as 192.168.0.1— check f o r a sticker o n t h e b o t t o m of y o u r router or y o u r router's d o c u m e n t a t i o n f o r its d e f a u l t IP address

Enable SSID broadcast here.

a n d u s e r n a m e ) in y o u r browser's Address bar. Use t h e d e f a u l t password listed in y o u r router d o c u m e n t a t i o n t o log o n t h e first t i m e , a n d t h e n c h a n g e t h e password

Select the desired security mode here.

using t h e c o n f i g u r a t i o n screen t o p r e v e n t u n a u t h o r ized individuals f r o m c h a n g i n g y o u r router settings. To secure t h e router, enter t h e n e t w o r k n a m e (SSID) y o u w a n t t o h a v e associated w i t h t h e router, select

Type your desired network key here.

t h e a p p r o p r i a t e security m o d e , such as W E P , W P A , o r W P A 2 , t o b e used, a n d t h e n t y p e a secure passphrase t o b e used in order t o log o n t o t h e n e t w o r k .

Chapter

6:

Network

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

Exhibit 6-15 Online security scans can check your system for vulnerabilities Firewalls are

typically

two-way, so they check all incoming and out-

"^p Symantec.

going traffic and a l l o w only authorized traffic

Symantec'

to pass through the firewall. Personal

Security Check

firewalls

Secunty Check testyour ci tool that hefts deten t your ne

are typically s o f t w a r e -

•

based systems or they can be built into m a n y

Security Scan

operating systems, and they

are

geared

ward protecting computers f r o m ers cess

attempting those

through net

to-

IS YOUW COMPUTE* SA« MOM OMJtC THREATS*'

home

their

Internet

connections

Symantec Security Check

Virus Detection B YCX* COMPUTER RB

1. Click to run the security scan.

All

with

^Symantec.

C 19#V2«* SrmwlK Corporation. M notes r.«d. L«o, Mtpv/fcunty 5ym»fit« conrx/iCv«/)sc. 1

Inter-

computers

•

> LEARN MORE

ac-

computers

connections.

Click here to download

& Sym**« S«uc*y C*«» - Wmdow, Internet bpk«-

•

hackto

1 Norton S e c u r i t y S c a n 1 ^^^H

9 Internet | Protected Mod«: Of

direct 2. No threats were found.

( D S L , c a b l e , satellite, o r fixed

wireless

Internet

access) should use a firewall; c o m p u t e r s using dial-up

w o r k s use encryption to secure data t h a t is transferred

Internet access only are relatively safe from hackers.

over the n e t w o r k . S e c u r e W e b p a g e s use encryption so

M a n y routers, m o d e m s , and other pieces o f network-

that sensitive data sent via the W e b page is protected

ing hardware also include built-in firewall capabilities

as it travels over the Internet. T h e m o s t c o m m o n secu-

to help secure the n e t w o r k s these devices are used with.

rity protocols used with secure W e b pages are Secure

Firewalls designed t o p r o t e c t business networks may

Sockets Layer (SSL) and E x t e n d e d Validation Secure

be software-based, h a r d w a r e - b a s e d , or a c o m b i n a t i o n

Sockets Layer ( E V S S L ) . T h e U R L for W e b pages using

o f the t w o . T h e y can typically be used both to prevent

either form o f SSL begins with https:

network access by h a c k e r s and other outsiders, and to

instead of

http:.

Some Internet services, such as Skype VoIP calls

control employee Internet access.

and Hushmail Web-based emails, use built-in encryption. Encryption can also be added manually to a file

After installing and setting up a firewall, individuals and businesses should test their systems to determine

or an email message before it is sent over the Internet

if vulnerabilities still exist. Individuals can use online

to ensure that the content is unreadable if the file or

security tests—such as the Symantec Security Check

message is intercepted during transit. In addition to se-

shown in Exhibit 6 - 1 5 o r the tests at Gibson Research's

curing files during transit, encryption can be used to

ShieldsUP! site—to check their computers; businesses

protect the files stored on a hard drive so they will be

may wish to hire an outside consultant to perform a

unreadable if opened by an unauthorized person, such

comprehensive security assessment.

as if a hacker accesses a file c o n t a i n i n g sensitive data o r

E n c r y p t i o n is a w a y o f t e m p o r a r i l y converting data

if a computer containing sensitive files is lost or stolen.

into a form, known as a cipher, that is unreadable until

Increasingly, computers and hard drives, particularly

it is decrypted in order t o p r o t e c t that data from being

those used with portable c o m p u t e r s , are self-encrypt-

v i e w e d by unauthorized individuals. Secure Wi-Fi net-

ing; that is, encrypting all data automatically and invis-

e n c r y p t i o n A method of scrambling the contents

lould

of an email message or a file to make it unreadable if an

entered only on secure W e b

unauthorized user intercepts it. s e c u r e W e b p a g e A Web page that uses encryption to protect

pages so that a criminal cannot

information transmitted via that Web page.

Chapter

6:

Network

and

intercept t h a t '

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

E x h i b i t 6-16

Using public key encryption to secure an email message 1 . The email message (including any attached les) is created by the sender, who then uses the recipient's public key to encrypt the email (including any attached les) using the Message Options dialog box.

ibly to the user. W i n d o w s , M a c O S , and other current

files securely t o o t h e r s , provided b o t h the sender a n d

operating systems support encryption, and businesses

recipient agree on the private key t h a t will be used t o

are increasingly turning to encryption to prevent data

access the file. Public k e y e n c r y p t i o n , also called a s y m m e t r i c key

loss if a d a t a breach should occur. T h e t w o m o s t c o m m o n types o f encryption in use

encryption, utilizes t w o encryption keys t o encrypt and

t o d a y are private key encryption and public key en-

decrypt d o c u m e n t s . Specifically, public key encryption

c r y p t i o n . P r i v a t e k e y e n c r y p t i o n , also called s y m m e t r i c

uses a private key and a public key that are related

key e n c r y p t i o n , uses a single secret private key (es-

mathematically to each other a n d have been assigned

sentially a p a s s w o r d ) to b o t h encrypt and decrypt a

to a particular individual. An individual's public key is

file o r m e s s a g e being sent over the Internet. It is often

n o t secret and is available for a n y o n e t o use, but the

used t o e n c r y p t files stored on an individual's c o m -

corresponding private key is used only by the indi-

puter b e c a u s e the individual w h o selects the private

vidual to w h o m it was assigned. D o c u m e n t s o r mes-

key is likely the only o n e w h o will need t o access those

sages encrypted with a public key can only be decrypted

files. Private key e n c r y p t i o n c a n also be used t o send

with the matching private key. E x h i b i t 6 - 1 6 illustrates

O

CI

p r i v a t e k e y e n c r y p t i o n A type of encryption J

x

that uses a single key to encrypt and decrypt the file or

aiiuurd that may eventually

message. p u b l i c k e y e n c r y p t i o n A type of encryption that uses key pairs

p l a c e S S L is T r a n s p o r t L a y e r

to encrypt and decrypt the file or message.

Chapter

6:

Network

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

Additional Public Hotspot Precautions • Turn o f f file s h a r i n g so

Using f i r e w a l l s o f t w a r e , s e c u r e W e b p a g e s , V P N s , a n d e n c r y p t i o n is a g o o d start f o r p r o t e c t i n g a g a i n s t u n a u -

others

t h o r i z e d access a n d u n a u t h o r i z e d use a t a public Wi-Fi

files o n y o u r h a r d d r i v e .

h o t s p o t . H o w e v e r , y o u c a n use t h e a d d i t i o n a l p r e c a u -

can't

access t h e

• Turn o f f B l u e t o o t h a n d

tions listed b e l o w t o a v o i d d a t a o n y o u r c o m p u t e r s o r

Wi-Fi w h e n y o u a r e n o t

data sent over t h e Internet f r o m being compromised.

using t h e m .

• Turn o f f a u t o m a t i c c o n n e c t i o n s a n d p a y a t t e n t i o n t o

• Disable

t h e list o f a v a i l a b l e h o t s p o t s t o t r y t o m a k e sure y o u

bilities

c o n n e c t t o a l e g i t i m a t e access p o i n t .

another

• Only enter passwords, credit card numbers, a n d other

from

capa-

ad

hoc

to

prevent computer

connecting

to

Mike Flippo/Shutterstock.com

your computer direct-

d a t a o n secure W e b p a g e s using a V P N .

ly w i t h o u t using a n access p o i n t .

• If y o u ' r e n o t using a V P N , e n c r y p t all sensitive files

• U s e antivirus s o f t w a r e a n d m a k e s u r e y o u r o p e r a t i n g

before transferring or emailing t h e m .

system is u p t o d a t e .

• If y o u ' r e n o t using a V P N , a v o i d o n l i n e s h o p p i n g , b a n k i n g , a n d o t h e r sensitive t r a n s a c t i o n s .

h o w public key encryption is used t o secure an email

Understanding Privacy Concerns

LO6.5

message. W h i l e email and file encryption c a n be used t o transfer individual messages and files securely over the Internet, a v i r t u a l p r i v a t e n e t w o r k ( V P N ) is designed t o

!

be used when a c o n t i n u o u s secure channel over the Internet is needed. A V P N provides a secure private tun-

P

rivacy is usually defined as the state o f being concealed o r free from unauthorized intrusion. T h e

term i n f o r m a t i o n p r i v a c y refers t o the rights o f indi-

nel from the user's c o m p u t e r through the Internet t o

viduals and companies t o c o n t r o l h o w information

another destination a n d is m o s t often used t o provide

about them is collected and used. T h e problem o f h o w

remote employees with secure access t o a c o m p a n y net-

to protect personal p r i v a c y — t h a t is, h o w to keep per-

w o r k . V P N s use encryption a n d other security mecha-

sonal information private—existed long before c o m -

nisms to ensure that only authorized users can access the

puters entered the picture. F o r e x a m p l e , sealing w a x

remote network and that the data c a n n o t be intercepted

and unique signet rings were used centuries ago to seal

during transit. Because it uses the Internet instead o f an

letters, wills, and other personal documents to guard

expensive private physical n e t w o r k , a V P N can provide

against their content being revealed t o unauthorized in-

a secure environment over a large geographical area at

dividuals, as well as to alert the recipient if such an in-

a manageable cost.

trusion occurred while the d o c u m e n t was in transit. But computers, with their ability t o store, duplicate, and

virtual

private

n e t w o r k ( V P N ) A private, secure

path over the Internet that provides authorized users a secure means of accessing a private network via the Internet p p r i v a c y The state of being concealed or free from unauthorized

'

PROVIDED

intrusion. mt i n f o r m a t i o n p r i v a c y The rights of individuals and companies in control how information about them is collected and used. to

THE DANGER THAT THE INFORMATION WILL B E MISUSED

• Chapter

6:

Network

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

manipulate large quantities o f data, c o m b i n e d with the

M a r k e t i n g databases are also used in c o n j u n c t i o n

fact that d a t a b a s e s containing our personal informa-

with W e b activities, such as social n e t w o r k

tion c a n be accessed and shared via the Internet, have

and searches performed via s o m e personalized search

added a n e w twist to the issue of personal privacy.

services. F o r instance, the data stored o n F a c e b o o k ,

activity

M a n y people are concerned a b o u t the privacy o f

M y S p a c e , and other social n e t w o r k i n g sites c a n be gath-

their W e b site activities and email messages. Recently,

ered and used for advertising purposes by m a r k e t i n g

an unprecedented number of high-profile data breaches

c o m p a n i e s , and the activities o f users o f personalized

have o c c u r r e d — s o m e via hacking and other network

search services (where users log in t o use the service)

intrusions; others due to lost or stolen h a r d w a r e , or

can be tracked and that data can be used f o r m a r k e t i n g

carelessness with papers or storage media containing

purposes.

Social Security numbers or other sensitive d a t a . Because

I n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t individuals is also available in

every data breach is a risk to information privacy, pro-

g o v e r n m e n t d a t a b a s e s . Some i n f o r m a t i o n , such as S o -

tecting the data stored in databases today is an impor-

cial Security earnings and i n c o m e t a x returns, is c o n -

tant c o n c e r n for everyone. O t h e r privacy concerns are

fidential

spam and o t h e r marketing activities, electronic surveil-

individuals. O t h e r information, such as birth records,

lance, and electronic monitoring.

marriage certificates, and divorce i n f o r m a t i o n , as well

and can legally be seen only by authorized

as property purchases, assessments, liens, a n d t a x values, is available to the public, including to the m a r k e t -

Databases, Electronic Profiling, Spam, and Other Marketing Activities

ing c o m p a n i e s that specialize in creating m a r k e t i n g databases. In the past, the data a b o u t any o n e individual was

I n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t individuals can be located in many

stored in a variety o f separate l o c a t i o n s , such as at dif-

different d a t a b a s e s . F o r e x a m p l e , educational institu-

ferent government agencies, individual retail stores, the

tions have databases containing student information, organizations

use a database to hold employee

person's b a n k and credit card c o m p a n i e s , a n d so forth.

in-

Because it w o u l d be extremely time c o n s u m i n g to lo-

f o r m a t i o n , and most physicians and health insurance

cate all the information a b o u t one person f r o m all these

providers maintain databases containing individuals'

different places, there was a fairly high level o f i n f o r m a -

medical i n f o r m a t i o n . If these databases are adequately

tion privacy. Today, however, m o s t o f an individual's

protected f r o m hackers and other unauthorized indi-

data is stored on computers that c a n c o m m u n i c a t e with

viduals, and if the data is not transported on a portable

each other via the Internet, which m e a n s accessing per-

c o m p u t e r o r other device that may be vulnerable to loss

sonal i n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t s o m e o n e is m u c h easier than

or theft, these databases do not pose a significant pri-

it used t o be. F o r example, a variety o f public infor-

vacy c o n c e r n t o consumers because the information can

m a t i o n a b o u t individuals is available free t h r o u g h the

rarely be shared without the individuals' permission.

Internet, as demonstrated in E x h i b i t 6 - 1 7 ; there are also

However, the data stored in these types o f databases is

paid services that can perform online d a t a b a s e searches

n o t always sufficiently protected and has been breached

for you.

quite often in the past. Consequently, these databases,

Collecting in-depth i n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t an individual

along with m a r k e t i n g databases and government data-

is k n o w n as electronic profiling. E l e c t r o n i c profiles are

bases that are typically associated with a higher risk of

generally designed to provide specific i n f o r m a t i o n and

personal privacy violations, are of growing c o n c e r n to

can include an individual's n a m e , c u r r e n t and previous

privacy a d v o c a t e s . M a r k e t i n g d a t a b a s e s contain marketing and demographic data a b o u t people, such as where they live and

m a r k e t i n g d a t a b a s e A collection of data about

what products they buy. This information is used for

people that is stored in a large database and used for

marketing purposes, such as sending advertisements that

marketing purposes.

fit each individual's interests via regular mail or email, or trying t o sign people up over the phone for some type of

g o v e r n m e n t d a t a b a s e A collection of data about people that is

service. Almost any time you provide information about

collected and maintained by the government.

yourself online or offline—when you subscribe to a mag-

e l e c t r o n i c p r o f i l i n g Using electronic means to collect a variety

azine, fill out a product registration card, or buy some-

of in-depth information about an individual, such as name, address,

thing using a credit card—there is a good chance that the information

income, and buying habits.

will find its way into a marketing database.

ch

a p t e r 6 : Network

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

E x h i b i t 6-17

Searchable databases available via the Internet PROPERTY VALUE SEARCH Some states permit searches for property located in that state, such as displaying the owner's name, address, and a link to additional information including property value for the supplied owner name.

& APPNITAL VISION ASTESIOR I' D«UB*)E

D A ME & V , I HIS PROPERTY SMITH A

34 BEVERLY ST

W THIS PROPERLY SMITH ALICE E TRUSTEE

GS HYACINTH PR

W THIS PROPERTY SMITH BARBARA PEASE

20 SLADES CORNER RD

W MHS PROPERTY |8MFTH BRIAN J & vi T H T S PROPERTY SMITH CECIL 111 ETAL

559 HIXVILLE RD

W T H T T PROPERTY SMITH DAVID R S WILLIAM J & W THIS PROPERTY SMITH DAVID R & WILLIAM J &

44 ALDEN AVE

M LINS PROPERLY SMITH DEBORAH R &

619 HORSENECK RD

M THIS PROPERTY SMITH DEBORAH R &

HORSENECK RD

M THIS PROPERTY SMITH EARLEW*

143 CLARENOON ST

SQPI^-J) * W

WT H T S PROPERTY SMITH ELVIRA J

4 3 OLD WESTPORT RD

W T H R S PROPERTY SMITH ELVIRA J

OLD WESTPORT RD

H T T P W /: W W R .E A L E R T » T E C .O U N T Y < L E R I D « L L » J C O U N T Y ORG I /MCH «:P> C '«

; 10 OFFICUL PUBLIC R E C O R D I S E « R C HC N T E N AE N T R Y FORM.

Official

"FLBMOHBRDOELN

WT H R S PROPERTY SMITH FRANCESCA M W THIS PROPERTY SMITH GENE S TRUSTEE

280 ELM ST

m T H R S PROPERTY SMITH GERALD S & SARAH A L

1 2 MIDDLE ST

ft « B • • # •

j |

VITAL RECORDS SEARCH Some counties and states allow searches for documents related to marriages, divorces, births, legal judgments, deeds, liens, powers of attorney, and so forth.

i

Public Records - Search

(MM/DD/YYYY)

MAINTENANCE CONTRACT MARRIAGE LICENSE MARSHAL DEED MATERIAL LIEN MECHANICS LIEN

I CROSS REFERENCE INSTRUMENT NUMBER

Your Digital Directory NLDWECLTOM

WORCH BY P H O N O

AREA 4 lift CODE*

WEB WAICH

M O R E BUSINESS S E A R C H OPTIONS

Find a Business BUSINESS NAME O RC A T E G O R Y S. L A W Y E R ! "J

| ENIER L O C A T O I N (E 9 ADDRESS, CITY, STALE, 01 ZIP CODE)

|

9

ADDRESS NUMBER AND PHONE N U M B E R SEARCH Any information listed in a U.S. telephone book can be found using this site. You can search either by name or telephone number to view the available information.

I N T E R N E T|P R O T E C T E D MODE: ON

addresses, telephone number, marital status, number

individuals in a particular state w h o s e street addresses

and age o f children, spending habits, and product pref-

are considered t o be in an affluent area and w h o buy

erences. T h e information retrieved from electronic pro-

baby products. Another c o m p a n y might request a list

files is then sold t o c o m p a n i e s upon request t o be used

o f all S U V owners in a particular city w h o have n o t

for marketing purposes, as illustrated in E x h i b i t 6 - 1 8 .

purchased a c a r in five years.

F o r e x a m p l e , o n e c o m p a n y might request a list o f all

M o s t businesses and W e b sites that collect personal information have a p r i v a c y p o l i c y that discloses h o w the

personal information you provide will be used (see E x p r i v a c y p o l i c y A policy, commonly posted on a

hibit 6 - 1 9 ) . As long as their actions d o not violate their

company's Web site, that explains how personal information

privacy policy, it is legal f o r businesses t o sell the per-

provided to that company will be used.

sonal data that they collect. T h e r e a r e s o m e problems with privacy policies, however, including that they a r e

s p a m Unsolicited, bulk email sent over the Internet.

sometimes difficult t o decipher and that m o s t people do

Chapter

6:

Network

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

E x h i b i t 6-18

How electronic profiling might work

W h e n you make an electronic transaction, information about who you are and what you buy is recorded, usually in a database.

Databases containing the identities of people and what they buy are sold to marketing companies.

The marketing companies add The marketing companies create the new data to their marketing lists of individuals matching the databases; they can then reorgspecific needs of companies; the anize the data in ways that might companies buy the lists for their be valuable to other companies. own marketing purposes.

n o t t a k e t h e t i m e t o read t h e m b e f o r e using a site. In

used t o sell p r o d u c t s o r services t o i n d i v i d u a l s . S p a m is

a d d i t i o n , m a n y businesses p e r i o d i c a l l y c h a n g e t h e i r pri-

a l s o used in p h i s h i n g s c h e m e s a n d o t h e r d o t c o n s a n d

vacy policies without warning, requiring consumers to

is

r e r e a d p r i v a c y policies f r e q u e n t l y o r risk t h e i r p e r s o n a l

nets. T h e text message spam

i n f o r m a t i o n b e i n g used in a m a n n e r t h a t t h e y did n o t

s h o w n in E x h i b i t 6 - 2 0

is a n

a g r e e t o w h e n t h e i n f o r m a t i o n w a s initially p r o v i d e d .

e x a m p l e o f a phishing

spam

Spam

refers

to

unsolicited

email

sent t o

a

large

sent

frequently

message.

A

via

great

bot-

deal

of

g r o u p o f individuals a t o n e t i m e . T h e e l e c t r o n i c e q u i v a -

s p a m involves

lent o f j u n k m a i l (see E x h i b i t 6 - 2 0 ) , s p a m is m o s t o f t e n

p r o d u c t s , such as medicine o r

health-related

w e i g h t loss s y s t e m s , c o u n t e r f e i t p r o d u c t s , p o r n o g r a E x h i b i t 6-19

phy,

Web site privacy policy

as well as n e w a n d o f t e n f r a u d u l e n t

This indicates that your

& LANDS' END | CUSTOMER SERVICE | PRIVACY - WINDOWS INTERNET EXPLORER J^^L^y • ntact it directly o r use a W e b

nesses is protecting the i n f o r m a t i o n l o c a t e d on paper

itc t h a t provides opt-out tools for

documents and hardware that are t o be disposed of. Papers, C D s , D V D s , and other media c o n t a i n i n g sensitive data should be shredded, and the hard drives o f c o m puters to be disposed of should be w i p e d — o v e r w r i t t e n several times using special disk-wiping o r disk-

marketing

activity before c o m p a n i e s can collect

erasing

or

software—before

share any personal data. This is already the case in the

drive

E u r o p e a n U n i o n . In fact, W a l - M a r t recently changed its

that

still

in the U.S. business community is to use your informa-

personal

merely

be

been refor-

(which

can

recovered),

wiped drive is very

specifically opt out. stores

sold

data on a properly

tion as allowed for by each privacy policy unless you that

has

matted

only if c u s t o m e r s opt in. However, the general practice

business

are

erased o r even

privacy policy to share information with third parties

Any

they

or recycled. Unlike the d a t a on a

difficult

information

or

impossi-

ble to recover.

a b o u t employees, customers, or other individuals must

Wiping is typically viewed as an a c c e p t a b l e pre-

take adequate security measures to protect the privacy

caution for deleting sensitive data like W e b site pass-

o f that i n f o r m a t i o n . Secure servers and encryption can

words and t a x returns from hard drives a n d o t h e r stor-

protect the data stored on a server; firewalls and access

age media. However, before disposing o f storage media

c o n t r o l systems can protect against unauthorized ac-

containing sensitive data, businesses should consider

cess. T o prevent personal information from being sent

physically destroying the media, such as by shredding

intentionally or inadvertently via email, organizations

or melting the hardware. T o help with this p r o c e s s , data

can use email encryption systems that automatically en-

destruction services can be used.

crypt email messages containing certain keywords. F o r instance, s o m e hospitals use encryption systems that

Electronic Surveillance and Monitoring

scan all outgoing email messages and a t t a c h m e n t s , and then a u t o m a t i c a l l y encrypt all messages that appear to

T h e r e are m a n y ways electronic t o o l s c a n be used to

c o n t a i n patient-identifiable i n f o r m a t i o n . T h e recipient

w a t c h individuals, listen in on their c o n v e r s a t i o n s , o r

o f an encrypted email message typically receives a link

m o n i t o r their activities. Some o f these t o o l s , such as devices used by individuals to eavesdrop on wireless telep h o n e conversations, are not legal. O t h e r products and technologies, such as the GPS devices t h a t are built into

Chief Privacy Officer

some cars so they can be located if they are stolen o r the monitoring ankle bracelets used for offenders sentenced

E n s u r i n g t h a t t h e p r i v a t e d a t a s t o r e d by a business is a d e q u a t e l y p r o t e c t e d is increasingly responsibility o f a chief privacy o f f i c e r rapidly

growing

position

to house arrest, are used solely f o r law e n f o r c e m e n t

the

purposes. Still other electronic t o o l s , such as c o m p u t e r

(CPO)—a

in business. Typically,

C P O s a r e r e s p o n s i b l e f o r e n s u r i n g privacy l a w s a r e c o m p l i e d w i t h , i d e n t i f y i n g t h e d a t a in a c o m p a n y t h a t n e e d s t o b e p r o t e c t e d , d e v e l o p i n g policies t o protect t h a t data, and responding t o any incidents

original factory settings before

t h a t occur. A n o t h e r issue t h a t m u s t b e d e a l t w i t h

recycling o r disposing o f it t o

by C P O s is t h e c h a n g i n g d e f i n i t i o n o f w h a t i n f o r m a t i o n is r e g a r d e d as p e r s o n a l a n d , t h e r e f o r e ,

clear all o f your personal di

needs to be safeguarded.

from the ph(

mm

Chapter

6:

Network

and

In

monitoring

software, video

surveillance

equipment,

and presence technology, c a n often be used legally by individuals, by businesses in c o n j u n c t i o n with employee monitoring, and by law e n f o r c e m e n t agencies. Computer monitoring s o f t w a r e records keystrokes,

logs the programs o r W e b sites accessed, o r otherwise monitors

someone's

computer

activity. T h e s e

pro-

grams are typically m a r k e t e d t o w a r d parents, spouses, law enforcement agencies, o r employers. Although it is legal to use c o m p u t e r m o n i t o r i n g software on your o w n computer or o n the c o m p u t e r s o f your employees, installing it on other c o m p u t e r s w i t h o u t the o w n e r s ' knowledge to m o n i t o r their c o m p u t e r activity is usually illegal. V i d e o s u r v e i l l a n c e is closed circuit security cameras

Privacy Expectations in Public Places Legally s p e a k i n g , p e o p l e t y p i c a l l y h a v e f e w rights t o privacy in public places, b u t m a n y believe t h a t new

technology—such

as c a m e r a

phones—will

require t h e l a w t o reconsider a n d redefine w h a t is c o n s i d e r e d t o b e a p u b l i c p l a c e . In fact, some places h a v e b a n n e d

mobile

p h o n e s entirely t o

protect

privacy,

such

individuals'

as in

locker

rooms, restrooms, a n d c o u r t h o u s e s , a n d by m a n y research a n d p r o d u c t i o n facilities t o p r e v e n t corporate espionage.

used t o m o n i t o r activities taking place at facilities for security purposes. It is routinely used at retail stores, b a n k s , office buildings,

and other

privately owned facilities that are open

t o the pub-

lic, as well as public locations such as streets, parks, airports, sporting arenas, and subway systems for law enforcement purposes. Public video surveillance systems are often used in c o n j u n c t i o n with face recognition technology t o try t o identify k n o w n terrorists and other criminals, t o identify criminals when their crimes are caught o n tape, and t o prevent crimes

Employee monitoring

is t h e a c t o f recording

or

observing the actions o f employees while on the j o b .

from occurring. M a n y privacy advocates object t o the

Common

use o f video surveillance a n d face recognition technol-

screening telephone calls, reviewing email, and track-

employee

monitoring

activities

include

ogy in public locations; their concerns are primarily

ing c o m p u t e r and Internet usage. A l t h o u g h many em-

based on h o w the video captured by these systems will

ployees feel that being w a t c h e d at w o r k is an invasion

be used.

o f their personal privacy, it is legal a n d very c o m m o n in the United States.

c o m p u t e r m o n i t o r i n g s o f t w a r e Software that

P r e s e n c e t e c h n o l o g y is the ability o f one computing

can be used to record an individual's computer usage, such

device on a network t o identify a n o t h e r device on the

as recording the actual keystrokes used or creating a summary of

same network and determine its status. It can be used

Web sites and programs accessed. v i d e o s u r v e i l l a n c e The use of video cameras to monitor attmtiesof individuals for work-related or crime-prevention purposes. e m p l o y e e m o n i t o r i n g Observing or reviewing employees' actions while they are on the job. p r e s e n c e t e c h n o l o g y Technology that enables one computing device to locate and identify the current status of another device on the same network.

ie American M a n a g e m e n t isociation ( A M A ) reports that the majority o f all U . S . companies use s o m e type o f electronic surveillance with their employ*

to tell when s o m e o n e o n the n e t w o r k is using his or her c o m p u t e r o r m o b i l e phone, as well as the individual's

MONITOR AT-WORK ACTIVITIES

availability for c o m m u n i c a t i o n s ; that is, whether or not the individual is able and willing to take a call or re-

IT IS WISE—FROM A PRIVACY

spond t o an I M at the present time.

STANDPOINT—TO AVOID ACTIVITIES AT WO

Protecting Personal and Workplace Privacy T h e r e are not many options for protecting yourself a g a i n s t c o m p u t e r m o n i t o r i n g by y o u r e m p l o y e r o r the g o v e r n m e n t , o r against video surveillance

systems.

be m o n i t o r e d when initially hired. T h e y should review

H o w e v e r , businesses should t a k e t h e neces-

it periodically t o ensure that they understand the policy

sary security m e a s u r e s t o ensure t h a t

and do n o t violate any c o m p a n y rules while w o r k i n g

e m p l o y e e activities a r e n o t b e -

for that organization.

ing m o n i t o r e d by a h a c k e r o r other

AntiSpy

unauthorized

ual. Individuals

individ-

should

also

Network and Internet Security Legislation

LO66

secure their h o m e c o m p u t e r s to p r o t e c t a g a i n s t

keystroke

logging

computer

or

other

monitoring software that may

A

be i n a d v e r t e n t l y installed via P

an

electronic

game,

or

greeting

other

lthough new legislation is passed periodically t o

card,

address new types o f c o m p u t e r c r i m e s , it is dif-

downloaded

ficult for the legal system to keep p a c e with the rate at

file, a n d t h a t is designed t o p r o a h a c k e r with a c c o u n t

which technology changes. In addition, there are both

numbers,

domestic and international jurisdictional issues because

p a s s w o r d s , a n d o t h e r sensitive data t h a t c o u l d

m a n y c o m p u t e r crimes affect businesses a n d individu-

be used in identity theft o r o t h e r f r a u d u l e n t activities.

als located in geographic areas o t h e r t h a n the one in

A n t i s p y w a r e s o f t w a r e c a n be used t o detect a n d re-

which the c o m p u t e r criminal is l o c a t e d , a n d hackers

m o v e s o m e types o f illegal c o m p u t e r m o n i t o r i n g and

c a n m a k e it appear that activity is c o m i n g f r o m a dif-

spyware software.

ferent location than it really is. Nevertheless, c o m p u t e r

T o p r o t e c t the personal privacy o f their employees

crime legislation continues t o be p r o p o s e d a n d c o m -

and c u s t o m e r s , businesses and organizations have a re-

puter crimes are being prosecuted. A list o f selected fed-

sponsibility t o keep private information a b o u t their em-

eral laws concerning n e t w o r k a n d Internet security is

ployees, the company, and their customers safe. Strong

shown in E x h i b i t 6 - 2 2 .

security measures can help to protect against unauthor-

T h e high level o f c o n c e r n regarding c o m p u t e r se-

ized access by hackers. Businesses and organizations

curity and personal privacy has led state a n d federal

should t a k e precautions against both intentional and

legislators t o pass a variety o f laws since the 1 9 7 0 s .

accidental breaches o f privacy by employees. Finally,

Internet privacy is viewed as o n e o f the t o p policy

businesses and organizations have the responsibility t o

issues facing Congress today, a n d n u m e r o u s bills have

m o n i t o r their employees' activities t o ensure workers

been p r o p o s e d in the last several years regarding s p a m ,

are productive. In general, businesses must maintain a

telemarketing, spyware, online profiling, a n d

safe and productive w o r k p l a c e environment and pro-

very i m p o r t a n t privacy issues. H o w e v e r , C o n g r e s s has

tect the privacy o f their customers and employees, while

had difficulty passing new legislation. In a d d i t i o n t o

at the same time ensure the c o m p a n y is n o t vulnerable

the reasons stated a b o v e , including the rate at w h i c h

t o lawsuits.

technology changes and the jurisdictional issues w h e n

other

Employees have the responsibility to read a c o m p a -

c o m p u t e r crimes affect businesses a n d individuals in

ny's employee policy that specifies w h a t personal activi-

geographic areas other than the o n e in w h i c h the c o m -

ties are allowed during c o m p a n y time o r on c o m p a n y

puter criminal is located, privacy is difficult t o define

e q u i p m e n t , as well as w h a t activities, such as W e b surf-

and there is a struggle t o b a l a n c e f r e e d o m of speech

ing, email, telephone calls, and downloading files, may

with the right t o privacy.

Chapter

6:

Network

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

E x h i b i t 6-22

Computer network and Internet security legislation

Law a n d Description

Date 2004

Identity Theft Penalty Enhancement Act Adds extra years to prison sentences for criminals who use identity theft (including the use of stolen credit card numbers) to commit other crimes, including credit card fraud and terrorism.

2003

CAN-SPAM Act Implements regulations for unsolicited email messages. Fair and Accurate Credit Transactions Act (FACTA)

2003

Amends the Fair Credit Reporting Act (FCRA) to require, among other things, that the three nationwide consumer reporting agencies (Equifax, Experian, and Transllnion) provide to consumers, upon request, a free copy of their credit report once every 12 months. 2003

PROTECT Act Includes provisions to prohibit virtual child pornography. Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA)

2003

Includes a Security Rule that sets minimum security standards to protect health information stored electronically. 2002

Homeland Security Act Includes provisions to combat cyberterrorism, including protecting ISPs against lawsuits from customers for revealing private information to law enforcement agencies.

2002

Sarbanes-OxleyAct Requires archiving a variety of electronic records and protecting the integrity of corporate financial data.

2001

USA PATRIOT Act Grants federal authorities expanded surveillance and intelligence-gathering powers, such as broadening the ability of federal agents to obtain the real identity of Internet users, intercept email and other types of Internet communications, follow online activity of suspects, expand their wiretapping authority, and more.

1998

Identity Theft and Assumption Deterrence Act of 1998 Makes it a federal crime to knowingly use someone else's means of identification, such as name, Social Security number, or credit card, to commit any unlawful activity.

1997

No Electronic Theft (NET) Act Expands computer piracy laws to include distribution of copyrighted materials over the Internet.

1996

National Information Infrastructure Protection Act Amends the Computer Fraud and Abuse Act of 1984 to punish information theft crossing state lines and to crack down on network trespassing.

1994

Computer Abuse Amendments Act Amends the Computer Fraud and Abuse Act of 1984 to include computer viruses and other harmful code.

1986

Computer Fraud and Abuse Act of 1986 Amends the 1984 law to include federally regulated financial institutions.

1984

Computer Fraud and Abuse Act of 1984 Makes it a crime to break into computers owned by the federal government. This act has been regularly amended over the years as technology has changed.

A n o t h e r issue is weighing the need t o implement

the Internet and carried a $ 5 0 , 0 0 0 fine. T h i s law w a s

legislation versus the use o f voluntary m e t h o d s t o p r o -

b l o c k e d by the U . S . Supreme C o u r t several times, based

tect c o m p u t e r security and personal privacy. F o r in-

on the likelihood t h a t it violates the First A m e n d m e n t

s t a n c e , the Child O n l i n e P r o t e c t i o n A c t ( C O P A )

has

and the possibility t h a t less restrictive alternatives such

been highly c o n t r o v e r s i a l since it w a s passed in 1 9 9 8 ,

as Internet filtering can be used instead t o prevent the

and, in fact, it has never been i m p l e m e n t e d . T h i s legisla-

access o f inappropriate materials by m i n o r s . A list o f

tion p r o h i b i t e d m a k i n g p o r n o g r a p h y or any o t h e r c o n -

selected federal laws related t o c o m p u t e r security and

tent deemed h a r m f u l t o m i n o r s available t o m i n o r s via

privacy are shown in E x h i b i t 6 - 2 3 .

Chapter

6:

Network

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

E x h i b i t 6-23

Date 2006

Federal legislation related to computer security and privacy

L a w and Description U.S. SAFE W E B Act of 2006 Grants additional authority to the FTC to help protect consumers from spam, spyware, and Internet fraud and deception.

2005

Real ID Act Establishes national standards for state-issued driver's licenses and identification cards; will be modified if the proposed Pass ID Act of 2009 is passed.

2005

Junk Fax Prevention Act Requires unsolicited faxes to have a highly-visible opt-out notice.

2003

CAN-SPAM Act Implements regulations for unsolicited email messages and lays the groundwork for a federal Do Not E-Mail Registry.

2003

Do Not Call Implementation Act Amends the Telephone Consumer Protection Act to implement the National Do Not Call Registry.

2003

Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA)

2002

Sarbanes-OxleyAct

Includes a Security Rule that sets minimum security standards to protect health information stored electronically. Requires archiving a variety of electronic records and protecting the integrity of corporate financial data.

2001

USA PATRIOT Act Grants federal authorities expanded surveillance and intelligence-gathering powers, such as broadening the ability of federal agents to obtain the real identity of Internet users and intercept email and other types of Internet communications.

1999

Financial Modernization (Gramm-Leach-Bliley) Act Extends the ability of banks, securities firms, and insurance companies to share consumers' non-public personal information, but requires them to notify consumers and give them the opportunity to opt out before disclosing any information.

1998

Child Online Protection Act (COPA)

1998

Children's Online Privacy Protection Act (COPPA)

1998

Telephone Anti-Spamming Amendments Act

1992

Cable Act

1991

Telephone Consumer Protection Act

1988

Computer Matching and Privacy Protection Act

1988

Video Privacy Protection Act

1986

Electronic Communications Privacy Act

Prohibits online pornography and other content deemed harmful to minors; has been blocked by the Supreme Court. Regulates how Web sites can collect information from minors and communicate with them. Applies restrictions to unsolicited, bulk commercial email. Extends the Cable Communications Policy Act to include companies that sell wireless services. Requires telemarketing companies to respect the rights of people who do not want to be called. Limits the use of government data in determining federal-benefit recipients. Limits disclosure of customer information by video-rental companies. Extends traditional privacy protections governing postal delivery and telephone services to include email, cellular phones, and voice mail. 1984 1974

Cable Communications Policy Act Limits disclosure of customer records by cable TV companies. Education Privacy Act

Stipulates that, in both public and private schools that receive any federal funding, individuals have the right to keep the schools from releasing such information as grades and evaluations of behavior.

1974 1970 1970

Privacy Act Stipulates that the collection of data by federal agencies must have a legitimate purpose. Fair Credit Reporting Act Prevents private organizations from unfairly denying credit and provides individuals the right to inspect their credit records. Freedom of Information Act Gives individuals the right to inspect data concerning them that is stored by the federal government.

Chapter

6:

Network

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

1.

Quiz Yourself 1.

At one university, precautions for containing code created during this course include only allowing fourth year students to take the course, not hav-

H o w do many organizations and educational

ing a network connection in the classroom, and

institutions explain acceptable computer use to

prohibiting the removal o f storage media from

their employees, students, or other users?

the classroom. D o you think these precautions are

2.

W h a t is the typical m o t i v a t i o n for hacking?

3.

W h y might hackers be moving away from target-

sufficient? 2.

ing data stored on c o m p a n y servers and focusing

Should writing virus code be allowed as part of a computer degree curriculum?

on stealing data in real time during credit card and

3.

debit card transactions?

Is it ethical for colleges to teach computer virus writing? Is it ethical for students t o take such a

4.

Define

5.

W h a t is malware?

6.

H o w does a D o S a t t a c k disable a server?

7.

Define

8.

W h a t is online auction fraud?

9.

W h a t is the purpose o f a digital certificate?

botnet.

course? 3.

Does teaching illegal and unethical acts (such as writing virus code) in college classes help to legitimize the behavior in society?

phishing.

4.

Would you feel c o m f o r t a b l e taking such a course? W h y or why not?

5.

Prepare a one- or two-page summary that answers these questions, and submit it t o your instructor.

1 0 . W h y are many states and schools reviewing their harassment statutes and bullying policies?

Practice It 6-2

1 1 . W h a t is a hard drive that uses full-disk encryption

Some people view using live surveillance cameras as a

often called?

valid crime prevention t o o l ; other people think it is an

1 2 . W h a t does antivirus software do?

invasion o f privacy.

1 3 . H o w does a firewall help protect a computer?

1.

1 4 . W h a t is a marketing database?

Is it ethical for businesses to use video cameras to record customers' activities? If so, for what purposes?

1 5 . W h a t is a t h r o w - a w a y email address? 1 6 . W h a t is the difference between opt-out

2. and

Does the government have the responsibility to use every means possible to protect the country

opt-in}

and its citizens, or do citizens have the right not to

1 7 . W h a t does c o m p u t e r monitoring software do?

be watched in public?

1 8 . Is it legal for c o m p a n i e s to review the email of

3.

their employees?

O n e objection stated a b o u t these systems is "It's not the same as a c o p on the corner. This is a c o p on every corner." W h a t if it were a live police officer at each public video c a m e r a location instead of a camera? Would that be m o r e acceptable from

Practice It

a privacy standpoint? 4.

Practice It 6-1

public, should they be c o n c e r n e d that law enforce-

Some college c o m p u t e r classes include instruction on

ment personnel may see them?

writing c o m p u t e r viruses. S o m e believe that students

5.

need to k n o w h o w viruses w o r k in order to be able to dustry disagrees, and m o s t antivirus professionals were

6.

never virus writers.

6:

Network

Does the risk of being recorded deter some illegal or unethical acts?

develop antivirus s o f t w a r e ; however, the antivirus in-

Chapter

If people do not plan to c o m m i t criminal acts in

Prepare a one- or two-page summary that answers these questions, and submit it t o your instructor.

and

Internet

Security

and

Privacy

D o the organizations reserve the right to change

3.

On Your Own

t h e i r p o l i c i e s a t a later t i m e w i t h o u t n o t i c e ? I f s o , w i l l they try to notify consumers?

On Your Own 6-1 A l t h o u g h a company's privacy policy m a y look accept-

4.

d a t a w i t h t h i r d - p a r t y o r g a n i z a t i o n s ? I f s o , is t h e

a b l e w h e n y o u r e a d it b e f o r e s u b m i t t i n g p e r s o n a l i n f o r -

data personally identifiable, a n d c a n customers

m a t i o n t o t h a t c o m p a n y , t h e r e is n o g u a r a n t e e t h a t the

opt out?

policy w i l l n o t be c h a n g e d . 5.

L o c a t e three different p r i v a c y policies o n W e b

1.

W h a t type of impact do y o u think a change in a company's privacy policy w o u l d h a v e o n customer

sites, a n a l y z e t h e m , a n d c o m p a r e t h e m . 2.

D o a n y of the policies a l l o w for a n y sharing of

loyalty?

D o t h e p o l i c i e s specify w h a t p e r s o n a l i n f o r m a t i o n

6.

m i g h t be shared a n d w i t h w h o m ?

P r e p a r e a one- or two-page s u m m a r y t h a t a n s w e r s these q u e s t i o n s , a n d s u b m i t it t o y o u r i n s t r u c t o r .

CAPSTONE

Computer Concepts T e c h n o l o g y is c h a n g i n g o u r w o r l d a t a n explosive p a c e . Older technology

b e c o m e s o b s o l e t e v e r y quickly,

3 . W h a t risks a r e i n v o l v e d or r e l a t e d t o n e w t e c h n o l -

and

o g y ? W h o is a f f e c t e d by t h e s e risks? C a n t h e s e risks b e m i n i m i z e d ? If so, h o w ? If n o t , w h y n o t ?

n e w t e c h n o l o g y is b e i n g i n t r o d u c e d all t h e t i m e . T h i n k a b o u t s o m e of t h e technological advances y o u have seen in t h e last s e v e r a l m o n t h s as w e l l as r e c e n t t e c h n o l o g i e s that h a v e b e c o m e obsolete.

4.

D o t h e benefits of n e w t e c h n o l o g y o u t w e i g h t h e risks? W h o s h o u l d h a v e t h e u l t i m a t e d e c i s i o n a b o u t t h i s — c o n s u m e r s ? g o v e r n m e n t ? businesses? E x p l a i n your answer.

1.

Discuss t h e i m p a c t of n e w t e c h n o l o g y r e g u l a r l y a n d q u i c k l y r e p l a c i n g existing t e c h n o l o g y . B e sure t o c o n s i d e r t h e p e r s o n a l , business, s o c i e t a l , e c o n o m i c , global, a n d environmental impacts of t h e n e w technology.

2. W h a t benefits does n e w t e c h n o l o g y provide? B e s u r e t o c o n s i d e r individuals, businesses, local c o m m u n i t i e s , t h e country, a n d t h e w o r l d .

5. W h a t e t h i c a l c o n c e r n s a r e r e l a t e d t o t h e i n t r o d u c t i o n of n e w t e c h n o l o g y ? 6. P r e p a r e a t w o - or t h r e e -page s u m m a r y t h a t a n s w e r s t h e s e q u e s t i o n s , a n d t h e n s u b m i t it t o y o u r instructor.

Windows

7

Exploring Microsoft Windows 7 I .earning Objectives After studying the material in this chapter,

Introduction

you will be able to:

M a n y personal c o m p u t e r s

use the Microsoft W i n d o w s 7 operating

s y s t e m — W i n d o w s 7 f o r short. Windows

is the name o f the operating

system, and 7 indicates the version you are using. Recall that the operating system is s o f t w a r e that manages and coordinates activities on the computer and helps the c o m p u t e r perform essential tasks, such as displaying information on the c o m p u t e r screen and saving data on disks. M u c h of the software created for the W i n d o w s 7 operating system looks and w o r k s similarly. T h i s similarity in design means that after you learn h o w to use o n e W i n d o w s 7 program, you are well on your way to understanding h o w t o use others. W i t h W i n d o w s 7, you can use

l o

7

.I

Identify the parts of the

W i n d o w s 7 desktop

LO7.2

Use c o m m o n W i n d o w s elements

LO7.3

Navigate W i n d o w s

LO7.4

W o r k with the Recycle Bin

LO7.5

Get Help

LO7.6

Shut d o w n W i n d o w s

more than one p r o g r a m at a time, making it easy to switch between your w o r d processing p r o g r a m and your appointment b o o k program, for e x a m p l e . It also m a k e s it easy to access the Internet. In this chapter, you learn the basics o f working with W i n d o w s 7. This provides the foundation you need t o use M i c r o s o f t Office applications and other programs to accomplish b o t h personal and business tasks.

LO7.1 Exploring the Windows 7 Desktop

I

n W i n d o w s terminology, the d e s k t o p is a workspace for projects and the tools that you need to manipulate your projects. Essentially, the desktop is the screen you see when you

first start W i n d o w s . T o learn a b o u t the features of the desktop, you'll start W i n d o w s and explore the various elements. M i c r o s o f t W i n d o w s 7 An operating system

Starting Windows and Examining the Desktop

from Microsoft used by many personal computers. d e s k t o p The first screen you see when you start Windows; used as a workspace for projects and the tools that you need to

T o start W i n d o w s , you simply turn your

manipulate your projects.

computer on. After completing the b o o t process, a W e l c o m e screen appears listing

Chapter

7:

Exploring

Microsoft

Windows

7

C H A P T E R

Microsoft Windows is the most common

operating

system for both desktop and portable PCs, whether for business or personal use.

all the users f o r the computer. Before you start w o r k i n g with W i n d o w s 7, y o u might need t o click y o u r user n a m e and type a p a s s w o r d . After you provide this i n f o r m a t i o n , the W i n d o w s 7 desktop appears.

S t a r t W i n d o w s 7.

A

Turn o n your computer. After a m o m e n t , W i n d o w s 7 starts a n d the W e l c o m e screen appears. On the Welcome screen, click your a c c o u n t name. If a password b o x appears, type your password in the b o x , and then click the G o b u t t o n

T h e W i n d o w s 7 desktop

a p p e a r s . See Exhibit 7 - 1 . (Your desktop might have a different b a c k g r o u n d a n d icons.)

P r o b l e m ? If a n account name button does not appear, t h e W e l c o m e screen disappears, and t h e W i n d o w s desktop s h o w n in E x h i b i t 7-1 a p p e a r s . S k i p S t e p 2.

Chapter

7:

Exploring

Microsoft

Windows

7

taskbar

Start button

buttons

I L

f

*

fm

«

S h o w desktop

P U S C IS C IM TU R E 1 MP3 F O R M A TS O U N D •V D IEOS | 4.61 MBF~ H O M E G R O U P

Search Sample Music

sort order.

]i) a m

fi

Sort a file list in a Windows Explorer window.

Musci library

I

C O M P U T E R &L O C A LD S IK (C)

thumbnails

%N E T W O R K

U P In the Windows Hxplorer window, click

More options button

the Contributing artists column heading. T h e list is resorted in a l p h a b e t i c a l order by the artist's n a m e , as indicated by t h e small up a r r o w in the C o n t r i b u t i n g artists c o l u m n heading. Click the

file type and size

Contributing artists column head-

ing again. T h e sort o r d e r is reversed, and the list is in descending a l p h a b e t i c ( Z - A ) order, as indicated by the d o w n a r r o w in

3T IEMS STATE: 2i S H A R E D

the column heading. I O n the toolbar, click

the More options button 0 , and then click

Large icons.

T h e folder n o w shows the file list as large icons with

^ Tip: Click the Change your view button [iT|to cycle among the Large Icons, List, Details, Tiles, and Content views.

only the file n a m e b e l o w each icon

Right-click a blank area o f the right p a n e , and then o n the shortcut m e n u , point to

Sort by. A submenu

o f options by w h i c h you

can sort the files opens. See E x h i b i t 7 - 1 4 . T h e s e categories correspond t o the c o l u m n headings t h a t are displayed in Details view. | O n the submenu, click Name. T h e list is resorted in alphabetical order by file n a m e .

Chapter

7: Exploring

Microsoft

Windows

7

Exhibit 7-14 Sort by options in a Windows Explorer window

arrow indicates the list is sorted by this column; the direction of the arrow indicates the sort order Arrange by B| Maid with

B /

Richard Stortzman...

Fine Music,

View

•

Mr. Scruff

Ninja Tuna

Sort by

•

Name

Group by

•

4>4LConb rtiun itg Album

Refresh Paste Homegroup

Sort by command on the shortcut menu

dots indicate the current sort conditions

Title

Paste shortcut Share with

artists

9 Ascending^^

•

^4rT5escending

New

More...

Properties

r

ACTIVITY Use the Navigation pane. QP

M o v e the pointer into the Navigation pane. Collapse arrows appear n e x t t o Favorites, Libraries, and Computer, and e x p a n d arrows appear next t o the items listed under these elements. See Exhibit 7 - 1 5 . |Next to M u s i c , click the

expand icon [>].The

folders in the M u s i c library appear below the list,

Using the Navigation Pane

and the icon next t o M u s i c changes t o the collapse

As you have seen, you c a n click a folder in the Navigation pane t o navigate directly t o that folder and display its contents in the right pane. Y o u c a n also use the Navigation pane t o navigate t o other locations o n

icon \^\. T h i s folder list includes the M y M u s i c and the Public M u s i c folders. | In the Navigation pane, e x p a n d the

Public Music

folder. T h e Sample M u s i c folder is listed under

your c o m p u t e r and t o subfolders. W h e n you move the

Public M u s i c , and it is selected because the c o n -

pointer into the N a v i g a t i o n pane, triangles appear next

tents o f this folder are displayed in the right pane.

to some i c o n s . Right-pointing, white triangles \V]— called e x p a n d i c o n s — i n d i c a t e that a folder contains other folders that a r e n o t currently displayed in the Navigation p a n e . D o w n w a r d - p o i n t i n g black triangles [ * } — c o l l a p s e i c o n s — i n d i c a t e t h e folder is expanded, and its subfolders are listed below the folder name.

Chapter

7: Exploring

Microsoft

Windows

7

| In the Navigation pane, e x p a n d the

Documents

folder. T h e folder list in the D o c u m e n t s folder includes the M y D o c u m e n t s and the Public D o c u ments folders.

I Close

the

Sample Music window.

Bin holds deleted items until you

remove

them

perma-

nently. Y o u c a n double-click the Recycle Bin t o open the Recycle Bin w i n d o w and see the files that are ready to be permanently deleted. If y o u w a n t t o keep a file t h a t is in the R e c y c l e Bin instead o f p e r m a n e n t l y de-

ix)- Working with the Recycle Bin 4

leting it, y o u c a n return the file to its previous location. T o do s o , right-click a file in the Recycle Bin w i n d o w and then click R e s t o r e on the shortcut m e n u , or click the file t o select it a n d then click the R e s t o r e this item button on the t o o l b a r . Deleting a

you delete a file from a hard drive, it is

file f r o m removable media, such as a U S B o r n e t w o r k

n o t removed from your computer. Instead, it is

drive, doesn't move the file to the R e c y c l e Bin, but de-

\\/hen •

•

moved to the Recycle Bin. See Exhibit 7 - 1 6 . T h e Recycle

letes it instantly. W h e n you n o longer need t h e files in the R e c y c l e

Exhibit 7-16 Recycle Bin and Recycle Bin window

Bin, y o u c a n

permanently

delete

To

them.

do

this,

right-click t h e R e c y c l e Bin and t h e n c l i c k E m p t y R e cycle B i n o n the

shortcut

m e n u , o r c l i c k the E m p t y the R e c y c l e Bin b u t t o n on the t o o l b a r in the R e c y c l e Bin w i n d o w . K e e p in m i n d that

you

cannot

retrieve

files t h a t have been e m p t i e d f r o m the R e c y c l e B i n .

Recycle Bin A folder on your computer that holds deleted items until you remove them permanently.

Chapter

7: Exploring

Microsoft

Windows

7

command on a menu or a button that is gray (sometimes lied grayed out) is unavailable and elk no el

LO75

Getting Help

A

s you w o r k , you might need m o r e information

a b o u t W i n d o w s 7 or one o f its programs. Windows

Help and Support

provides access to Help files stored on

your computer

as

^\\as

Help

well

information

stored on the M i c r o soft W e b site. If you are

not

connected

Empty the Recycle Bin

to the W e b , you will

Make it a practice to regularly empty the Recycle Bin. Storing many files in the Recycle Bin can slow down your computer's start up time. The unneeded files also take up space on your computer. Files you want to keep should be stored in other folders, not in the Recycle Bin. Remember, permanently deleted files can no longer be retrieved from the Recycle Bin.

computer.

have access to only the Help files stored on your T h e home page in W i n dows

Help

and

Support

provides tools for

finding

answers and other information a b o u t W i n d o w s 7. In the W i n d o w s Help and Support window, you can click a link in the N o t sure where to start? section to display a list o f topics. E a c h t o p i c link opens an article providing detailed information a b o u t that topic or instructions for performing a task. You can use the t o o l b a r t o navigate W i n d o w s Help and Support. F o r e x a m p l e , the Help and Support home button returns you t o the h o m e page. T h e Back and Forward buttons move you between the pages you have viewed.

Work with the Recycle Bin. Right-click t h e

Recycle Bin. T h e

Recycle Bin s h o r t -

cut menu opens. If n o files are currently in the Recycle Bin, the E m p t y Recycle Bin c o m m a n d will be gray (and unavailable). Press the Esc key to close the shortcut menu. Double-click t h e

Recycle Bin. T h e

Recycle Bin

w i n d o w opens. Any files or folders currently in the Recycle Bin are listed in this window.

ACTIVITY Use Windows Help and Support. I O n the taskbar,

click the Start

button A . I In the right pane o f

Close the Recycle Bin window.

the Start menu, click

Help and Support.

^ T i p : You can also start Windows Help and Support from a folder window by clicking the Get help button i®| on the toolbar.

T h e home page of

Windows Help and Support Help files stored

W i n d o w s Help and Support opens, as shown in

on your computer as well as Help information stored on the Microsoft Web site.

the contents you see on the h o m e page on y o u r

Exhibit 7 - 1 7 . If you are n o t connected to the W e b , screen might differ.

Chapter

7: Exploring

Microsoft

Windows

7

Getting help with dialog boxes and windows link.

Click the

Exhibit 7-17 Windows Help and Support window

T h e W i n d o w s Help and

Q WINDOWS HELP AND SUPPORT fib

H

&

°P

P

to that heading in the

TIONS

article.

| Search Help

Back and Forward buttons

Support w i n d o w scrolls

toolbar

I O n the t o o l b a r , click the

Find an answer quickly

ENTER A FEW WORDS IN THE SEARCH BOX ABOVE.

Back button @ . T h e previous

Search Help box

page you visited, w h i c h is the W i n d o w s B a s i c s : all topics page, is redisplayed.

Not sure where to start?

link to find more information on the Microsoft Web site

• HOW TO GET STARTED WITH YOUR COMPUTER! • LEARN ABOUT WN I DOWS BASICS BROWSE HELP TOPICS

Using the Contents List T h e C o n t e n t s list l o g i c a l l y o r g a n i z e s all o f the t o p i c s in W i n d o w s and

CHECK OUT THE WN I DOWS WEBSITE, WHICH HAS INFORMATION, DOWNLOADS, AND IDEAS FOR DOING MORE WTIH YOUR PC.

Support

and categories

links to basic Help information

a table

into

Help topics

similar

of contents

to

in

a

b o o k . In t h e C o n t e n t s list, you c a n c l i c k a c a t e g o r y t o

display the titles o f r e l a t e d t o p i c s . T h e n , you click a t o p i c t o get help

FEATURED THIS MONTH: • WHAT' 5 NEW IN WN I DOWS 7 • GETTING STARTED WTIH WN I DOWS 7

about a particular task or feature. F o r e x a m p l e , y o u c a n use the C o n tents list to learn m o r e a b o u t

files

and folders.

OIJ MORE SUPPORT OPTIONS i ONLINE HELP

ACTIVITY Find a Help topic using the Contents list.

button to switch between online and offline Help

I In the N o t sure where t o start?

the h o m e page for W i n d o w s H e l p and Support.

section, click the

Learn about Windows Basics link. A

list o f topics related to us-

ing W i n d o w s 7 appears in the W i n d o w s Help and Support window. I S c r o l l d o w n t o the H e l p a n d s u p p o r t h e a d i n g , and t h e n c l i c k the

Help and Support home button [fS t o return t o

I O n the toolbar, click the

Getting help link.

An a r t i c l e

e x p l a i n i n g h o w t o get help is displayed in the W i n d o w s H e l p a n d S u p p o r t w i n d o w . T h e " I n this a r t i c l e " s e c t i o n o n t h e right side o f

I On

the toolbar, click the

Browse Help button

[W

A list of categories appears in the W i n d o w s H e l p and Support window. I In the Contents list, click the

libraries category. A

Files, folders, and

list of topics and o t h e r c a t e -

gories related to files, folders, and libraries appears in the window.

I Click

the

Working with files and folders topic.

the w i n d o w p r o v i d e s links t o the h e a d i n g s in

W i n d o w s Help and Support w i n d o w displays

the a r t i c l e .

information about that t o p i c .

Chapter

7: Exploring

Microsoft

Windows

7

The

T o quickly op Windows Help Support window press the Fi key the desktop is acti\

Click a blank area of the W i n d o w s Help and Support w i n d o w t o close the ScreenTip.

Using the Search Help Bom If you can't find the topic you need by clicking a link or using the toolbar, or if y o u w a n t t o quickly find Help pages related to a particular topic, you can use the Search Help b o x . Y o u enter a w o r d or phrase about the topic you w a n t to find t o see a list o f Help pages

I In the first paragraph b e l o w the Working with files and folders heading, click the word

icons,

which is green by default. A ScreenTip shows the definition o f icons.

See

Exhibit 7 - 1 8 .

Browse Help button

containing those words. If n o n e o f the articles answer your question, you could click the Ask button on the t o o l b a r t o open a page listing o t h e r ways t o get Help information.

links to headings in the article Use the Search Help box.

Exhibit 7-18 ScreenTip with definition

U P O n the toolbar, click in

the Search Help box.

Windows Help and Suj

Type shutdown and then click the Search

ASK OPTIONS •

Help button [P

A list

o f Help pages contain-

Search Help

ing the words shut down

Working with files and folders

W i n d o w s Help and

A FILE IS AN ITEM THAT CONTAINS INFOF R M - this article In -C RATION EXAMPLE, TEXT O R IMAGES O R MUSIC. WHEN USING LIBRARIES TO ACCESS OPENED, A FILE CAN LOOK VERY MUCH LIKE A YOUR FILES AND FOLDERS TEXT DOCUMENT O R A PICTURE THAT YOU UNDERSTANDING THE PARTS MIGHT FIND ON SOMEONES ' DESK O R IN A OF A WN IDOW FILING CABINET. ON YOUR COMPUTER, FILES VIEWING AND ARRANGN IG ARE REPRESENTED WT IH ICONS; THIS MAKES IT FILES ANDOLDERS LESOBJECT O A SMALL PICTURE THAT REPRESENTS A FILE, FOLDER, PROGRAM, O R OTHER R AND MOVING FILES FUNCTION. X

Support window. See E x h i b i t 7 - 1 9 (your search results might differ).

) Click the Turning off

your computer properly topic. T h e article appears in the Windows

• CREATING AND DELETING FILES • OPENING AN EXISTING FILE

ScreenTip with definition

Help and Support window.

A

i f *

Mi

V

MOLLY CLARK

PENGUINS

TEXT DOCUMENT

appears in the

Problem? If a Topic not found message appears in the Help window, click the Back button @ on the toolbar, and then click a different topic link.

MORE SUPPORT OPTIONS 9 ONLINE HELP -

Chapter

7: Exploring

Microsoft

Windows

7

Windows Help and Support window.

I Close the

Exhibit 7-19 Results of a search in the Help window

p

search text

itt

A

s

k

°p

t

i

o

n

s

shut down

Ask button 1 'IIB Search Help button

28 results for shut down 1.

Shutting Down Windows

LO76

I

you

turn

Doing

so

always

Windows off

your

saves

shut before

computer.

energy,

pre-

serves y o u r d a t a a n d settings, and m a k e s sure y o u r c o m p u t e r

Change what happens when you press the power button on your computer

2.

should

down

m

Turning off your computer properly

Y

ou

starts quickly the n e x t time you use

3.

Troubleshoot problems with installing updates

4.

Change what happens when you close your laptop

the Shut d o w n b u t t o n at the b o t t o m

5.

Turn off a computer: frequently asked questions

o f the Start m e n u . W h e n you click the

6.

Optimize Windows 7 for better performance

7.

Sleep and hibernation: frequently asked questions

8.

Turn off your computer using Windows Media Center

9.

W h y won't my computer turn on or off quickly?

it. You can turn o f f W i n d o w s 7 using

Shut down b u t t o n , y o u r

W i n d o w s itself, a n d then c o m -

Corrupted files: frequently asked questions

11.

Resolving stop (blue screen) errors in Windows 7

12.

Turn the guest account on or off

13.

Fixing game performance problem:-

14.

User accounts: frequently asked questions

15.

Change, create, or delete a power plan (scheme)

M o r e support options

pletely turns o f f y o u r computer.

topics related to the search text (your search results might differ)

i 10.

computer

closes all open p r o g r a m s , including

F o r greater flexibility, you can click the a r r o w on the Shut down b u t t o n t o display shut d o w n

options,

more

including

Log off and Sleep. T h e Sleep o p tion saves your w o r k a n d then turns down the p o w e r t o y o u r

monitor

and computer. A light on the outside of the c o m p u t e r case blinks or turns yellow t o indicate t h a t the c o m 9

Online Help •

puter is sleeping. B e c a u s e your w o r k is saved, you do n o t need t o close

I Log Off, Sleep, or Shut Down When you're finished working on the computer, you need to decide whether to log off the computer, put the computer to sleep, or shut down. If you are using a computer that belongs to someone else, follow that person's policy. Otherwise, the best approach depends on who uses the computer and how long it will be idle. Keep the following guidelines in mind as you make your decision: ^

Log off—This command closes all programs and logs you off of Windows 7 but leaves the computer turned on. If another person might use the computer shortly, log off Windows to protect your data and prepare the computer for someone else to use.

^

Sleep—By default, Windows 7 is set to sleep after 15 to 30 minutes of idle time, depending on whether you are using a notebook or desktop computer. If

you will be away from the computer for more than 15 minutes but less than a day, you can generally let the computer go to sleep on its own. Shut down—If your computer is plugged in to a power outlet and you don't plan to use the computer for more than a day, you save wear and tear on your electronic components and conserve energy by shutting down, which ends your Windows 7 session and turns off your computer. You should also turn off the computer when it is susceptible to electrical damage, such as during a lightning storm, and when you need to install new hardware or disconnect the computer from a power source. If your notebook computer is running on battery power only and you don't plan to use it for more than a few hours, you should also turn it off to save your battery charge.

Chapter

7: Exploring

Microsoft

Windows

7

your programs or files before putting your c o m p u t e r

9.

In the Navigation pane, h o w do you display the

t o sleep. To wake a desktop computer, you press any

list of subfolders in a folder w i t h o u t displaying

key or move the mouse. T o w a k e a n o t e b o o k computer,

them in the right pane of the w i n d o w ?

you might need to press the hardware power button

1 0 . H o w do you permanently delete files in the

on your computer case instead. After you w a k e a c o m puter, the screen looks exactly as it did when you turned off your computer.

Recycle Bin from a drive? 1 1 . H o w do you access W i n d o w s Help and Support? 1 2 . W h y should you shut down W i n d o w s before turning off your computer?

ACTIVITY Turn off Windows 7. | P Click the Start

button @ on the taskbar.

I Do

one of the

following: •

Shut down button. Click the

^ T i p : Shutting down does not automatically save your work, so be sure to save your files before clicking the Shut down button.

W i n d o w s 7 displays a message that it is

click

Log off, and

1.

Start W i n d o w s 7 and log o n , if necessary.

2.

Use ScreenTips to identify each o f the icons on the

3.

computer.

Options button Q ,

Practice It 7-1

Write the steps you take as you complete this exercise.

taskbar.

shutting d o w n , and then turns off your

• N e x t to the Shut d o w n button, click the

Practice It

Paint (in the Accessories folder). T h i s program

More

then fol-

low your school's logoff procedure.

Use the Start menu to open the program named allows you to create simple drawings.

4.

Use the Start menu to open the M u s i c folder, and then use the Start menu to open the Documents folder.

5.

Quiz Yourself 1.

Minimize the D o c u m e n t s window. Click the Paint window to m a k e the Paint w i n d o w active, and then minimize the Paint window. M a x i m i z e the M u s i c window, and then restore it to its previous

W h a t happens when you point to the Start

size.

button? W h a t happens w h e n you click the Start 6.

button?

Use Flip 3 D to switch to the D o c u m e n t s window, and then resize the D o c u m e n t s window by making

2.

W h a t happens when you right-click an item?

3.

W h a t is a library?

4.

W h a t is the left pane in a W i n d o w s Explorer win-

and then close that window. Use the taskbar to

dow called?

close the M u s i c window.

5.

it approximately one inch taller. 7.

H o w do you change the view in a W i n d o w s E x -

8.

plorer window? 6. 7.

8.

Resize the D o c u m e n t s w i n d o w b a c k to its original size (approximately one inch shorter).

H o w do you manually resize a w i n d o w to a spe-

cific size

Use W i n d o w s Flip to switch t o the Paint window,

that you w a n t ?

9.

In the open window, use the Navigation pane to display the contents o f the Videos Jibrary. Display

W h e n m o r e than one w i n d o w is open, h o w many

the contents o f the Sample Videos folder in the

w i n d o w s can be active at the same time?

right pane.

In a W i n d o w s E x p l o r e r window, h o w do you display the c o n t e n t s o f a folder in the window?

1 0 . In the Navigation pane, e x p a n d the D o c u m e n t s library, and then e x p a n d the M y D o c u m e n t s folder.

Chapter

7: Exploring

Microsoft

Windows

7

1 1 . C h a n g e the view o f the Sample Videos w i n d o w to

6.

Large I c o n s .

Point to a file to display the S c r e e n T i p , and note the date the p h o t o was t a k e n .

1 2 . In the N a v i g a t i o n pane, collapse the D o c u m e n t s

7.

library.

Use the S t a r t m e n u t o d i s p l a y t h e c o n t e n t s o f t h e A c c e s s o r i e s folder in t h e All P r o g r a m s list, a n d t h e n c l i c k G e t t i n g S t a r t e d . In t h e list o f

1 3 . C h a n g e the view of the Sample Videos w i n d o w

t o p i c s , c l i c k P e r s o n a l i z e W i n d o w s , a n d t h e n in

b a c k to Details.

t h e t o p p a n e , click the P e r s o n a l i z e W i n d o w s

1 4 . O p e n the R e c y c l e Bin w i n d o w . If there is a file o r folder in the Recycle Bin, select it, and then e x a m i n e the details a b o u t the file in the Details

button. 8.

could use with D V D s .

pane. 1 5 . C l o s e the Recycle Bin window.

9.

started in a previous step. R e a d the i n f o r m a t i o n in

click Properties. Examine the w i n d o w that opens,

1 7 . O p e n the W i n d o w s Help and Support window,

O p e n W i n d o w s Help and S u p p o r t , a n d then find a topic that explains h o w to use the p r o g r a m you

1 6 . O p e n the Recycle Bin shortcut m e n u , and then and then click the Cancel b u t t o n .

Use the Start menu to open a p r o g r a m t h a t you

the window. 1 0 . Close all open windows.

and then display the Contents list. Click the C u s t o m i z i n g your computer category, and then click the W h a t is a theme? topic. L o c a t e the green w o r d window,

and then display its definition in a

ScreenTip. 1 8 . Use the Search Help b o x to display a list o f results for the w o r d

libraries.

Click the W o r k i n g with

libraries t o p i c , and then read the information in

On Your Own

On Your Own 7-1

Write the steps you take as you c o m p l e t e this project. 1.

plays digital media. Start this p r o g r a m .

1 9 . C l o s e the W i n d o w s Help and Support window. 2 0 . Turn o f f W i n d o w s 7 by using the Sleep c o m m a n d ,

2.

Display the Accessories folder in the Start m e n u , and then locate the program t h a t a l l o w s you to

shutting d o w n , or logging off.

Practice It 7-2

O p e n the All Programs list in the Start m e n u , and then use ScreenTips to locate the p r o g r a m that

the w i n d o w .

create short notes. Start this p r o g r a m . 3.

Use W i n d o w s Help and Support t o research the p r o g r a m you started in the previous step.

Write the steps you take as you complete this exercise. 4.

Use the Search Help b o x in W i n d o w s Help and

1.

Start W i n d o w s 7 and log on, if necessary.

2.

O p e n a W i n d o w s Explorer w i n d o w using your

p r o g r a m you researched in the previous step. N o t e

log on n a m e in the Start menu.

whether all the results seem relevant.

3.

O p e n the C o m p u t e r window. Identify the names

Support to list all the Help topics related to the

5.

4.

p r o g r a m in Step 2 .

In the N a v i g a t i o n pane, e x p a n d the C o m p u t e r folder, and then e x p a n d the hard disk, such as

6.

M u s i c folder. Display the contents o f the Sample M u s i c folder in the window. 5.

Use the Start menu to open the Pictures folder in a new window. Display the contents o f the Sample Pictures folder in the window, and then change the

Use Flip 3 D to m a k e the p r o g r a m you started in Step 1 the active window.

Local Disk ( C : ) . E x p a n d the Users folder, e x p a n d the Public folder, and then e x p a n d the Public

Use ScreenTips to identify the t w o b u t t o n s on the note created on the desktop w h e n you started the

of the drives on the computer.

7.

Use W i n d o w s Flip to m a k e the note created w h e n you started the program in Step 2 active.

8.

Use the t a s k b a r to close the w i n d o w associated with the p r o g r a m you started in Step 2 .

9.

Close all o f the other open w i n d o w s .

view to E x t r a Large Icons.

Chapter

7: Exploring

Microsoft

Windows

7

M

A

N

A

G

I

N

G

Y

O

U

R

F

I

L

E

S

Learning Objectives

Introduction

After studying the material in this chapter, you will be able to:

Knowing h o w t o save, l o c a t e , and organize computer files makes you

L08.I

Organize files and folders

L08.2

Manage files and folders

LO8.3

Work with compressed files

more productive when you are w o r k i n g with a computer. A file, often referred to as a d o c u m e n t , is a collection of data that has a name and is stored on a computer. Y o u can open any file, edit its contents, print it, and save it again—usually with the same program used to create it. You organize files by storing them in folders. Having well organized files makes it easier and faster to find the files you want and to w o r k efficiently.

In this chapter, you will learn strategies for organizing your files and folders, and then practice navigating the files and folders on your computer. You'll learn h o w to create, n a m e , copy, move, and delete folders as well as n a m e , copy, m o v e , and delete files. You'll also w o r k with compressed files.

LO8.1

A

Organizing Files and Folders computer can store folders and files on different types of disks, ranging from r e m o v able media—such as U S B drives, C D s , and D V D s — t o hard disks, which are p e r m a -

nently stored on a computer. A computer distinguishes one drive from another by assigning each a drive letter. T h e

hard disk is usually assigned to drive C. T h e remaining drives can have any other letters, but are usually assigned in the order that the drives were installed on the computer. S o , your U S B drive might be drive D o r drive G .

The Windows 7 File System W i n d o w s 7 stores thousands of files in many folders on the hard disk o f your computer. T h e s e are system files that W i n d o w s 7 needs to display the desktop, use drives, and perform ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

other operating system tasks. T o ensure system stability and

file system The hierarchy of how files and folders are organized.

to find files quickly, W i n d o w s 7 organizes the folders and files in a hierarchy, or

file system.

At the top o f

the hierarchy, W i n d o w s 7 stores folders and files that

Chapter

8: File

Management

9 Knowing computer

how to save, locate,

files will make

this effectively,

you more

it is important

for managing

it needs w h e n you turn on the computer. T h i s location is called the usually drive C (the hard disk). T h e term root

root directory,

and

organize

productive. to devise

To do

a

files on your

strategy computer.

and is

refers t o a popular m e t a p h o r for visualizing

a file s y s t e m — a n upside-down tree, which reflects the file hierarchy that W i n d o w s 7 uses. In E x h i b i t 8 - 1 , the tree trunk corresponds t o the r o o t directory, the branches t o the folders, and the leaves t o the files. Some folders contain other folders. An effectively organized c o m puter contains a few folders in the root directory, and those folders contain other folders, also called

subfolders.

root directory The top of the file system

for system files and folders. Y o u should n o t store your o w n

where Windows 7 stores folders and files that it needs when you turn on the computer.

w o r k here because it could interfere with W i n d o w s o r a

subfolder A folder contained within another folder.

T h e r o o t directory, o r t o p level, o f the hard disk is only

program.

Exhibit 8-1 Windows file hierarchy drive C root directory 4-

some folders are also reserved for Windows and programs

Jan bills Jan I

system file system

taxe^

My Documents Financials

Windows

7

System system file

top level of the hard disk is for system files and folders only

system file

program

program am file

FILE subfolder in Windows folder

destinations

Feb bills

Creative

novel ^ chapter 1 4~ novel chapter 2

Developing an Organizational Strategy

Don't Delete or Move System Files Do not delete or move any files or folders from the root directory of the hard disk—doing so could disrupt the system so that you can't run or start the computer. In fact, you should not reorganize or change any folder that contains installed software because Windows expects to find the files for specific programs within certain folders. If you reorganize or change these folders, Windows cannot locate and start the programs stored in that folder. Likewise, you should not make changes to the folder (usually named Windows) that contains the Windows operating system.

Chapter

8:

File

Management

It is important to develop a strategy for organizing your folders and files. Exhibit 8-2 shows h o w you could organize your files on a hard disk if you were taking a full semester of distance-learning classes. T o duplicate this organization, you would open the main folder for your documents, create four f o l d e r s — o n e each for the Basic Accounting, Computer C o n c e p t s , M a n a g e m e n t Skills II, and Professional Writing c o u r s e s — a n d then store the writing assignments you complete in the Professional Writing folder. If you store your files on removable media, such as a U S B drive or rewritable C D , you can use a simpler organization because you do not have to account for system files. In general, the larger the medium, the more

If you are working in a computer lab or on a public computer, you might not be allowed to aceess

Syncing a Desktop and Laptop Computer If you work on two computers, such as one com puter at an office or school and another computer at home, or on a desktop and a laptop, you can copy the most recent version of your files from one computer to the other using a network connection or a portable storage device, such as a USB drive. Or, you can use a synchronization program to do this automatically to ensure that you are always working with the most recent version. Synchronizing—or syncing— folders and files between two computers means to copy

the most updated version from one computer to the other. To do this, you can use the Sync Center, which is available in Windows 7 and Windows Vista, or programs specifically designed to do this, such as SyncToy, a free program available from Microsoft, or GoodSync from Siber Systems. You can also sync to the "cloud" by using Windows Live SkyDrive or a service such as Box.net or Dropbox. For more information about syncing, check the help information available from each program's manufacturer.

levels o f folders you should use because large media can

s t o r e — o n e each for Courses, Creative, F i n a n c i a l s , and

store m o r e files, and, therefore, need better organiza-

V a c a t i o n . T h e Courses folder c o u l d then include one

tion. F o r e x a m p l e , if you are organizing files on a U S B

folder for each course, and each o f t h o s e folders could

drive, you c o u l d create folders in the top level o f the

contain the appropriate files.

U S B drive for each general category o f documents you

W h e n you open Windows Explorer, it shows the contents of the four Windows built-in libraries by default. R e m e m b e r that a

Exhibit 8-2 Folders and files organized on a hard disk

library is a central place to

view

and

organize

similar types o f files and folders stored anywhere that your c o m p u t e r can access,

Top level of file system

Hard disk (CO

I Level 2

such

hard

i Windows

I

as

disk,

your

removable

drives, and a network.

_

T h e four default libraries are the D o c u m e n t s ,

I Program Files

Music,

Documents and other data

Pictures,

and

Videos libraries. In contrast, a folder stores files in

a

specific

location,

such as in the Professional Writing subfolder

My Documents

o f the M y

Documents

folder on the L o c a l Disk (C:) drive. T o open the Report Basic Accounting

Management Skills II

Computer Concepts

Professional Writing

file

stored

in

the

Professional

Writ-

ing

folder,

must

you

Folders created for each course 1^

T

Level 5 Memo

Policy

Proposal

Files for the Professional Writing course

1

J Report

synchronize (sync) To copy the most updated version from one computer to another.

4 k

Exhibit 8-3 Folders and files organized on a hard disk

navigate to the Local Disk (C:) drive, then the M y D o c uments folder, and finally the

Professional

Writing

folder. A library makes it easier to access similar types o f files. For example, you

might

store

some music files in the M y Music folder and others in a folder named

Libraries folder selected Navigation pane

Albums on your hard disk. You might also store music files in a Tunes folder on a U S B drive. If the

expanded Documents folder in Navigation pane

U S B drive

is connected to your c o m puter, the Music library c a n display all the music files in the M y Music, Albums, and Tunes folders. You can then arrange the files to quickly find the ones you want to open and play.

Navigating to Files To navigate t o the files you w a n t , it helps to know the file path. T h e path shows the location o f a file on a c o m -

Navigate to a library and a folder. O n the taskbar, click the Windows Explorer button 2- T h e Windows E x p l o r e r w i n d o w opens, displaying the contents o f the four default l i b r a r i e s —

puter and leads you through the file and folder organization t o the file. For e x a m p l e , the Customer List file is stored in the Chapter subfolder o f the Chapter 8 folder included with your data files. If you are working o n a U S B drive, the path t o this file might be:

D o c u m e n t s , M u s i c , Pictures, and Videos.

G:\Chapter 8\Chapter\Customer List.accdb

If the Windows E x p l o r e r w i n d o w is maximized, click the Restore Down button

I

I In the Navigation pane, under Libraries, point to the

Documents folder to display the Expand icon Click the Expand icon [j>J t o e x p a n d the D o c u ments folder. T h e folders in the D o c u m e n t s library appear in the Navigation pane. See Exhibit 8 - 3 . ^

In the Navigation pane, click the My Documents

This path has four parts, and each part is separated by a backslash (\): ^

G — T h e drive n a m e ; f o r e x a m p l e , drive G might be the name f o r the U S B drive

^

Chapter 8—A top-level folder on drive G

^

Chapter—A subfolder in the Chapter 8 folder

folder. T h e contents o f this folder appear in the right pane.

path A notation that indicates a file's location on your computer.

Chapter

8: File

Using the Navigation pane helps you explore your computer and orients you to your current location.

Management

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

^\\\\

^

I D o u b l e - c l i c k t h e Chapter 8 folder. T h e c o n t e n t s

C u s t o m e r L i s t . a c c d b — T h e full file n a m e , including the file extension

of the Chapter 8 folder—the Chapter, O n Your O w n , a n d P r a c t i c e It s u b f o l d e r s — a p p e a r in t h e

If s o m e o n e tells you t o find the file G:\Chapter 8\

w i n d o w . T h e Address b a r s h o w s t h e p a t h t o t h e

Chapter\Customer List.accdb, y o u must navigate t o

C h a p t e r 8 folder.

drive G , open the Chapter 8 folder, a n d then open the C h a p t e r folder t o find the C u s t o m e r List file.

I In the Address bar, t o the right o f C h a p t e r 8 , click

Y o u c a n use a n y folder w i n d o w t o navigate t o the

the

right-pointing arrow \Y\. T h e

list o f subfolders

in the C h a p t e r 8 folder appears.

data files y o u need for the rest o f these chapters.

I In the list, click

Chapter. T h e

files in t h e C h a p t e r

folder appear in the E x p l o r e r w i n d o w . T h e icon

ACTIVITY

next t o each file name indicates t h e type o f file.

Navigate to a file.

More options arrow next t o the Change your view button \m »|. A menu appears.

I O n the toolbar, click the

In the Navigation pane, if the C o m p u t e r folder is n o t e x p a n d e d , click the Computer folder

Expand

I O n the m e n u , click List. T h e files a p p e a r in List

icon [ > ] . T h e drives on your computer are listed b e l o w the Computer folder in the Navigation pane.

J

T h e drives o n your computer are n o w displayed in

More options arrow n e x t to the Change your view button |£ i »|, and then click Large Icons. T h e files a p p e a r in Large Icons

the right p a n e .

view. N o t e that in any o f the I c o n s views, y o u c a n

In the Navigation pane, click the

^

view in the folder window. See E x h i b i t 8 - 4 .

Computer folder.

In the Computer window, double-click the drive con-

O n the toolbar, click the

see the contents o f graphics

^ ^ ^ ^

taining your data files. For example, if your data files are on the hard drive, double-click

Local Disk (C:). If your Data Files

path on your screen might differ

are o n a USB drive, double-click

Removable Disk letter:),

(drive

where drive

letter is whatever letter your removable drive is, such as E , F, or G . If your data files are on a network drive, in the Navigation pane, click

the Network folder, and then in the window, double-click the drive containing your data files. ) In the folder window, double-click folders as needed until you see the Chapter 8 folder included with your data files.

Chapter

8: File

Management

L08.2

A

Managing Folders and Files

Guidelines for Creating Folders

fter you devise a plan f o r storing your files, you

As you organize your files by creating folders, keep in mind the following guidelines to ensure that you and others who might later work with your files can quickly and easily find the files you need:

are ready t o get organized by creating folders

and subfolders that will hold your files and then moving the files into the appropriate folders.

^

Creating a Folder or Subfolder First, determine which files seem t o belong together. Then, develop an appropriate file structure. When you are work-

^

ing on your own computer, you usually create folders within the M y Documents folder and other standard folders, such as M y Music and M y Pictures. When you create a folder, you give it a name, preferably one that describes its contents. A folder name can have up to 2 5 5 characters, but cannot include the / \: * ? " < > or I characters. F o r e x a m p l e , l o o k again at the files in Exhibit 8 - 4 .

^

All o f these files are related t o a business named Cathy's Candy Shoppe.

^

Candy and Web Page Screenshot are graphics

Keep folder names short and familiar. Long names can be cut off in a folder window, so use names that are short but meaningful, such as project names or categories. Develop standards for naming folders. Use a consistent naming scheme that is logical to you and others. For example, you could use a project name as the name of the main folder, and include step numbers in each subfolder name, such as 01 Plan, 02Approvals, 03Prelim, and so on. Create subfolders to organize files. If a file listing in a folder window is so long that you must scroll the window, consider organizing those files into subfolders.

files. Candy is a photograph o f candy, and Web Page Screenshot is a graphic file in the file format P N G .

^

Business Plan is a P o w e r P o i n t presentation that contains the beginning o f a presentation t o explain the store's business plan.

^ ^

Customer List is an Access file listing potential

Create folders. QP

Expenses is an E x c e l file that lists projected e x -

the window. T h e folder n a m e is highlighted, and a

with the placeholder label New folder

^

appears in

b o x appears around it. T e x t y o u type will replace

Flyer is a Word d o c u m e n t that contains a flyer t o announce the grand opening o f the store.

^

New folder button. A folder icon

customer names a n d addresses.

penses for the store. ^

O n the t o o l b a r in the C h a p t e r 8\Chapter folder window, click the

the highlighted text. See E x h i b i t 8 - 5 .

Hfc Type Graphics and then press the Enter key. replaces the placeholder name and the

Letterhead is a W o r d d o c u m e n t o f (as the name

Graphics

implies) letterhead f o r the store.

new Graphics folder is selected in the window.

Web Page Draft is a W o r d document saved as an

Right-click a b l a n k a r e a o f t h e w i n d o w . A s h o r t c u t

H T M L document that c a n be published t o a W e b

menu opens. See E x h i b i t 8 - 6 .

server and accessed as a W e b page.

TmW O n t h e s h o r t c u t m e n u , p o i n t t o New, a n d t h e n click

O n e w a y t o organize these files is t o create the fol-

Folder. A n e w f o l d e r

is c r e a t e d .

lowing three f o l d e r s — o n e f o r graphics, o n e for the finances, a n d o n e f o r marketing:

^

Graphics folder—Candy and W e b Page Screenshot

^

Finances folder—Business Plan and Expenses

^

Marketing folder—Customer List, Flyer, Letterhead, and W e b Page D r a f t

Chapter

8: File

Management

A

Problem? If the New command is not on your shortcut menu or if the New command does not have an arrow next to it, click a blank area of the window to close that menu, and then repeat Step 3, being sure to click a blank area of the window.

New folder button on toolbar I Type Finances and then press the Enter key. T h e n e w folder is r e n a m e d . ) C r e a t e a n e w folder

Marketing.

named

The

C h a p t e r 8\Chapter folder n o w c o n t a i n s three s u b f o l d e r s .

Moving or Copying Files and Folders If you w a n t t o place a file into a folder f r o m a n o t h e r l o c a t i o n , you c a n m o v e the file or c o p y it. M o v i n g a file removes it f r o m its c u r r e n t location and places it in a new l o c a t i o n Copying

you

also

specify.

places

the

file in a n e w l o c a t i o n that you specify, but does

not

remove it f r o m its current l o c a t i o n . Y o u c a n m o v e and

Exhibit 8-6 Shortcut menu in a folder window

copy

folders

way

that

copy

in the

you

files.

same

move

When

and

you

do,

you m o v e o r c o p y all the files c o n t a i n e d in the folder. « Removable Disk (E:) • CMPTR • Chapter 8 • Chapter

OrgF an eoe i • Bun r New fod ler aziv tris• ,- Open Share wth r • Desko tp £ Down olads .^ Recent Palces m Lb irare is Bus niess Paln f§ Documenst 1 My Documenst ^ Pubcil Documenst mf* Musci t Pciu tres Fyler H Vd ieos Homego rup Compuetr & Local Dsik (C:) Removab el Dsik (F)j Graphcis N e foed lrer Fe liwfD od la e t mode fid: 111/72/014 52 :7 PM 4

—

New command on shortcut menu

The move

easiest

files

or

way

to

folders

is

t o drag t h e m , just as you dragged w i n d o w s in C h a p ter 7. W h e n you drag a file or

folder

from

one

loca-

tion t o a n o t h e r on the same drive, the file o r folder is moved f r o m its original location t o the n e w l o c a t i o n . When

you drag a

file

or

folder f r o m o n e drive to another drive, the file

arrow indicates a submenu will open when you point to this command

or folder is copied instead o f m o v e d . You

can

override

this default behavior by dragging a file using the right

mouse button. When

you

drag a file o r folder using

I Double-click the

the right mouse button, a shortcut menu appears, and

Finances folder. T h e

window

you c a n choose the M o v e here or the C o p y here c o m -

changes t o display the contents o f the Finances

m a n d , depending on w h a t y o u w a n t t o d o .

folder, which n o w contains the Business Plan presentation file.

T o move or copy m o r e t h a n one file at the same time, you select all the files you w a n t t o copy, and then

I O n the title bar, t o the right o f the Address bar,

drag them as a group. T o select files that are adjacent in

click the

a window, click the first file in the list, hold down the

Back button @

. T h e contents o f the

Chapter folder appear in the window. T h e fold-

Shift key, click the last file in the list, and then release

ers n o w appear first in the w i n d o w because the

the Shift key. To select files that are n o t adjacent, click

window automatically resorts when you redisplay

one file, hold down the Ctrl key, click the other files,

its contents, and folders appear first by default.

and then release the Ctrl key.

Expenses file, but do n o t release the mouse button. Drag the Expenses file to the Finances folder, and then release the mouse button.

( Right-click the

ACTIVITY Move files or folders.

Q|

A shortcut menu opens on the Finances folder.

Drag the BUSINESS PLAN FILE on t o p of t h e FINANCES FOLDER, but do n o t release t h e m o u s e b u t t o n .

| O n the shortcut menu, click

A ScreenTip a p p e a r s identifying the a c t i o n

Customer List file, and then press and Ctrl key. Click the Flyer file, the Letterhead file, and the Web Page Draft file, and then release the Ctrl key. T h e four files you clicked are selected. hold the

Exhibit 8-7.

Exhibit 8-7 Moving a file into a folder selected file

Removable Disk (E:) C•MPTR • Chapter 8 • Chapter Print Burn New folder

Libraries [j] Documents B My Documents ± Public Documents mP Music fr- Pictures H Videos Finances folder

1

Humeyruup lomputer Local Disk (C:) Removable Disk (E:)

Search Chapter

u

19 Business Plan

Candy

Customer List

Expenses

4

Graphics

Pi

D r a g the four selected

Marketing

folder.

Web Page Draft

>

^k, Tip: Because the files are listed sequentially, you could also press the Shift key, click the first file in the list, click the last file in the list, and then release the Shift key to select all the files.

files into the

J Flyer

file is

| Click the

as moving t h e file t o t h e F i n a n c e s folder. See

Favorites • Desktop & Downloads „ Recent Places

Move here. The

moved from the current folder t o the Finances folder.

I

Web Page Screenshot

ScreenTip

r

F.nan*W I

alio]-

Orientation * IJ

Margins

University of Chicago t h r o u g h Concentration: Marketing. O n the R i b b o n , click

the Page Layout tab. In the P a r a g r a p h g r o u p ,

»

|9 Line N u m b e r s » b?" H y p h e n a t i o n *

age Setup 11 C o l u m n s "

t h e t h r e e lines f r o m

Hfc

Size'

•p=?{ Breaks

Mailings ^

lesumeTlnar^Microsoft Wot Review

Watermark *

v*| P a g e C o l o r • J] P a g e B o r d e r s

Spacing section in the Paragraph group

View

Indent

Spacing

%W Left

0-

S i R i g h t : 0'

'

C

JS

Before: (

C

;J

After:

EducationH

University-of Chicago- •Chicago,-IL*!

selected paragraphs have 10 points of space after them

BA-CL/m/at/c/e,-Business,Oune,-2013^1 Concentration: Marketing^ Minor: Spanish^

in the Spacing section, 1 0 pt a p p e a r s in the After b o x , indicating that there is 1 0 points o f space after each of the selected p a r a g r a p h s . See

paragraph spacing The space above and below a paragraph.

Exhibit 1 0 - 1 6 .

Chapter

10:

Creating

a

Document

7

Exhibit 10-17 LINE AND PARAGRAPH SPACING BUTTON MENU Line and Paragraph Spacing button

so that th of the letti prints the letterhe& Hfc Select the Education heading. J) In the Paragraph g r o u p , in the Spacing section, click the

Before

box up arrow twice. T h e space above the selected p a r a g r a p h increases to 1 2 points.

points o f space are removed after each o f the

Switch to the Cover Letter document, and then

selected paragraphs.

scroll the document so that 1107 Park St. appears at the top o f the d o c u m e n t window. VM Select the first three lines in the inside address (from

Mabel Wong

through

I O n the H o m e t a b , in t h e P a r a g r a p h g r o u p , c l i c k the

Line and Paragraph Spacing button A m e n u o f line spacing options a p p e a r s , with t w o paragraph spacing c o m m a n d s a t t h e b o t t o m . See

132 South Canal St.).

^k,Tip: When entering text, you can press the Shift+Enter keys to move the insertion point to a new line without starting a new paragraph and therefore create new lines without the paragraph spacing.

Adjusting Line Spacing Line spacing

is the a m o u n t o f s p a c e that

appears

b e t w e e n lines o f t e x t w i t h i n a p a r a g r a p h . W o r d offers a n u m b e r o f preset line s p a c i n g o p t i o n s . P a r a graphs

formatted

single spaced.

with

t h e 1 . 0 setting are called

Single s p a c i n g a l l o w s the least a m o u n t

o f space b e t w e e n l i n e s — e s s e n t i a l l y n o e x t r a s p a c e . P a r a g r a p h s f o r m a t t e d with t h e 2 . 0 setting are called

double spaced a n d have

a b l a n k line o f space b e t w e e n

each line o f t e x t in t h e p a r a g r a p h . T h e default line spacing setting is 1 . 1 5 , w h i c h a l l o w s a little m o r e space b e t w e e n lines t h a n 1 . 0 s p a c i n g . T h e 1 . 1 5 line spacing setting is designed t o m a k e it easier t o read t e x t on a c o m p u t e r s c r e e n .

Exhibit 10-17. | At the b o t t o m o f the m e n u , click

After Paragraph. T h e

Remove Space

menu closes, and the 1 0

ACTIVITY Adjust line spacing. I Select all the text in the d o c u m e n t .

line spacing The amount of space between lines of text within a paragraph. single spaced Line spacing that has no extra space between lines of text in a paragraph. double spaced Line spacing that has a blank line of text between each line of text in a paragraph.

I O n the H o m e t a b , in the Paragraph group, click

the Line and Paragraph Spacing button |+=-[. T h e default line spacing setting for the selected text ( 1 . 1 5 ) is indicated by a check m a r k . I O n the m e n u , c l i c k 1.0. T h e s p a c i n g b e t w e e n lines in each p a r a g r a p h is c h a n g e d t o single spaced.

Chapter

10: Creating

a

Document

Aligning Paragraphs Normal

are

Exhibit 10-18 Varieties of text alignment

paragraphs

left-aligned—they

are flush with the left

margin a n d ragged, or uneven, along the right

margin.

Right-aligned

paragraphs are aligned along the right margin and

ragged

along the

left m a r g i n . Paragraphs

that

left alignment When you go to an interview, don't forget about your appearance. First impressions count, and you want to be able to spend the bulk of the interview discussing your abilities and accomplishments, not trying to overcome a negative first impression.

right alignment When you go to an interview, don't forget about your appearance. First impressions count, and you want to be able to spend the bulk of the interview discussing your abilities and accomplishments, not trying to overcome a negative first impression.

are centered are

positioned m i d w a y between the left a n d right margins along

and both

ragged margins.

Justified paragraphs are flush with b o t h the left and right m a r g i n s . T e x t in newspaper is

often

columns

justified.

See

Exhibit 1 0 - 1 8 . The

Paragraph

group o n the H o m e t a b includes

a

button

for

each o f the four types o f alignment described in E x h i b i t 1 0 - 1 8 . T o align a single p a r a g r a p h , click

center alignment When you go to an interview, don't forget about your appearance. First impressions count, and you want to be able to spend the bulk of the interview discussing your abilities and accomplishments, not trying to overcome a negative first impression.

justified alignment When you go to an interview, don't forget about your appearance. First impressions count, and you want to be able to spend the bulk of the interview discussing your abilities and accomplishments, not trying to overcome a negative first impression.

J

anywhere in that paragraph a n d then click the appropriate

alignment

Education heading. In the Align Text Right button

b u t t o n . T o align multiple paragraphs, select the para-

Click anywhere in the

graphs, a n d then click an alignment button.

Paragraph group, click the

y. T h e Align Text Right b u t t o n toggles o n , and the selected paragraph is right-aligned. See

ACTIVITY

Exhibit 1 0 - 1 9 .

Change the alignment of paragraphs. Switch t o the Resume Final document. ^

At the t o p o f the document, select the first t w o lines o f text (Stephen Konoski's n a m e and address). On the R i b b o n , click the Home tab. Note that in the Paragraph group, the Align T e x t Left button [ g ] is selected.

Q ) O n the H o m e t a b , in the Paragraph group, click the

Center button

[W]. T h e selected paragraphs are

left-align To align paragraph text along the left margin with ragged edges along the right margin. ragged Uneven, such as text with an uneven appearance along a margin. right-align To align paragraph text along the right margin with ragged edges along the left margin. center To center paragraph text between the left and right margins with ragged edges along both margins. justify To align paragraph text along both the left and right margins.

centered horizontally on the page.

Chapter

10: Creating

a

Document

Exhibit 10-19 Paragraphs with different alignments

Home

Paste

Insert

*

Verdana

^

B

/

Page Layout

References

Mailings

Review

View AA

U

- ak

X,

x'

- V a

- _A -

^

M

^

M

[=

P3r.3gi.pn

Clipboard

—1 alignment buttons

r-

AaBbCcDc AaBbCcDc AaBbG AaBbCc ; V\ U N o Spaci...

Heading 1

Heading 2

I Normal

-

r Styles

|ft Find • JjeReplace

Change

Styles *

* Select Editing

centered paragraphs

Stephen-Konoski^
Ctrl,? Paste Options:

you might see - another button on this menu

T*1 (a!

Set D e f a u l t Paste..

Enclosures-(2)11

selected option

Chapter

10:

Creating

a

Document

ix). „ Finding and Replacing Text \-

Find text.

\

\ •

l hen working with a longer d o c u m e n t , you can

Q|

• waste a lot of time reading through the t e x t t o

In the Cover L e t t e r d o c u m e n t , on the H o m e tab, in the Editing group, click the

locate a particular w o r d o r phrase. It's m o r e efficient to

Find button.

The

Navigation Pane opens on the left side of the

use the Navigation Pane t o locate the word or phrase.

document window.

If you want to replace t e x t t h r o u g h o u t a document, you Q)

can use the Find and R e p l a c e dialog b o x .

At the top of the Navigation P a n e , c l i c k in the

Search Document box,

F n id n ig Text

and then type

c. Every

letter

c in the document is highlighted with yellow. Continue typing

To find specific t e x t in a d o c u m e n t , first open the Navi-

convention.

gation Pane by clicking the Find button in the Editing

onvention

to complete the w o r d

As you c o n t i n u e typing, the highlight-

ing is removed from w o r d s t h a t do not match the

group on the H o m e t a b . T h e n , in the Search D o c u m e n t

search text. All seven instances o f the word con-

b o x in the N a v i g a t i o n Pane, type the text for which you

vention

are searching. As you type, W o r d highlights every in-

are n o w highlighted in the document.

stance o f the search t e x t in the d o c u m e n t , and a list o f

In the Navigation Pane, if it is not the current tab,

text snippets containing each instance o f the search text

click the

appears in the Navigation P a n e . Y o u can click a snippet

tab jl.

t o go immediately to that l o c a t i o n in the document.

of the word convention appear on the tab. See __________

Exhiibit 10-33 Navigation Pane with search results for convention Copy button

| Navigation Pane

Browse the results from your current search

Snippets o f text surrounding each instance Exhibit 1 0 - 3 3 .

I

imng^^^Reviev Find button Search Document box

in o r g a n i z i n g n a t i o n a l sales meetings and a convention for our customers. For t h e convention, I

Browse the results from your current search tab

p r i m a r y contact f o r e t h o s e v e n d o r s at t h e c o n v e n t i o n . Based o n convention evaluations, attendees

j u l d be a valuable-asset to y o u r - t e a m . f

A t S a n f o r d I n d u s t r i e s ! assists t h e m a r k e t i n g c o o r d i n a t o r in o r g a n i z i n g n a t i o n a l sales m e e t i n g s - a n d a c o n v e n t i o n for our-customers For the c o n v e n t i o n , I established relationships w i t h - v e n d o r s a n d - w a s - t h e primary contact

and a convention for our customers. For the c o n v e n t i o n , I established relationships with vendors

a r e l o o k i n g f o r - a n e w assistant. I w o u l d l i k e t o a p p l y f o r t h e p o s i t i o n . - W i t h r - S a n f o r d - l n d u s t r i e s , I h a v e - d e v e l o p e d - s t r o n g - s k i l l s in rjryjcj; r e s e a r c h a n d

fac&thosevendorsat t h e

c o n v e n t i o n Based on c o n v e n t i o n ^ v a l u a t i o n s , a t t e n d e e s

scoredthis convention 20% higher t J ^ t h e p r e v i o u s - y e j N L S - l

highlighted words

In-addition t o - w o r k i n g o n -thesales m e e t i n g and the c o n v e n t i o n , I we.realso r e s p o n s i b l e f o r t h e following: 1

snippet and corresponding word in document

requency-overweekendsl u t i n g - t h e m e e t i n g mi n u t e 5 f o r t h e t e a m i ustomer-database.f r

e s u m e , - w h i c h detail:

nrammar errnr

styles. Styles w i t h o u t t h e p a r a g r a p h s y m b o l n e x t t o their n a m e s a r e either c h a r a c t e r o r linked styles. In the Styles gallery, t h e N o r m a l , N o S p a c i n g , and List P a r a g r a p h styles a r e p a r a g r a p h styles; t h e H e a d i n g ,

ACTIVITY

T i t l e a n d S u b t i t l e , a n d t w o Q u o t e styles a r e linked

Apply Quick Styles.

styles; a n d t h e rest o f the styles (the S t r o n g style, t h e

Proposal located

t h r e e E m p h a s i s styles, and t h e t w o R e f e r e n c e styles)

Open the data file

are c h a r a c t e r styles.

C h a p t e r folder. Save the d o c u m e n t as

in the Chapter 11\

Biking

Proposal. Select the first paragraph in the d o c u m e n t (the title

Heading Styles You can choose from different levels of heading styles. The highest level. Heading 1, is used for the major headings in a document and applies the most noticeable formatting, with a larger font than all the other heading styles. (In heading styles, the highest level has the lowest number.) The Heading 2 style is used for headings that are subordinate to the highest level headings; it applies slightly less prominent formatting than the Heading 1 style. There are nine built-in heading styles. When you apply a heading style, the font labeled (Headings) in the Font list is applied to the text.

H e a d n ig 1

Heading 2 Heading 3

line). O n the H o m e t a b , in the Styles g r o u p , click the

More button

T h e Styles gallery o p e n s . R e f e r

back to Exhibit 1 1 - 1 . Point to several of the styles in the gallery to see the Live Preview o n the selected p a r a g r a p h , and then click the

Title style. T h e

gallery closes and

the Title style is applied t o the selected p a r a g r a p h . T h e r o w o f styles visible in the Styles g r o u p o n the H o m e t a b is scrolled t o display the style you just applied—the Title style. T h e Title style is a linked style and changes the t e x t t o blue, 2 6 - p o i n t C a m b r i a , adds a blue b o r d e r b e l o w the text, and changes the space after the p a r a g r a p h f r o m 1 0 points t o 1 5 points. C a m b r i a is the font labeled (Headings)

at the t o p o f the f o n t list. See

Exhibit 11-2. Select the nonadjacent heading paragraphs Over-

Applying a Quick Style To apply a Q u i c k Style, select the text o r paragraph t o which y o u w a n t t o apply the style, and then click the Q u i c k Style n a m e in the Styles gallery. W h e n you apply a style, that style is selected in the Styles gallery. W h e n you c r e a t e a new d o c u m e n t , only t w o heading styles, H e a d i n g 1 a n d H e a d i n g 2 , a p p e a r in t h e Styles gallery. I f y o u apply the H e a d i n g 2 style t o t e x t ,

view and Program Development. In the Styles group, click the up arrow [*] t o scroll the gallery up one row, and then click the Head-

ing 1 style. T h e

Heading 1 style is a linked style

that formats the selected paragraphs in b o l d , blue, 1 4 - p o i n t C a m b r i a , removes all the space after each paragraph, and changes the space before each selected paragraph t o 2 4 points.

the H e a d i n g 3 style is added t o t h e Styles gallery. As

Quick Style A style that appears in a gallery.

you apply e a c h m o r e subordinate heading style, t h e n e x t level o f heading style is added t o the gallery.

Chapter

11: Formatting

a Long

Document

Exhibit 11-2 Title style applied to selected text

*^*^ ^^^^"^^**^^Biiring i r

Home

Insert

—B,B

> W W

Page Layout

References

Mailings

Proposal - Microsoft W o r d

Review

Cambria (Headi

View

Developer

l ®Aabl Title

I

4af?feCc.

4 fibCcD(

Subtitle

Subtle Em...

0

4oBbCcf0t j, ^ ^ x

Emphasis

J

-

Rep|a£e

Change

I' I Styles" R \

Styles

M

H

S E L E C T

Editing

Proposal-for-Mountain-Biking-at-North Lake-CampU '

•

Budget heading click the More

O p e n t h e Styles gallery, a n d t h e n click t h e

I Scroll down, and then select the

paragraph. In the Styles g r o u p , button Q . Notice that only t w o Heading

Emphasis style. T h e

E m p h a s i s style is a c h a r a c -

ter style. T h e selected t e x t is f o r m a t t e d w i t h t h e

styles are

E m p h a s i s style, w h i c h a p p l i e s i t a l i c f o r m a t t i n g

in the gallery. I In the Styles gallery, click the

to text.

Heading 2 style. T h e

selected text is formatted with the Heading 2 style, which is similar t o the Heading 1 style but the color is a little lighter shade o f blue, the size o f the text is 1 3 points, and the space before the paragraph is 1 0 points. I In the Styles group, click the More button

0.

N o t i c e that the Heading 3 style has been added t o

Modifying a Quick Style If you w a n t t o change some parts o f the definition o f a Q u i c k Style, you can modify it. T o modify a Quick Style, first apply the Q u i c k Style t o t e x t o r a paragraph, and then modify the formatting o f the text o r paragraph using direct formatting. N e x t , right-click the Quick Style name in the Styles gallery, a n d then on the shortcut

the gallery. Use the list below t o apply Heading Q u i c k Styles to the following paragraphs:

menu, click Update

to M a t c h Se-

is replaced by the

name o f the style).

Minimum Funding—$200 Moderate Funding—$3,200

Heading 3

Questions Opportunity

Heading 2 Heading 1

Description of Program Issues to Consider Potential Trip Routes East

Heading 1

Heading 3

Heading 3

Heading 2 Heading 2

North

Heading 3

West

Heading 3

South

Heading 3

ACTIVITY Modify a Quick Style. Q)

Scroll down, and then select the

Budget heading

paragraph. Q | Reduce the font size o f the selected text to

12 points. On the H o m e rah, in the Font group, click the

At the t o p o f the d o c u m e n t , under the Program

Bold button [5] t o deselect it, and then click the Underline button U . T h e bold formatting

Development heading, in the first line, select key.

removed and the selected text is underlined.

Chapter

11:

Formatting

a

Long

D o c u m er

is

Exhibit 11-3 Redefined Heading 2 style

Home

Clipboard

Page L a y o u t

•

Cambria (Headii ' 1 2

J

B

J Paste

Insert

r

A

I

References

- A' A'

1 TJ |*|afc

X,

Mailings

Review

Aa•

X

1

Font

View

Developer

AaBbCd zl (5 AaBbCcDc AaBbCcDc A B a b G Paragrap="h

^ " B B"

11

Normal

H N o Spaci...

Heading 1 J Heading 2

Find •

A 4 '

Change Styles -

^

Replace

^ Select -

Styles

Heading 2 style redefined

B u d g n e i t g c o u d le g o w t o b a c d s iy r e i o c ^ i t n ls .s m o d e r a y e u t l f n d d a n d b e v e r s u c l c i e u f .l I O n the H o m e t a b , in the Styles group, right-click

then create the style based on the f o r m a t t e d t e x t . T o d o

Heading 2 style. O n the shortcut menu, click Update Heading 2 to Match Selection. T h e style is

this, select the formatted text, click the M o r e b u t t o n in

the

the Styles g r o u p , and then click Save Selection as a N e w

redefined to m a t c h the formatting changes you

Q u i c k Style to open the Create N e w Style f r o m F o r m a t -

m a d e t o the Budget heading, and all the headings

ting dialog b o x . You can n a m e and save the style from

with the H e a d i n g 2 style applied n o w m a t c h this

this dialog b o x . N e w Quick Styles are created as linked styles. To

style. See E x h i b i t 1 1 - 3 .

| Select the Minimum Funding—$200 heading paragraph. R e m o v e the bold formatting. Heading 3 style. Update Heading 3 to

) In the Styles group, right-click the O n the shortcut menu, click

Match Selection. Notice

that the formatting o f the

change this, in the Create N e w Style from Formatting dialog box, click Modify to open a larger version of the Create N e w Style from Formatting dialog b o x , click the Style type arrow, and then select the style type from the list. R e m e m b e r that part of a style definition is the style on which the style is based. So when you create a new

M o d e r a t e F u n d i n g — $ 3 , 2 0 0 heading changed to

style based upon the formatting o f selected t e x t , the new

m a t c h the new style definition.

style retains a connection to the original style. If you modify the original style, these changes will also be applied to the new style. For example, suppose you need to

Saving a Style to the Template The modified style is saved only with the current document. If you want to make the modified style available to all documents created based on the current template (even if it is the Normal template), right-click the Quick Style name, and then click Modify on the shortcut menu to open the Modify Style dialog box. In the Modify Style dialog box, click the New documents based on this template option button at the bottom of the dialog box, and then click OK.

create a new style that will be used exclusively for formatting the heading Budget

in all upcoming reports. You

could start by selecting text formatted with the H e a d ing 1 style, change the font c o l o r o f the selected text to purple, and then save the formatting o f the selected text as a new style named Budget.

If you then modify the

Heading 1 style—perhaps by adding italics—the text in the document that is formatted with the Budget style will also have italics, because it is based on the Heading 1 style. This connection between a new style and the style on which it is based enforces a consistent l o o k a m o n g styles, helping to create a document with a coherent design. T o take full advantage of this feature, you need to think carefully about what style you w a n t to use as the basis for a new style. For example, if you are creating a

Creating a New Quick Style

new style that will be used as a heading, you should base that new style on a heading style.

Y o u might find that you need to create a new style for

Finally, when you create a new p a r a g r a p h o r linked

your d o c u m e n t . T h e easiest way to create a new Q u i c k

style, the style for the next p a r a g r a p h created w h e n

Style is t o f o r m a t text in the way that you w a n t , and

you press the Enter key is the new style. T o c h a n g e this,

Chapter

11:

Formatting

a Long

Document

open the larger version o f the Create N e w Style from F o r m a t t i n g dialog b o x , as described a b o v e , click the Style for following paragraph arrow, and

Exhibit 11-5 Large Create New Style from Formatting dialog box

then select the style you w a n t .

style name

Create New Style from Formatting Properties

ACTIVITY Create a new Quick Style. £

click to change — t h e style type

At the top o f the d o c u m e n t , under the Overview heading, in the first line, select North

Lake Camp. In documents

Name:

NLC N a m e *

Style t y p e :

Linked (paragraph a n d character)

Style based o n :

IT Normal

Style for following p a r a g r a p h :

IT NLC Name

3 L Ft]

Formatting

produced at c a m p ,

the c a m p n a m e is in a different font and a

Q

Candara

11 0

I

B

U

dark green color.

formatting applied to the text before the dialog box was opened

I Change the font o f the selected text t o

Candara. Change the

Olive Green, Accent 3, Darker 50%.

color t o

click the More

Mourtarb idung at North Lake Carnp(NLC)s the next k>f)ai step in NLC s' s— : .. . . . ir ••• - click to change the style tor pressing the Enter key after tto«s«Kio.doorct^. the paragraph created HPaFrao grialpo hwn obPiragapt Folio* :ZI Panfaph Foo lwn ig Parayapn Foo lw ins Pm?aph iFg tr

B

Font: C a n d a r a , F o n t color: Accent 3, Style: Quick Style Based o n : Normal

) In the Styles group,

keep selected to save the style only with the current document

button

0 . Below the gallery,

Save Selection as a New Quick Style.

click

V A d d to Quick Style list o Only in this document

J Automatically update N e w documents based o n this template

Format -

A small Create N e w Style from Formatting dialog b o x opens with the temporary style n a m e selected in the N a m e b o x . See Exhibit 1 1 - 4 .

Exhibit 11-4 Small Create New Style from Formatting dialog box

click to save style as part of this template

I In the Styles group, if you d o n ' t see the N L C N a m e style, click the up scroll arrow [*]. T h e new N L C N a m e style is the second style in the gallery and is selected.

Create New Style from Formatting

I Under the Overview heading, in the parentheses

Name:

Style!
- ^\

Review

| := - |= •

WL W. M

Yes in t h e dialog b o x

* m

*= '

t h a t asks if you w a n t tW >

tl • _

®

AAaaBBbbCCccDDcc

AaBbCcD

-

Tl r Normal

NLC N a m e

AaBbCcDc Tl N o Spaci...

ft

AaBbG

Change

Heading 1

Styles »

iragraph

Find Replace

t o c o n t i n u e searching f r o m t h e beginning o f

* Select -

the d o c u m e n t .

Editing

Click OK in t h e dialog

il-for'Mountain-Biking- at-North implf

b o x that tells y o u t h a t 13 r e p l a c e m e n t s were m a d e . All instances o f N L C f o r m a t t e d with the N o r m a l style are

i-North-Lake-Camp-(NLcyis-the^exH^ ouldbeafun-newprogramforour^ampers/anditfits-withthe-camp's-mission-of-

replaced with N L C formatted with t h e N L C N a m e style. Click Close t o close the dialog b o x .

Using the Styles Pane

Save the document.

The Styles pane displays the complete list of styles available to a document, as well as indicates the style type of each style. To open the Styles pane click the Dialog Box Launcher in the Styles group on the Home tab. The list of styles displayed when you open the Styles pane is the list of recommended styles. For new documents, this means it lists the styles that appear in the Styles Styles gallery. To see the comClear All Normal plete list of styles available, click NLC Name the Options link at the bottom No Spacing of the Styles pane, and then in Heading 1 Heading 2 the Style Pane Options dialog Heading 3 box that opens, click the Select Heading-4 styles to show arrow, and then Title Subtitle click All styles. If you want to Subtle Emphasis add a style to the Styles gallery, Emphasis I n t e n s e Emphasis point to the style name in the Strong Styles pane, click the arrow that Quote appears, and then click Add to Intense Quote Subtle R e f e r e n c e Quick Style Gallery. Intense Reference The symbols to the right of Book Title each style name in the Styles H Show Preview pane indicate the style type: • Disable U n k e d Styles Paragraph styles are labeled with U character styles with a, and linked styles with . At the bottom of the Styles pane, you can select the Show Preview check box to see the format of each style, and select the Disable Linked Styles check box to change all linked styles to paragraph styles. #

M

loh.2

A

Working with Themes

fter you format a document with a variety o f styles, you can alter the look o f the d o c u m e n t by chang-

ing the document's theme. A theme is a coordinated set

of colors, fonts, and effects. Created by professional designers, themes ensure that a document has a polished, coherent look. Forty-four themes are included in Office. T h e default theme for new documents is the Office theme. Every theme assigns a font t o headings and t o body text. These t w o theme fonts are always listed at the t o p of the Fonts menu with the labels (Headings)

and (Body)

on the right. You have already seen this when you opened the Fonts menu t o apply a different font. Some themes use one font for headings and another f o r body text; other themes use the same font f o r both elements. In the Office theme, the heading font is C a m b r i a , and the body font is Calibri. If you change the theme, the theme fonts in the Font list change to match the fonts for the new theme.

This is the Office theme's heading font Cambria.

This is the Office theme's body font, Calibri.

This is the Newsprint theme's heading font, Impact. This is the Newsprint theme's body font. Times New Roman. W h e n y o u type text in a n e w d o c u m e n t , the t e x t is formatted with the body text font. If you c h a n g e the theme, text formatted with the theme fonts c h a n g e s t o

theme A coordinated set of colors, fonts, and effects.

Chapter

11:

Formatting

a

Long

Document

the f o r m a t o f the new theme's fonts. If you change the font o f text to a non-theme font, when you change the

I Click the

Themes button. T h e

T h e m e s gallery

opens. See E x h i b i t 1 1 - 8 .

theme, the font will not c h a n g e . You have also already seen the colors associated with a theme. When you displayed the c o l o r palette to

Exhibit 11-8 Themes gallery

change the font color or a paragraph border color, the colors under T h e m e C o l o r s are the coordinated colors

fere

me

o f the current theme. T h i s set o f colors changes when

1

you change the theme. So if you apply one o f these theme colors using direct formatting, or if you apply

rest of themes in alphabetical order (scroll to see entire list)

a style, such as a heading style, that formats text with color, when you apply a different theme, the c o l o r will change to m a t c h the equivalent c o l o r in the new theme. T h e T h e m e C o l o r s are c o o r d i n a t e d to look good together, so if you are going t o use multiple colors in a document (perhaps for paragraph shading and font c o l o r ) , it's a good idea to stick with the T h e m e C o l o r s . Clarity

Composite

Concourse

A a j Aa^| A^JAai S3 Aa

Applying a New Theme T o change the theme, click the T h e m e s button in the

Equity

Themes group on the Page L a y o u t t a b , and then select

Aa

the theme you w a n t in the gallery. T h e new theme is ap-

Executive

plied to the entire d o c u m e n t and all the elements within

Flow

Foundry

Reset t o T h e m e f r o m T e m p l a t e

it, with the colors and fonts changing to match the col-

Qj)

ors and fonts of the new t h e m e .

A

B r o w s e for Themes... Save C u r r e n t T h e m e . . .

ACTIVITY

I

Change the document's theme.

Q|

In the gallery, point to the

Austin theme

to see a

Scroll the document so you can see the title at the

Live Preview in the d o c u m e n t . T h e fonts in the

t o p of the window and the Budget heading near

document change, and the c o l o r o f the text for-

the bottom of the window.

matted with the Title style and with the Heading

Page Layout tab. In the the Themes button. T h e

O n the R i b b o n , click the T h e m e s group, point t o

name of the current t h e m e , the Office T h e m e , appears in a ScreenTip. See E x h i b i t 1 1 - 7 .

styles changes. N o t i c e that the changes you made to the Heading 2 style definition are retained. I Point to several other themes, and then scroll down and click the

Urban theme. T h e

fonts and

colors in the document change to those used in the Urban theme.

I Insert

| A?" ,—.

T h e mM es W ^ \OJ

W

U __

Page Layout

s,ze

'

>:J Line

Margins W =1 Columns •

2 2

I T Themes

References

Orientation' ^ B r e a k s "

be

Numbers

Mailinc _]

.\aterr Page Color •

Hyphenation

opens. N o t i c e that at the t o p , the Headings font is Trebuchet M S and the Body

font

is Georgia.

I Click a blank area o f the d o c u m e n t to close the

Page Setup

title, and then in the F o n t Font Color button arrow |A >

Font list, select the

I Theme Current: Office Theme. C h a n g e t h e o v e r a l l desigrV entire document, i n c l u d i n g ^ l o r s , f o n t s , a n d effects.

& Press Fl for more help.

posal-for-Mou] [e-Camplf name of current theme

Chapter

Home tab. In the Font Font box arrow. T h e Font gallery

O n the R i b b o n , click the

group, click the

11:

Formatting

a Long

Document

group, click the

The

color palette opens. T h e T h e m e C o l o r s in the palette are the Urban theme c o l o r s . T h e T h e m e Colors you saw previously were the Office theme colors. See E x h i b i t 1 1 - 9 .

Exhibit 11-9 Color palette for the Urban theme

Exhibit 11-10 Colors dialog box with the Standard tab selected Colors

Insert

1

—

*A

Page Layout

T r e b u c h e t M S (I- - 26

References

- A A

Mailings

select this green color

•"•SB

Clipboard

H

C

style headings colored with Urban theme colors

Standard i Custom Colors:

Proposal

color will preview here

"ake-Car-IHlm i l Standard Colors

N Overview!]

'3>

M o r e Colors... 1

j

Gradient

•

Mountaintildng«t-North^ake
Modifying a Theme

lected, displaying a h e x a g o n c o m p o s e d o f small

O n c e you have chosen a theme, you c a n c h a n g e a n y o f

colored h e x a g o n s . See E x h i b i t 1 1 - 1 0 .

the three elements that m a k e up the t h e m e : the f o n t s ,

O n the left, in the r o w above the center row, click the

leftmost green hexagon. T h e N e w portion

of

the preview b o x changes t o the dark green c o l o r you selected.

the c o l o r s , a n d the effects. T o d o this, click the F o n t s , C o l o r s , o r Effects button in the T h e m e s g r o u p o n the Page L a y o u t t a b , a n d then select the f o n t s , c o l o r s , o r effects from another theme. Y o u c a n also c h a n g e the fonts a n d colors by clicking the a p p r o p r i a t e c o m m a n d

Click OK. T h e dialog b o x closes and the selected

on the C h a n g e Styles button m e n u in t h e Styles group

text is reformatted with the dark green color.

on the H o m e t a b .

Chapter

11:

Formatting

a Long

Document

Creating New Theme Fonts and Colors If none of the theme font sets suits your needs, you can click the Create New Theme Fonts command on the Fonts button menu in the Themes group on the Page Layout tab, or on the Fonts submenu on the Change Styles button menu in the Styles group on the Home tab. In the Create New Theme Fonts dialog box, select a heading and a body text font, and type a name for the new theme font set in the Name box.

1 9 Uad)

Create New Theme Font; Heading font:

Calibri

Sample

lext/Background - Dark 1 \W§ '

Text

Text

Text/Background - Light 1 [ f ~ | < Text/Background - Cark 2 j'l

'

Hyperlink Hyperlink

Accent 2

[fiL

Accent 2

B o d y text b o d y text b o d y text. B o d y text b o d y text.

Name:

Theme colors

Accent 1

3H e a n d g i

Body font:

Create New Theme Colors

Text/Background • Light 2 |

Sample

Cambria

listed, and type a name for the new color set in the Name box. In both cases, the new, custom font set and theme color set will be listed at the top of their respective menus.

m

Accent 4 Save

Cancel

You can customize theme colors by clicking the Create New Theme Colors command on the Colors button menu in the Themes group on the Page Layout tab, or on the Colors submenu on the Change Styles button menu in the Styles group on the Home tab. In the Create New Theme Colors dialog box, select a color for each theme element

Accent 5.

Ml

Accent £

M

Hyperlink Followed Hyperlink Name: 0

Save

Cancel

Exhibit 11-11 Theme Fonts menu

ACTIVITY Modify the theme fonts and colors.

Q) O n the R i b b o n , click the Page Layout tab. In the T h e m e s group, click the Theme

Fonts button [5H

T h e T h e m e Fonts menu opens.

Page Layout

Theme Fonts button

I Themes

—I

, rtc.

J

G i l l Sans M T Gill Sans MT

selected. See Exhibit 1 1 - 1 1 .

Live Preview, scroll up the list, and then click the

Module fonts. T h e

Technic

Aa

Tw Cen MT

Aa

T w Can M T

document. In t h e T h e m e s g r o u p , c l i c k t h e

ors BUTTON

B > Scroll

Theme Col-

d o w n t h e list t o see

t h a t t h e U r b a n c o l o r p a l e t t e is selected. See

Aa

F r a n k l i n Gothic M... Franklin Gothic Book

Aa

Trebuchet MS Georgia^ Veive

P o i n t to several of the t h e m e s l i s t e d to s e e the Live

Preview, and then click the Grid theme colors. T h e elements in the d o c u m e n t formatted with theme colors change t o the corresponding theme colors o f the Grid t h e m e .

11

Trek

Urban

Exhibit 11-12.

Chapter

Franklin G o t h i c Bo... Arial Thatch

M o d u l e theme fonts (Corbel for

both headings and body text) are applied t o the

\J Line N i

T r e b u c h e t MS Solstice

S c r o l l to the b o t t o m of the list to s e c that U r b a n is

Point to s e v e r a l of the t h e m e s l i s t e d to s e e the

O r i e n t a t i o n » >f^{ Breaks J j Size •

Formatting

a Long

Document

Aa

C e n u t r yG o h c ti Century G o t h i c

Waveform

Candara

C/eate CNaenwd aTrhae m e F o n t s . .

it is still 1 4 - p o i n t C a m b r i a , but t h e c o l o r is R e d , Accent

Exhibit 11-12 Theme Colors menu

2 , D a r k e r 5 0 % ; the paragraph is c e n t e r e d ; there is 2 0 points o f space before the p a r a g r a p h a n d 1 0 points o f space after the paragraph; and there is a R e d , A c c e n t 2 , D a r k e r 2 5 % double-line border under t h e p a r a g r a p h . You c a n select f r o m a total o f 1 4 style sets t o change the look o f all the text in a document. Y o u c a n change the style set b e f o r e o r after y o u apply styles. Be aware that if y o u redefine Q u i c k Styles before you apply a different style set, the c h a n g e s might not all be retained if you change the style set after y o u change the style definitions.

ACTIVITY Change the Style Set. QP

O n the H o m e t a b , in the Styles group, click the

Change Styles button. O n the menu that opens,

Waveform

•

selected theme color palette

Create N e w T h e m e Colors...

notice the Colors and Fonts c o m m a n d s . Pointing to these c o m m a n d s opens the same menus you s a w when used the T h e m e Colors a n d T h e m e Fonts buttons in the Themes group on the Page L a y o u t t a b . O n t h e m e n u , p o i n t t o Style S e t . A m e n u o f style

sets opens. See Exhibit 1 1 - 1 3 . | At t h e t o p o f the document, under the Overview

North Lake Camp. O n the R i b b o n , Home tab. Notice in the F o n t b o x that

heading, select click the

Exhibit 11-13 Style Set menu

the f o n t o f the text formatted with the N L C N a m e

Change Styles button

style is still C a n d a r a . Also notice that all o f the

•veloper

text f o r m a t t e d with the N L C N a m e style is still

0

the s a m e dark green you selected. T h i s is because

AaBbCcD

AaBbCcD

Tl N o r m a l

NLC Name

the dark green color was n o t a theme color, so it is

loii Changing the Style Set

k in i

list of style sets

A

available t o each d o c u m e n t . T h e default style

Fonts

Fancy

jj

Paragraph Spacing Set as D e f a u l t

Manuscript Modern Newsprint

calstepii ers, and

Perspective Simple Thatch

you change the style set, the Q u i c k Style definitions

W o r d 2003

ready seen, is formatted as 1 4 - p o i n t C a m b r i a with the

WJ C o l o r s

Formal

z

W o r d 2010 >ry,tradr

Reset t o Q u i c k Styles f r o m T e m p l a t e

perswill-

Reset D o c u m e n t Q u i c k Styles

iat-helph

Save as Q u i c k Style Set...

Blue, Accent 1 , D a r k e r 2 5 % c o l o r ; the paragraph is left-aligned, a n d there are 2 4 points o f space before the

style set A group of Quick Styles.

paragraph. If y o u change the style set t o the F o r m a l style set, the H e a d i n g 1 Q u i c k Style definition changes;

Chapter

11:

Formatting

a

Long

w

Style Set

A

Traditional

style set selected, the Heading 1 style, as you have al-

A

Find '

iac R e p l a c e M£ Select

Elegant

set f o r n e w d o c u m e n t s is the W o r d 2 0 1 0 style set. If are c h a n g e d . F o r e x a m p l e , with the default W o r d 2 0 1 0

Change Styles*

Heading 1

Distinctive

3

style set is a coordinated group o f Q u i c k Styles

1 N o Spaci...

ft

AaBbC.

D e f a u l t (Black a n d W h i t e )

unaffected by changing the theme c o l o r s . I Save the d o c u m e n t .

AaBbCcD

Document

• •

ment headings. Paragraphs f o r m a t t e d with the H e a d ing 1 style are the highest level headings. Paragraphs

Customizing the Normal Template

formatted with the Heading 2 style are subordinate t o Heading 1 paragraphs. In an outline, subordinate head-

The combination of themes and style sets provides an almost dizzying number of choices. You can select a theme; change the theme fonts, colors, or effects; and change the style set to create a document quickly formatted with a distinctive look. Change Styles * As you have seen, if you reA Style Set define Quick Styles and then Colors apply a different style set, Fonts your changes might not carry through. If you come up with Paragraph Spacing a combination you want to Set as Default save as the default when you create new documents—in other words, if you want to save changes to the Normal template— make all the changes you want using theme fonts and colors and the Style Set command, click the Change Styles button in the Styles group on the Home tab, and then click Set as Default.

ings—or subheadings—are indented below the H e a d ing 1 paragraphs. Each successive level o f heading styles (Heading 3 , Heading 4 , and s o o n ) is indented further to the right. W h e n y o u w o r k w i t h a n o u t l i n e , you c a n m o v e t o p i c s t o o t h e r l o c a t i o n s in t h e o u t l i n e , o r y o u c a n p r o m o t e o r d e m o t e h e a d i n g s . M o v i n g a heading t o a h i g h e r level in t h e o u t l i n e — f o r e x a m p l e , c h a n g i n g a Heading 2 paragraph into a Heading 1 p a r a g r a p h — is c a l l e d promoting t h e h e a d i n g . M o v i n g an item l o w e r in t h e o u t l i n e is c a l l e d

demoting

the h e a d i n g .

If y o u used t h e b u i l t - i n h e a d i n g styles t o f o r m a t t h e h e a d i n g s in y o u r d o c u m e n t , w h e n y o u p r o m o t e o r d e m o t e a h e a d i n g , t h e n e x t h i g h e r o r l o w e r level o f h e a d i n g style is a p p l i e d t o t h e h e a d i n g p a r a g r a p h . W h e n y o u w o r k with multiple-page d o c u m e n t s , there are several ways t o m o v e a m o n g the pages in t h e d o c u m e n t . T o see the c u r r e n t p a g e n u m b e r and the t o tal n u m b e r o f pages, l o o k a t the page c o u n t i n d i c a t o r at the left end o f the status bar, w h i c h lists the c u r r e n t page n u m b e r a n d t h e t o t a l n u m b e r o f pages in t h e

(Point to Modern. Live Preview shows a preview o f the M o d e r n style set in the document. N o t i c e that the changes t o the H e a d i n g 2 definition are not retained with this style set.

d o c u m e n t . Y o u c a n drag t h e scroll b o x in the vertical scroll b a r t o m o v e b e t w e e n t h e pages in the d o c u m e n t . As y o u drag, a S c r e e n T i p a p p e a r s identifying the current page number. I f p a r a g r a p h s are formatted with t h e built-in heading styles, t h e first heading o n

( O n the submenu, click Formal. T h e style set is

the page also appears in t h e S c r e e n T i p . ( R e m e m b e r

changed t o the F o r m a l style set. T h e changes t o

that pressing the Page Up a n d Page D o w n keys scrolls

the Heading 2 style are retained with this style set.

the d o c u m e n t one screen a t a t i m e , n o t necessarily one

And note that the t e x t f o r m a t t e d with the N L C

page at a t i m e , unless t h e d o c u m e n t was displayed a t

N a m e style is unaffected because it was created

O n e Page z o o m . ) Y o u c a n also click the page c o u n t in-

using a non-theme font and color.

d i c a t o r t o open the G o T o t a b in the Find and Replace dialog b o x , and then type t h e page n u m b e r you w a n t

| Save the document.

to go t o .

Working with the Document Outline

loii.4

R

eviewing a document's outline c a n help you keep track o f a document's overall organization.

It lets y o u see, a t a glance, the hierarchy o f the docu-

View different pages in a multiple-page document. £

In the v e r t i c a l scroll bar, p o i n t t o the

t o n . A S c r e e n T i p a p p e a r s identifying t h e page

promote To move an item to a higher level in an outline,

as page 1 . T h e first h e a d i n g o n t h e p a g e ,

demote To move an item to a lower level in an outline.

O v e r v i e w , a l s o a p p e a r s in t h e S c r e e n T i p . See Exhibit 1 1 - 1 4 .

Chapter

11

Formatting

a Long

scroll

box, and then press a n d h o l d t h e m o u s e but-

Document

Exhibit 11-14 ScreenTip identifying the current page number

iking Proposal - Microsoft/ ' .ord Home

Insert

Page L a y o u t

llcandm

References

Mailings

Review

View

Developer

^Tii - A~ A' Aa' | % j := - |= - '-"JE* zl AaBbCcD ("if 11 N o r m a l a,- mm mm > - _•

AaBbCcD

AABBC

AABBCC

No Spacing

Heading 1

Heading 2

Font

- cnange Styles«

PROPO

Replace *

SelectEditing

SAL-FOR-MOUNTAIN-BIKING-AT NORTH-LAKE-CAMPfl OVERVIEW^ current page number and first heading on page in ScreenTip

Mountainbikingat NorthlakeW» >** Level 1

( Click anywhere in the

Page Layout

Budget

heading to deselect all the text and

•

S h o w Text Formatting

•

S h o w First Line O n l y

Outline Tools

Show Document

Collapse

Master D o c u m e n t

select only that paragraph. N o t i c e in the Styles gallery

pointer

that the Budget heading is n o w formatted with the Heading 1 style.

N o t i c e that it is n o w

0„ OVERVIEW^ ROGRAM-DEVELOPMENTFL O n DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAM^] O ISSUESTO-CONSIDER^] O POTENTIALTRIPROUTESFL O EASTFL

O NortjhJ

) Click anywhere in

the Minimum Funding—$200 heading.

-*

heading being moved

f o r m a t t e d with the Heading 2 style.

O WESTFL O SOUTHJ]

BUDGET^ O MINIMUM

FUNDING—$20o^| O MODERATE-FUNDING—$3,200^

QUESTIONS^ OPPORTUNITY^]

| O n the status bar, click the Outline

button

[5] t o switch t o Outline

Chapter

11:

Formatting

a

Long

Document

Word

N e x t to the Questions heading, double-click

left, a n d right sides o f t h e p a g e b e t w e e n t h e t e x t

the

a n d t h e edge o f t h e p a g e . B y d e f a u l t , W o r d d o c u -

plus sign symbol Q.

T h e heading expands

t o display all the b o d y t e x t u n d e r i t . S e e

m e n t s have o n e - i n c h m a r g i n s o n all sides o f t h e

Exhibit 11-22.

d o c u m e n t . See E x h i b i t 1 1 - 2 3 . T h i s is fine f o r m o s t documents. Sometimes you might want to change

Exhibit 11-22 Body text in Outline view O BUDGETFL O

double-click to display body text and any subheadings GRATE-FUNDING—$3,20OFL

ple,

y o u might w a n t t o space

in t h e m a r g i n s t o a l l o w readers t o take notes. T o

indicates this paragraph is body text

change the margins, click the

Margins

button

in

t h e P a g e Setup g r o u p o n the Page Layout t a b . Y o u can c h o o s e from a number o f predefined margin o p t i o n s , o r you can click the

Custom

Margins

c o m m a n d t o select y o u r own

position insertion point here I W o r d s : 109/B76

margins. For exam-

provide additional

LUESTIONSFL 1. -» THISPROPOSALDPE^NOTADDRESSALLCONCERNS-AND LEADS THATWOULD-NEED^WRFNER-STUDY AND-REVIEW. HERE IS A PARTIAL-LIST-OFPOTENTIAL-QUESTIONS:fl 2. -• DP^ERIEEDTO OBTAIN-PERMISSION-ORPERMITSFROMNORTH-LAKELAND^EMENTCONSORTIUMORNORTHMEADOWS STATE PARK?fl ^3. -» WHATWILLTHEPOLICY BEIF A CAMPER'SBIKE ISRUINED?fl • 4. -» DOESTHECAMP'SLIABILITYINSURANCE COVER EXCURSIONSOFFCAMPPROPERTY?fl • YCAMPING'ATNLC-HASALWAYSBEENASIGNIFICANTEXPERIENCE.MOUNTAINBIKINGAT-NLC / IS-UNTAPPED, UNLIMITED, ANDTHEREFORTHETAKING. MOUNTAINBIKINGCOULDEASILYAND/ ECONOMICALLYBEA NEXT-PROGRAM FEATUREFORCAMP.2,40OACRESAWAJT.fl

Page: 4 of 4

the

s e t t i n g s . After y o u

c r e a t e c u s t o m margin set-

ID

t i n g s , t h e m o s t recent set a p p e a r s as an o p t i o n a t t h e t o p o f the m e n u .

In the last paragraph o f body text, click before the word

Camping, type Conclusion, press

the Enter

key, and then press the Up Arrow key t o position the insertion point in the

Conclusion is formatted

Conclusion line.

as body text.

ACTIVITY Change the page margins. £

g r o u p , click

In the Outline Tools g r o u p , click the Promote

button [•]. Conclusion

View tab. In the Z o o m the One Page button. T h e current

O n t h e R i b b o n , click t h e

page o f the d o c u m e n t , p a g e 3 , appears c o m -

is p r o m o t e d t o a Level 1

pletely in the W o r d w i n d o w a n d you can easily

heading. O n the status bar, click the

Print Layout button \M

Outline view closes a n d y o u see that the H e a d -

Q)

see t h e m a r g i n s . O n the R i b b o n , click the

Page Layout tab.

In the

ing 1 style has been applied t o the Conclusion

Page Setup group, click the Margins button. T h e

heading.

Margins menu opens, as shown in Exhibit 1 1 - 2 4 .

Save the document.

Click Wide. T h e menu closes a n d the margins in the document are changed t o the W i d e setting, which keeps the one-inch margin a t the t o p and

LO11.5 Changing

A

the Margins

n o t h e r a s p e c t o f d o c u m e n t f o r m a t t i n g is h o w

t h e d o c u m e n t fits o n t h e p r i n t e d p a g e . T h e

margins a r e t h e b l a n k a r e a s a t t h e t o p , b o t t o m ,

b o t t o m , but changes both the left and right margins t o t w o inches.

Q ) IN the Page Setup g r o u p , click t h e Margins button. A t t h e b o t t o m o f t h e m e n u , c l i c k Custom Margins. T h e Page Setup dialog b o x o p e n s with the M a r g i n s t a b selected. See E x h i b i t 1 1 - 2 5 . T h e c u r r e n t m a r g i n settings a r e displayed in

margin The blank area above or below text, or to the left or right of text between the text and the edge of the page.

the b o x e s in t h e M a r g i n s s e c t i o n a t t h e t o p o f the M a r g i n s t a b . T h e value in t h e T o p b o x is selected.

\GE^^

Chapter

11

Formatting

a Long

Document

Exhibit 11-23 One-inch margins in a document

Insert ^ T h

?

«

Margins

Page L a y o u t

References

Orientation - ^

Breaks ~

Mailings ^

Review

Watermark •

View

Developer

Indent

Spacing

v * ] Page C o l o r •

s IJ

Size '

):J|

Line N u m b e r s »

I I

C o lPage u m n s S• e t u p be H y p h e n a t i o n » ri

PZa} g eP aBg ea c kBgorrodue nr sd

I Bring Forward 0 pt

1^

Left:

0-

3*

Right:

0'

-i

C

J2

B e f o r e : 10 p t

C

{2

After:

m

Align •

S e n d B a c k w a r d ' tgj

Group • ^ Rotate

T

e-r

_nj

SAe rl er ac nt igoen P a n e

r j

Paragraph

M

' P R O P O S A L FOR M O U N T A I N B I K I N G AT NORTH LAKE CAMP

top margin

title starts lower than one inch on the page because the Title style includes 25 points of space before the paragraph

QP3QBTUNITY|

i;i ; iKE'te -•»:•--j tea •C v , ur-e -esi % |M r i d * ' , o

bottom margin

Page: 1 of A

Exhibit 11-24 Margins menu

Home

might not appear on your screen or might be different

Insert

j

VJL

Exhibit 11-25 Page Setup dialog box with the Margins tab selected

^

Page Layout

Orientation » ^

References

Breaks »

Margins tab

Page Setup Margins

Paper

LAYOUT

Margins [Al" Themes,—.

^—^

MJ

Margins

III

Size ' £J Line N u m b e r s " LAST CUSTOM SETTING B o t t o m : 1" Right: 1.5' Columns -

be

Hyphenation • B o t t o m : 1" Right: I"

B o t t o m : 0.5" Right: 0.5'

selected margin

g

lop: LEFT: GUTTER:

•

life

0'

GUTTER POSITION:

LEFT

Orientation

i s section PORTRAIT

LANDSCAPE

PAGES B o t t o m : 1" Right: 0.75"

MULTIPLE PAGES:

NORMAL

B o t t o m : 1" Right: 2"

click to open the Margins tab in the Page Setup dialog box

MIRRORED Top: I n s i d e : 1.25"

B o t t o m : 1" Outside:!"

OFFICE 2003 DEFAULT Top: 1" B o t t o m : 1' Left: 1.25' Right: 1.25" Custom Margins..

APPLY, TO:

WHOLE DOCUMENT

[•]

! SET AS DEFAULT

Chapter

I

11:

Formatting

a Long



column right border t o the right

until the M o v e Table C o l u m n m a r k e r o n the ruler

Table^RicrosoftWorcF

References

Insert B e l o w

Move Table Column markers

Mailings

I

^ V i e w Gridlines £

Properties Table

m September3/2014H

Left Indent marker indicates the left indent in the current cell

DearHelenJ This-isto^onfirmthatvou-haveregisteredforttififollowing-classes.ll Classn

Daya

Balletn

Tuesdayn

Tapa

Tuesdayn

6-7u

Lyricn

Thursday**

7:45-9a

Modernn

Wednesday!*

6-8o

1

l

|Timea 5-6H

Chapter

12: Enhancing

a

Document

Day right column border to the 2-inch mark on the ruler. See E x h i b i t

I D r a g the the

right to 12-7.

Understanding AutoFit in Tables

Exhibit 12-7 Table with columns one-inch wide Class T a b l e ~ M i c r c s o f t W o i Page Layout S Insert

Above

References

Mailings

Review

Viev

apl Insert B e l o w

J9

M e r g e Cells

£[] 0J.7'

C

dj

• i l I n s e r t Left

^ SI

Split Cells

r-r} 1.06'

*

jj

- ^ j Split T a b l e Jr

Insert Right

tSa A u t o F i t •

Merge

Cell Size

R o w s fit C o l u m n s

September-3-,20141

Dear-Helen,! Thisisto-confirm-thatYOu-have-registeredforthefol Calssn Dayn Tim en Baletn Tuesdayn 5-6n Tapn Tuesdayn 6-7n Lyricn Thursdayn 7:45-9n Modernn Wednesdayn 6-8n Formatting Tables with Table Styles You have already used styles to format text and paragraphs. Word also includes a variety of built-in styles that you can

The default setting for tables in Word is for the table width to be the same width as the page, for text to wrap within cells, and for the columns to automatically resize as you enter text. This means that if you enter text in a cell with a natural breaking point, such as between words, the text will wrap within the cell. But if there is no natural breaking point, the column will widen to accommodate the long entry and the other columns will become narrower to keep the total width of the table the same. You can control this behavior using the commands on the AutoFit button menu in the Cell Size group on the Table Tools Layout tab. The first command, AutoFit Contents, changes the column width to just fit the contents of each cell, including shrinking the width of empty columns. The second command, AutoFit Window, returns the table to the default behavior. The third command. Fixed Column Width, causes the column widths to stay the same no matter how wide an entry is.

use to add borders, shading, and color to tables. You select a table style from the Table Styles group on the Table Tools Design tab, which displays a selection of table styles. W h e n you apply a style t o a table, you can select or deselect the check b o x e s in the Table Style Options group on the Table Tools Design tab to format the rows

group, the Header R o w , First C o l u m n , and Banded R o w s check b o x e s are selected. | In the Table Styles group, click the 0.

More button

T h e Table Styles gallery opens. N o w the plain

and columns either before or after you apply a style. For

black-and-white grid style appears at the top of

example, you can specify that the first and last rows—the

the gallery, in the Plain Tables section. T h e rest o f

header and total r o w s — a n d the first and last columns

the Table Styles appear in the Built-in section. See

be formatted differently from the rest o f the rows and

Exhibit 1 2 - 8 .

columns in the table. Some styles format the rows in al-

banded rows, while others format in alternating colors, called banded columns.

ternating colors, called the columns

| In the Built-in section, in the fifth row, click the

ACTIVITY Apply a table style. On the R i b b o n , click the Table Tools Design tab. In the Table Styles g r o u p , the plain black-and-white grid style is highlighted, indicating that it is the ta-

banded rows (banded columns) Formatting that displays alternate rows (or columns) in a table with different fill colors.

i k e other styles, ir you change the theme after applying a table style, the colors in the table change to match the colors of the theme^^

xhibit 12-8 Table Styles gallery Exh

IM'LI^I

Home

Insert

\7\ H e a d e r R o w

[7]

First C o l u m n

O Total R o w

•

Last C o l u m n

Page Layout

References

Mailings

Review

Medium Shading 2 - Accent 4 style

(the purple style).

T h e Table Styles gallery closes and the table is formatted with the style you selected.

Developer

Aligning Tables and Text in Tables You c a n change the alignment o f text in cells and y o u can change the alignment o f the entire table. T o change

| In the T a b l e Style Options group, click the First

Column

View

[ Plain Tables

c h e c k b o x t o deselect it. T h e bold format-

the alignment o f text in cells, use the alignment buttons in the Alignment group on the Table T o o l s Layout t a b .

ting and dark purple shading are removed from

T o change the alignment o f the table, align it the same

the first c o l u m n in the table.

way you align a paragraph by using the paragraph alignment buttons in the Paragraph group o n the H o m e t a b .

Fine-tuning Table Styles After you apply a table style to a table, you might like the look of the table, but find that it no longer effectively CONVEYS the information or is not quite as easy to read. To solve this problem, you can, of course, apply a different style to the table. You can also customize the table formatting by using the Shading and Borders buttons in the Table Styles group on the Table Tools Design tab. Remember that built-in styles and shading and border colors that you choose from the Theme Colors in the color palette will change if you change the theme.

J

Align a table and the text in a table.

QP Click the table move handle \^\ t o select the entire table.

Q ^ O n the R i b b o n , click the Home tab. In the Paragraph group, click the

Center button

T h e table

is centered horizontally on the page. Select the Time column.

Q|

O n the R i b b o n , click the

Table Tools Layout tab. Align Top Center

In the Alignment group, click the

button [ 3 . All the text in the T i m e c o l u m n is centered in the cells. See E x h i b i t 1 2 - 9 . I Save the document.

Chapter

12:

Enhancing

a

Document

Exhibit 12-9 Center-aligned table and column text

Home Select -

sert

ferences Page Layout

Ret

\M V i e w Gridlines Bf

Properties

^ rl

Table

E

•

e

i rfrf]

ajJ

Mailings

M e r g e Cells Split Cells Split T a b l e

Insert B e l o w

^™ -il I n s e r t Left Insert A b o v e i l r Insert R i g h t Rows & Columns Q

Merge

Review

Si £3

017-

rt, - u t o1-06' Fit ' Cell Size

Dev/loper

: dj

Design

z

=J -I ^ ' sd

I

i i :sd H

A

Cell Direction Margins T e x t

September-3,2 -01411

|

3= C Q R eo pn ev ea rt t Ht eoa Tdeexrt R o w s

FT IF o r m u l a • rf?= Sort Data

text centered in cells

Dear-Heeln,U This-isto-confirm that-you-haveTegisteredforthefolowing-classes.il 1 Calssn Dayn Timen Baletn Tuesdayn 5-6n Tapn Tuesdayn Lyricn Thursdayn 7:45-9n Modernn Wednesdayn 6-7n 6-8n

LO12.2 Changing the Page Orientation

Change the page orientation. Q)

O p e n the d a t a file

Flyer

l o c a t e d in the C h a p t e r 12\

Dance Flyer.

V/

ou can set the orientation—the w a y a page is

Chapter folder. Save the d o c u m e n t as

A

t u r n e d — f o r the pages in a d o c u m e n t . A page set

T h e document opens in O n e Page view.

to

portrait orientation is t a l l e r t h a n it is w i d e . T h i s

o r i e n t a t i o n , m o s t c o m m o n l y used f o r letters, r e p o r t s , and o t h e r formal d o c u m e n t s , is the usual o r i e n t a t i o n for most Word documents.

Landscape orientation is

a page that is wider t h a n it is tall. Y o u c a n easily

£P O n the R i b b o n , click the Page Layout tab. Page Setup group, click the

In the

Orientation button. T h e

Orientation menu opens with Portrait selected. O n the m e n u , click

Landscape.

The document

c h a n g e the o r i e n t a t i o n o f a d o c u m e n t using the O r i -

changes t o landscape orientation, with the page

e n t a t i o n button in the Page Setup g r o u p on the Page

wider than it is tall. See E x h i b i t 1 2 - 1 0 .

Layout tab.

LO12.3 Working with Document Sections

orientation The way a page is turned. portrait orientation The layout of a page taller than it is wide. landscape orientation The layout of a page wider than it is tall. section A part of a document that can have its own pagelevel formatting and properties.

Chapter

12: Enhancing

a

Document

A

section is a part o f a d o c u m e n t that can have its

own page-level formatting and properties. F o r e x -

ample, you can format one section in a document with

one-inch margins and portrait orientation, and the next section with two-inch margins and landscape orientation. Different sections in a document could also have

Exhibit 12-10 Document in landscape orientation

different headers and footers, o r a n e w section c a n re-

section b r e a k . T h e formatting i n f o r m a t i o n f o r the last

start the page numbering.

section in a d o c u m e n t , o r in a d o c u m e n t w i t h n o sec-

Every d o c u m e n t has at least o n e section. T o divide a d o c u m e n t into multiple sections, you insert a section

break, which appears as a dotted line with the words Section Break. T h e four types o f section breaks are: ^

Next Page—inserts a section break and forces a new page t o start after the section break

^

^

the d o c u m e n t .

Inserting a Section Break T o insert a section break, use the B r e a k s button in the Page Setup group on the Page L a y o u t t a b t o select the

Continuous—inserts a section break without

type o f section break you w a n t t o insert. W h e n non-

starting a n e w page

printing characters are displayed, a section break is in-

Even Page—inserts a section break and forces a new page t o start o n the next even-numbered page

^

tion b r e a k s , is c o n t a i n e d in the last p a r a g r a p h m a r k in

Section Break in the center o f it, followed by the type o f section

dicated by a double dotted line with the w o r d s

break. If the section break appears at the end o f a line,

Odd Page—inserts a section break a n d forces

you c a n see only the first part o f the dotted line. T o

a n e w page t o start on the n e x t o d d - n u m b e r e d

see the type o f section break inserted, y o u c a n switch

page

to D r a f t view, which displays the t e x t o f the d o c u m e n t

T h e i n f o r m a t i o n f o r the f o r m a t t i n g o f a section

without showing its layout.

is c o n t a i n e d in the section b r e a k that follows the sect i o n . T h i s m e a n s that if y o u delete a section b r e a k , the f o r m a t t i n g f r o m the section b e l o w the deleted sec-

section break A formatting mark in a document that indicates the start of a new section.

tion b r e a k is applied t o the section a b o v e the deleted

Chapter

12: Enhancing

a

Document

Creating Odd and Even Pages Most professionally produced books and reports are even-numbered pages, they appear on the left side of printed on both sides of the paper and then bound. the footer. You can set up the pages in a multiple-page When you open a bound book or report, odd-numbered pages appear on the right, and even-numbered pages document with odd and even pages. After you insert a header or footer, on the appear on the left. The marHeader & Footer Tools Design gin on the inside of each page, even page gutter odd page tab, select the Different Odd where the pages are bound & Even Pages check box in the together, is called the gutter. Options group. To increase Often, the headers and footers the width of the gutter to alfor odd-numbered pages are low for binding, click the Mardifferent from the headers or gins button in the Page Setup footers for the even-numbered group on the Page Layout tab, pages. For instance, the page and then click Custom Margins numbers might appear on the to open the Page Setup dialog outside edge of the footer. box with the Margins tab seSo on odd-numbered pages, odd page even page lected. Change the measurepage numbers appear on the number number ment in the Gutter box. right side of the footer; and on

break appears all the way across the screen. See

ACTIVITY

Exhibit 1 2 - 1 3 .

Insert a section break.

I Switch back to Print Layout view.

View tab. In Page Width button.

O n the R i b b o n , click the group, click the

the Z o o m

Exhibit 12-11 Breaks menu

Q | Scroll down to the b o t t o m o f page 3 , and then position the insertion point in front o f the Faculty heading.

UH^^KW

| On the Ribbon, click the Page Layout tab. In the Page Setup group, click the

Breaks button. The Breaks menu opens,

^ T i p : To delete a section break, click the line representing the break, and then press the Delete key.

B

v

Themes . — . [Oj»

Home

Insert ]

^

Orientation-(^

M a r g i n s __ „ I I Columns ' Page S e t u p

._v

Registration-Fee:

"

{v =1

1 2 - 1 1 . The Page Breaks section of the menu includes to page. The first option, Page, inserts a page break (just like the Page Break button on the Insert tab that you used earlier). T h e Section Breaks section of the

Next Page. A

faculty!

tion break is inserted, and the insertion point moves to the top o f the new page 4 . See Exhibit 1 2 - 1 2 . I O n the status bar, click the

Draft button [S]. T h e

document switches to Draft view, and the section

Chapter

12: Enhancing

a

Document

Next Page * I n s e r t a s e c t i o n break a n d start t h e n e w — s e c t i o n o n t h e next p a g e .

AlUnstructorsat R with a positive a t :

sec-

lext Wrapping S e p a r a t e t e x t a r o u n d objects o n w e b p a g e s , s u c h as c a p t i o n text f r o m b o d y text.

Section Breaks

menu includes four types o f section breaks. I In the Section Breaks section, click

Column I n d i c a t e t h a t t h e text f o l l o w i n g t h e c o l u m n b r e a k w i l l b e g i n in t h e next c o l u m n .

= =l

options for controlling h o w the text flows from page

Indent

Page M a r k t h e p o i n t at w h i c h o n e p a g e e n d s a n d t h e next page begins.

*

3=

as shown in Exhibit

Watermark -

Page Breaks

types of section breaks

Tv >—-\ ^ = | = =4a^|

I 1

Continuous Insert a s e c t i o n break a n d start t h e n e w s e c t i o n o n t h e same p a g e . Even Page Insert a s e c t i o n b r e a k a n d start t h e n e w s e c t i o n o n t h e next e v e n - n u m b e r e d p a g e . O d d Page Insert a s e c t i o n break a n d start t h e n e w s e c t i o n o n t h e next o d d - n u m b e r e d p a g e .

Regsitratoin-fee: ThereHsaone-tm i eoer^amyli regsitThe ratoin•fDance eeof $25•Works formew-s^|tudentsf. 1600N-Oosrthgo-Aondd-Sotreveer.t. M OAsgoo0d1L-8a4n5d1nig* (n9t7a8c)t6 8e39.3da9n0c1e v» or ks. us E m a : l i c o s t h Web-stie: .The DanceU or ks. «:.>.»S:eCtO in Berak (NeXt Page):,:::::;:,:::,: c

us\.,,, .

WITH

Mmm

Next Page section break

IT

insertion point

^acultyH All-instructorsat T h e O a n c e W o r k s a r e f u l l y certifiedijrofessionalswhotakeiaride-in-sharing their-loveof-dance-by combining-superiortraining w i t h a p o s i t i v e a t t i t u d e . T h e y h a v e - s t u d i e d - e x t e n s i v e l y w i t h t h e finest t e a c h e r s , t j o t h - n a t i o n a l l y a n d a b r o a d . I n s t r u c t o r s maintain their-skills b y attending speciaklasses.conventions, a n d s e m i n a r s t h r o u g h o u t the year. O u r m s t r u c t o r s o f f e r a v a r i e t y o f specialtiesto e n s u r e t h a t our students get a w e l l - r o u n d e d - d a n c e - e d u c a t i o n a s t h e y p r o g r e s s l A l l i n s t r u c t o r s at t h e D a n c e W o r k s a r e m e m b e r s - o f D a n c e T e a c h e r s - C l u b o f B o s t o n a n d D a n c e M a s t e r s o f A m e r i c a !

P a g e ; 4 of 5

W o r d s : 1,448

|

Q- I ..]

LJ

L3 3

Exhibit 12-13 Next Page section break in Draft view )ance Flyer - 'Microsoft W o r e

I

Insert ^

Sh

Themes —

Page L a y o u t

O r i e n t a t i o n • iQ Breaks •

J J Size * 11 Columns ' Margins

References

£ J Line N u m b e r s ' be" H y p h e n a t i o n ~

Mailings

Review

$ Watermark» ^ Page C o l o r ' []| Page Borders

View

Developer

Indent iS. Left:

Spacing 0*

i f * R i g h t : 0'

B e f o r e : 0 pt

* \% A f t e r .

Page B a c k g r o u n d

Page Setup

C

Opt

* >< ' Position

Paragraph

Wrap _ Text • 5*

Send Backward

Selection Pane Arrange

^|&GroAuplign%X R o t a t e

becauseof-a-holidayor-ilness/she-orhe-can-m RegistrationFee:ThGrGis-a-one-timeper-family-registration-fee-of$25-fornew-students.11

The • Dance - Works^ 1600NorthAi 0sgooiddoxci Stiee,t,O sAgoo01d8L4a5id«1ingH M (9t7o8ita)6c8t3e-l9h3e9d0a1ic1euorks.is*] E m a i l : • Web-stie:*www.TteiDanceWorks.us1| ,Section Break ( N e x t P a g e ) , ,

^acultyH AII-instructors-atThe-Dance-Works-a

^^^^

S

section break in ^ ^ ^ ^ ^

j'^'''k'^''*^^ p r

en s

a r n g t

e r

Q

Chapter

12:

Enhancing

a

Document

Formatting a Section Differently from the Rest of the Document

and then click

Portrait.

Section 2 , which consists

of pages 4 and 5 , changes t o portrait orientation. Section 1 , which consists o f pages 1 - 3 , remains in

O n c e you have inserted a section break, you c a n for-

landscape orientation.

m a t each section separately. W h e n you change the page-

In the Page S e t u p group, click the Margins button.

level formatting of a section, the other sections in the

and then click Narrow. T h e margin settings for Sec-

document remain unchanged.

tion 2 change to the N a r r o w setting, and the text in Section 2 n o w fits all on page 4 . See Exhibit 1 2 - 1 4 .

Adding Different Headers and Footers in Sections

Format a section. m

M a k e sure the i n s e r t i o n p o i n t is p o s i t i o n e d

before

O n e o f the advantages o f dividing a document into sec-

the Faculty heading on page 4 .

Q| O n the R i b b o n , click the View tab. In the Z o o m

tions is that the headers and footers in each section can differ. F o r example, if the d o c u m e n t includes a cover

group, click the Two Pages button. Pages 3 and 4 o f

page, and you w a n t the page numbering to begin o n

the document appear side by side in the window. O n the R i b b o n , click the

the first page after the cover page, you can insert a sec-

Page Layout tab. In the button,

tion break after the cover page, a n d then have the page

Page Setup group, click the Orientation

numbers start and appear only in Section 2 .

Exhibit 12-14 Page 4 formatted in portrait orientation with narrow margins

^aTceTrye^^icrosoft Woer?" J

M£ Themes . — ,

2 | O r i e n t a t i o n • l£j B r e a k s •

Margins

Themes

II

^

Watermark »

v*J Page C o l o r »

%W Left:

be" H y p h e n a t i o n •

Q Page B o r d e r s

| £ R i g h t 0"

Page B a c k g r o u n d

C o lPuamgnes S•e t u p

|£ A l i g n •

Spacing

Indent

): J Line N u m b e r s •

0*

t

1% B e f o r e : 0 p t

P a rC a g r a p;fh

After

:|

Posrtic

- j Send Backward Text

t^J G r o u p Rotate •

5^ S e l e c t i o n Pane Arrange

0 pt

Section 1 in landscape orientation Page 4 of 4

i m UP 5 s

W o r d s 1,446

Li

Chapter

12: Enhancing

a

Document

44%

-

ige Dutton in the

I Press the Tab key, and then type your name. Your name is aligned with the Center T a b stop in the footer.

Pages group on the Insert tab automatically inserts a section break after the cover page.

I Scroll up to see the b o t t o m o f page 3 . T h e footer area on this page is labeled F o o t e r -Section 1 - , and your n a m e appears here as well. | Scroll b a c k down, and m a k e sure the insertion point is still in the footer area for Section 2 .

ACTIVITY

) O n the H e a d e r & Footer Tools Design t a b , in the N a v i g a t i o n group, click the

Add different headers and footers in sections.

fP C h a n g e the

z o o m back to

Page Width,

and m a k e

Same as Previous tag on the f o o t e r disappears.

sure the insertion point is still before the Faculty

| Scroll up so you can see the b o t t o m o f page 3 .

heading on page 4 .

pP On the

N o t i c e that the Section 2 header area on page 4

Inserttab. In the I l e a d e r cv Footer group, click the Footer button, and then below the gallery, click Edit Footer. T h e insertion point moves R i b b o n , click the

still c o n t a i n s the Same as Previous tag. ) O n page 3 , in the footer area, delete the t a b character before your name so it is left-aligned, and

to the footer area on page 4 . T h e Footer area is la-

then position the insertion point after y o u r n a m e .

beled Footer -Section 2-, and on the right, a tag labels this footer the Same as Previous. See Exhibit 1 2 - 1 5 .

j

Header Footer

Page Number'

Date i-Time

Q u i c k Picture Parts Insert

Header & Footer

BUI JU Clip Art

DRAFT.

and then type

Link to Previous button

ance"Flye^^icrosoft Wor References

Tab key twice,

) Press the

Exhibit 12-15 Footer area for Section 2

Page L a y o u t

Link to Previous

button. T h e button is no longer selected, a n d the

Mailings

Header Footei

1

Header & Footer Toosl I Design

Review

Link t o P r e v i o u s

•

D i f f e r e n t First P a g e

Qi

Header from Top:

0.5'

•

D i f f e r e n t O d d & E v e n Pages

Q«

Footer from Bottom:

0.5"

[7]

S h o w D o c u m e n t Text

0

Insert A l i g n m e n t T a b

Navigation

Options

Close Header and Footer

Position

Heather

- i

you can edit the colors o f WordArt text in t w o ways: by changing the fill and outline color.

YJordT

Dance Flyer~^Microsoft

Review —

-

Viev\ Bf

- S

•

You can also change the style o f the outline,

Develo

Picture B o r d e r '

by, for example, making it thicker, or breaking

Picture Effects -

it into dashes.

Picture L a y o u t -

/ /

WordArt is actually a t e x t b o x . A

text

box is an object that c o n t a i n s t e x t . Y o u c a n f o r m a t the text in the o b j e c t just as y o u would format any t e x t in a d o c u m e n t . Y o u

Dance* Works 1

can also format the entire o b j e c t . W h e n the selection border around W o r d A r t is a dashed line, the insertion point is positioned in the t e x t , and you can treat the t e x t as y o u w o u l d ordinary text. Y o u c a n edit it o r select it a n d then apply formatting. W h e n t h e selection border around W o r d A r t is a solid line, the entire WordArt o b j e c t is selected. W h e n the W o r d A r t object is selected, y o u c a n apply

Welcome

formatting t o the W o r d A r t t e x t even though it is n o t specifically selected, a n d y o u c a n a p ply formatting t o the t e x t b o x itself, such as changing the fill or outline color.

Removing a Photo's Background One specialized technique for editing photos allows you to remove the background of a photo, leaving only the foreground image. For example, you can edit a photo of a bird in the sky to remove the sky, leaving only the image of the bird. To edit a photo to remove the background, use the Remove Background button in the Adjust group on the Picture Tools Format tab. Removing a photo's background can be tricky, especially if you are working on a photo with a background that is not clearly differentiated from the foreground image. For example, you might find it difficult to remove a white, snowy background from a photo of an equally white snowman.

Inserting WordArt Y o u c a n create WordArt out o f existing t e x t in a d o c u ment by selecting the text, clicking the W o r d A r t b u t t o n in the T e x t group o n the Insert t a b , a n d then selecting a W o r d A r t style from the gallery that o p e n s . Y o u c a n also click the W o r d A r t button in the T e x t group o n the Insert tab, and then click the style y o u w a n t in the W o r d A r t gallery t o open a W o r d A r t text b o x c o n t a i n i n g placeholder text. Y o u c a n then replace t h e placeholder with the text y o u w a n t t o format as W o r d A r t .

Insert WordArt. At the top o f the document, select Dance Works w i t h o u t selecting the p a r a g r a p h m a r k at the end o f the line.

LO125 A d d i n g

W

ordArt

WordArt

O n the R i b b o n , click the

Insert tab.

In the T e x t

group, click the WordArt button. T h e W o r d A r t galis formatted, decorative text that is treated

lery opens. See E x h i b i t 1 2 - 2 2 .

as an object. In addition to the formatting that you

can use with ordinary text, you can add beveled edges to the individual letters, format the text in 3 D , and transform the text into waves, circles, and other shapes. You can also rotate WordArt text so it stretches vertically on the page.

WordArt Formatted, decorative text that is treated as a graphic object. text box An object that contains text.

Another advantage o f WordArt over regular text is that

Chapter

12: Enhancing

a

Document

) In the W o r d A r t object, click be-

Exhibit 12-22 WordArt gallery e Fryer •

fore the w o r d

Mailings

T h e W o r d A r t text is modified.

Developer Hyperlink

Chart

and then press the

i—ri——i,

WordArt button

:rosoft Word""*

^J

Bookmark

Screenshot

H F oe oa tdeerr *•

A

Text Box'

Page N u m b e r J^J C r o sLinks s-reference

I

Header & Footer

j

Qui^Pa'n^^

J

\A

Equation '

Q

Symbol •

Formatting WordArt

A

T h e W o r d A r t Styles group on the D r a w i n g T o o l s F o r m a t tab includes

A A A A A A A A A A A A A ^A A A

A

A

Fill - Purple, Accent 4, Outer Shadow Accent 4, Soft Edge Bevel style

7t

Date & T i m e

A

A

Dance. Works 1]

S i g n a t u r e Line

The Spacebar. Type

DANCE.

four tools that allow you to alter the color, shape, and overall look o f W o r d A r t . If you don't like the style you selected w h e n you originally created your W o r d A r t , you can select a new style using the Quick Styles button in the W o r d A r t Styles group. T o change the fill color, use the T e x t Fill button, or, to change the outline color, use the T e x t Outline button. Finally, the T e x t Effects button gives

Welcome-to-The-Dance-Works!1|

you access to a variety of special effects, including shadows, beveling, and 3 D r o t a t i o n , and transforming

p In the bottom row, click the Fill - Purple, Accent 4,

the shape o f the WordArt. If your WordArt already includes some o f these features, you

Outer Shadow - Accent 4, Soft Edge Bevel style. The gal-

can use the Text Effects button t o fine tune the effects,

lery closes, the selected text is changed to a WordArt

perhaps by making a shadow or bevel m o r e noticeable,

object, and the Drawing Tools Format tab appears on

or by removing an effect entirely. In addition, you can

the Ribbon and is the active tab. See Exhibit 1 2 - 2 3 .

Exhibit 12-23 WordArt inserted in document

[WfT,d

'

">

~^^^WIWBBM^^^^aTcTFIyer^Microsoft

Home \ D O D

Insert

El W O O D

A ~L" E LX ~L

O

Page Layout . s v

| {

O

-

S

References . >

{

(

t-

'V I

-v }

I Abe I

Abe

WorcH

Mailings Review ^ Shape F i l l , - & Shape F i l l -

Abe

,

LV

Shape Outline -

I

I*

*

j

I

J

I

J

9

View

Az» A '

Developer

^ * Styles

&

-

Format

Ufl Text D i r e c t i o n -|4 \ A l i g n Text » Create Link

. V o r d A r t Styles

S h a p e Styles

* IT

*

N

Insert Shapes

~

Drawing Tools Format tab

W

Quick S h a p e Effects -

Text

1*1 1

Position

» B ™ 1

Wrap Text-

™

g

f

o ™ , , , d -

Send Backward ' S e l e c t i o n Pane

, -M

stv)es

Dance-Works

r

WordArt object WelcometoTheDanceWorkslH

Chapter

12:

Enhancing

a

Document

ft* [\ .j^-

S«e

just as you w o u l d for ordinary t e x t , by selecting it and

Text Boxes

then c h o o s i n g a n e w font size. If y o u c h o o s e an espe-

You can insert text boxes containing ordinary text— that is, text that is not WordArt. To do this, click the Text Box button in the Text group on the Insert tab. Click one of the styles in the gallery to insert a formatted text box containing placeholder text, or click Draw Text Box to insert an empty text box. You can format the text in a text box just as you would any text. You can also format the text box itself by adding or changing the fill color or the color or weight of the border. Text boxes are inserted as floating objects.

resize the t e x t b o x to ensure t h a t t h e resized t e x t a p -

cially large f o n t f o r a headline, y o u m i g h t also need t o pears o n a single line.

Format WordArt. Q)

WORDART DOTTED LINE SELECTION BORDER.

Click the

It

b e c o m e s a solid line. On the D r a w i n g Tools F o r m a t t a b , in t h e W o r d A r t Styles g r o u p , click the Text Outline

button arrow

T h e c o l o r palette opens. c h a n g e t h e shape o f the W o r d A r t o b j e c t by using the

I In the c o l o r palette, under T h e m e C o l o r s , click the

T r a n s f o r m c o m m a n d on the T e x t Effects b u t t o n .

Purple, Accent 4, Lighter 80% color.

Y o u c a n also change the size o f W o r d A r t . W h e n re-

Text Effects Transform. A gallery

sizing W o r d A r t , you need t o consider both the font size

In the W o r d A r t Styles g r o u p , click the

o f the t e x t a n d the size o f the t e x t b o x that c o n t a i n s the

button |.-\

W o r d A r t . Y o u change the font size f o r W o r d A r t text

o f t r a n s f o r m effects appears. See E x h i b i t 1 2 - 2 4 .

\ and then

point t o

Exhibit 12-24 Transform submenu on the Text Effects menu LWY" .-*F H o m e I n s e r t QWDOCD A L L O ^ G - EL Insert Shapes

0

Page L a y o u t

References

Mailings

Review

View

JFC S h a p e F i l l t l -

^

Shape Outline „ •» S h a p e Effects -

S h a p e Styles

Developer -

M Text D i r e c t i o n -

* FEF Q u i c k R-R-M

_*J A l i g n T e x t »

Styles-

w

*'

I Position

Create Link

•

Wrap T e x t

-

• * WordArt S J 7T

/J^

JJ B r i n g F o r w a r d * ^ Send Backward - W ^_ ' %

Selection Pane

Size

^I-

A R R A N G E

Shadow

A

. J_\^ LEVEL

•

ITD :E Follow Path

3-D Rotation • Transform

Warp

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE BCD • Q

E

Dance-Works!^ At-TheOance-WORK5,we-5TRIVETO-developwell-traineddancersthro or^erfull-potentaMn a

5UPPORTIVE«nvrionnr>ENTHNVVHICHOUR